Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

Question 1.
What does the term ‘redox’ refer to?
Answer:
Redox is an abbreviation used for the terms ‘oxidation and reduction’.

Question 2.
Give examples of naturally occurring redox reactions.
Answer:

  1. Respiration
  2. Rusting
  3. Combustion of fuel

Question 3.
Define Oxidant/Oxidising agent.
Answer:
A reagent/substance which itself undergoes reduction and causes oxidation of another species is called oxidant/oxidising agent.

Question 4.
Define: Reductant/Reducing agent
Answer:
A reagent/substance which itself undergoes oxidation bringing about the reduction of another species is called reductant/reducing agent.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

Question 5.
Explain redox reaction giving an example.
Answer:
Oxidation and reduction reactions occur simultaneously. Therefore, the oxidation-reduction reaction is also referred to as a redox reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 1
In the above reaction, HgCl2 is reduced to Hg2Cl2 and SnCl2 is oxidised to SnCl4. Hence, it is a redox reaction.

Question 6.
Explain redox reaction in terms of electron transfer.
Answer:
i. Redox reaction can be described in terms of electron transfer as shown below:
2Mg(s) + O2(g) → Mg2+ + 2O2-
ii. Charge development suggests that each magnesium atom loses two electrons to form Mg2+ and each oxygen atom gains two electrons to form O2-. This can be represented as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 2
iii. When Mg is oxidised to MgO, the neutral Mg atom loses electrons to form Mg2+ in MgO while the elemental oxygen gains electrons and forms O2- in MgO.
iv. Each of the above steps represents a half reaction which involves electron transfer (loss or gain).
v. Sum of these two half reactions or the overall reaction is a redox reaction.

Question 7.
Justify the following reaction as redox reaction in terms of electron transfer.
Mg + F2 → MgF2
Answer:
i. Redox reaction can be described in terms of electron transfer as shown below:
Mg(s) + F2(g) → Mg2+ + 2F
ii. Charge development suggests that magnesium atom loses two electrons to form Mg2+ and each fluorine atom gains one electron to form F. This can be represented as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 3
iii. When Mg is oxidised to MgF2, the neutral Mg atom loses electrons to form Mg2+ in MgF2 while the elemental fluorine gains electrons and forms Fin MgF2.
iv. Each of the above steps represents a half reaction which involves electron transfer (loss or gain).
v. Sum of these two half reactions or the overall reaction is a redox reaction.

Question 8.
Justify that the reaction 2Na(s) + H2(g) → 2NaH(s) is a redox reaction.
Answer:
Redox reaction can be described as electron transfer as shown below:
2Na(s) + H2(g) → 2Na+ + 2H
ii. Charge development suggests that each sodium atom loses one electron to form Na+ and each hydrogen atom gains one electron to form H. This can be represented as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 4
iii. When Na is oxidised to NaH, the neutral Na atom loses one electron to form Na+ in NaH while the elemental hydrogen gains one electron and forms H in NaH.
iv. Each of the above steps represents a half reaction which involves electron transfer (loss or gain).
v. Sum of these two half reactions or the overall reaction is a redox reaction.

Question 9.
Define the terms oxidation and reduction in terms of electron transfer.
Answer:
i. The half reaction involving loss of electrons is called oxidation reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 5
ii. The half reaction involving gain of electrons is called reduction reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 6

Question 10.
Define the terms oxidant and reductant in terms of electron transfer.
Answer:

  1. Oxidant: Oxidant or oxidising agent is an electron acceptor.
  2. Reductant: Reductant or reducing agent is an electron donor.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

Question 11.
Identify oxidising and reducing agents in the following reaction.
\(\mathrm{Fe}_{(s)}+\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{s})}\)
Answer:
Fe(s) acts as a reducing agent as it donates electrons while \(\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\) acts as an oxidising agent as it accepts electrons.

Question 12.
Define: Displacement reaction.
Answer:
A reaction in which an ion (or an atom) in a compound is replaced by an ion (or an atom) of another element is called displacement reaction.
e.g. X + YZ → XZ + Y

Question 13.
Draw structure and assign oxidation number to each atom in:
i. Br3O8
ii. C3O2
Answer:
i. Br3O8
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 7

ii. C3O2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 8

Question 14.
Deduce the oxidation number of S in the following species:
i. SO2
ii. \(\mathrm{SO}_{4}^{2-}\)
Answer:
i. SO2 is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of oxidation numbers of all atoms of SO2 = 0
∴ (Oxidation number of S) + 2 × (Oxidation number of O) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of S + 2 × (- 2) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of S in SO2 = 0 – (- 4)
∴ Oxidation number of S in SO2 = +4

ii. \(\mathrm{SO}_{4}^{2-}\) is an ionic species.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms of \(\mathrm{SO}_{4}^{2-}\) = – 2
∴ (Oxidation number of S) + 4 × (Oxidation number of O) = – 2
∴ Oxidation number of S in \(\mathrm{SO}_{4}^{2-}\) = – 2 – 4 × (-2) = – 2 + 8
∴ Oxidation number of S in \(\mathrm{SO}_{4}^{2-}\) = +6

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

Question 15.
Assign oxidation number to each element in the following compounds or ions.
i. KMnO4
ii. K2Cr2O7
iii. Ca3(PO4)2
Answer:
i. KMnO4
Oxidation number of K = +1
Oxidation number of O = -2
KMnO4 is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ (Oxidation number of K) + (Oxidation number of Mn) + 4 × (Oxidation number of O) = 0
∴ (+1) + Oxidation number of Mn + 4 × (-2) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of Mn + 1 – 8 = 0
∴ Oxidation number of Mn – 7 = 0
∴ Oxidation number of Mn in KMnO4 = +7

ii. K2Cr2O7
Oxidation number of K = +1
Oxidation number of O = -2
K2Cr2O7 is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of K) + 2 × (Oxidation number of Cr) + 7 × (Oxidation number of O) = 0
∴ 2 × (+1) + 2 × (Oxidation number of Cr) + 7 × (-2) = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of Cr) + 2 – 14 = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of Cr) – 12 = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of Cr) = +12
∴ Oxidation number of Cr = +12/2
∴ Oxidation number of Cr in K2Cr2O7 = +6

iii. Ca3(PO4)2
Oxidation number of Ca = +2 (∵ Ca is alkaline earth metal.)
Oxidation number of O = -2
Ca3(PO4)2 is a neutral molecule.
Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ 3 × (Oxidation number of Ca) + 2 × (Oxidation number of P) + 8 × (Oxidation number of O) = 0
∴ 3 × (+2)+ 2 × (Oxidation number of P)+ 8 × (-2) = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of P) + 6 – 16 = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of P) – 10 = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of P) = +10
∴ Oxidation number of P = +10/2
∴ Oxidation number of P in Ca3(PO4)2 = +5

Question 16.
Assign oxidation number to the atoms other than O and H in the following species.
i. \(\mathrm{SO}_{3}^{2-}\)
ii. \(\mathrm{BrO}_{3}^{-}\)
iii. \(\mathrm{ClO}_{4}^{-}\)
iv. \(\mathrm{NH}_{4}^{+}\)
v. \(\mathrm{NO}_{3}^{-}\)
vi. \(\mathrm{NO}_{2}^{-}\)
vii. SO3
viii. N2O5
Answer:
The oxidation number of O atom bonded to a more electropositive atom is -2 and that of H atom bonded to electronegative atom is +1. Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms in ionic species is equal to charge it carries and that for neutral molecule is zero. Using these values, the oxidation numbers of atoms of the other elements in a given polyatomic species are calculated as follows:
i. \(\mathrm{SO}_{3}^{2-}\)
(Oxidation number of S) + 3 × (Oxidation number of O) = – 2
∴ Oxidation number of S + 3 × (-2) = – 2
∴ Oxidation number of S – 6 = – 2
∴ Oxidation number of S = – 2 + 6
∴ Oxidation number of S in \(\mathrm{SO}_{3}^{2-}\) = +4

ii. \(\mathrm{BrO}_{3}^{-}\)
(Oxidation number of Br) + 3 × (Oxidation number of O) = -1
∴ Oxidation number of Br + 3 × (-2) = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of Br – 6 = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of Br = – 1 + 6
Oxidation number of Br in \(\mathrm{BrO}_{3}^{-}\) = +5

iii. \(\mathrm{ClO}_{4}^{-}\)
(Oxidation number of Cl) + 4 × (Oxidation number of O) = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of Cl + 4 × (-2) = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of Cl – 8 = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of Cl = – 1 + 8
∴ Oxidation number of Cl in \(\mathrm{ClO}_{4}^{-}\) = +7

iv. \(\mathrm{NH}_{4}^{+}\)
(Oxidation number of N) + 4 × (Oxidation number of H) = + 1
∴ Oxidation number of N + 4 × (+1) = +1
∴ Oxidation number of N + 4 = + 1
∴ Oxidation number of N = + 1 – 4
∴ Oxidation number of N in \(\mathrm{NH}_{4}^{+}\) = -3

v. \(\mathrm{NO}_{3}^{-}\)
(Oxidation number of N) + 3 × (Oxidation number of O) = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of N + 3 × (-2) = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of N – 6 = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of N = – 1 + 6
∴ Oxidation number of N in \(\mathrm{NO}_{3}^{-}\) = +5

vi. \(\mathrm{NO}_{2}^{-}\)
(Oxidation number of N) + 2 × (Oxidation number of O) = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of N + 2 × (-2) = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of N – 4 = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of N = – 1 + 4
∴ Oxidation number of N in \(\mathrm{NO}_{2}^{-}\) = +3

vii. SO3
(Oxidation number of S) + 3 × (Oxidation number of O) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of S + 3 × (-2) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of S – 6 = 0
∴ Oxidation number of S = 0 + 6
∴ Oxidation number of S in SO3 = +6

viii. N2O5
2 × (Oxidation number of N) + 5 × (Oxidation number of O) = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of N) + 5 × (-2) = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of N) – 10 = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of N) = 0 + 10
∴ Oxidation number of N = 10/2
∴ Oxidation number of N in N2O5 = +5

Question 17.
Find the oxidation numbers of the underlined species in the following compounds or ions.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 9
Answer:
i. P\(\mathrm{F}_{6}^{-}\)
Oxidation number of F = -1
P\(\mathrm{F}_{6}^{-}\) is an ionic species.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = – 1
∴ (Oxidation number of P) + 6 × (Oxidation number of F) = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of P + 6 × (-1) = -1
∴ Oxidation number of P – 6 = – 1
Oxidation number of P in P\(\mathrm{F}_{6}^{-}\) = +5

ii. NaIO3
Oxidation number of Na = +1
Oxidation number of O = -2
NaIO3 is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
(Oxidation number of Na) + (Oxidation number of I) + 3 × (Oxidation number of O) = 0
(+1) + (Oxidation number of I) + 3 × (-2) = 0
Oxidation number of I + 1 – 6 = 0
Oxidation number of I in NaIO3 = +5

iii. NaHCO3
Oxidation number of Na = +1
Oxidation number of H = +1
Oxidation number of O = -2
NaHCO3 is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ (Oxidation number of Na) + (Oxidation number of H) + (Oxidation number of C) + 3 × (Oxidation number of O) = 0
∴ (+1) + (+1) + (Oxidation number of C) + 3 × (-2) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of C + 2 – 6 = 0
∴ Oxidation number of C in NaHCO3 = +4

iv. ClF3
Oxidation number of F = -1
ClF3 is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ (Oxidation number of Cl) + 3 × (Oxidation number of F) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of Cl + 3 × (-1) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of Cl in ClF3 = +3

v. Sb\(\mathrm{F}_{6}^{-}\)
Oxidation number of F = -1
Sb\(\mathrm{F}_{6}^{-}\) is an ionic species.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = – 1
∴ (Oxidation number of Sb) + 6 × (Oxidation number of F) = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of Sb + 6 × (-1) = -1
∴ Oxidation number of Sb in Sb\(\mathrm{F}_{6}^{-}\) = +5

vi. NaBH4
Oxidation number of Na =+1
Oxidation number of H = -1 (for Hydride)
NaBH4 is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ (Oxidation number of Na) + (Oxidation number of B) + 4 × (Oxidation number of H) = 0
∴ (+1) + (Oxidation number of B) + 4 × (-1) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of B + 1 – 4 = 0
∴ Oxidation number of B in NaBH4 = +3

vii. H2PtCl6
Oxidation number of H = +1
Oxidation number of Cl = -1
H2PtCl6 is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of H) + (Oxidation number of Pt) + 6 × (Oxidation number of Cl) = 0
∴ 2 × (+1) + (Oxidation number of Pt) + 6 × (-1) = 0
(Oxidation number of Pt) + 2 – 6 = 0
∴ Oxidation number of Pt in H2PtCl6 = +4

viii. H5P3O10
Oxidation number of H = +1
Oxidation number of O = -2
H5P3O10 is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ 5 × (Oxidation number of H) + 3 × (Oxidation number of P) +10 × (Oxidation number of O) = 0
∴ 5 × (+1) + 3 × (Oxidation number of P) + 10 × (-2) = 0
∴ 3 × (Oxidation number of P) + 5 – 20 = 0
Oxidation number of P = +\(\frac {15}{3}\)
∴ Oxidation number of P in H5P3O10 = +5

ix. V2\(\mathrm{O}_{7}^{4-}\)
Oxidation number of O = -2
V2\(\mathrm{O}_{7}^{4-}\) is an ionic species.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = – 4
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of V) + 7 × (Oxidation number of O) = – 4
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of V) + 7 × (-2) = – 4
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of V) = – 4 + 14
∴ Oxidation number of V = +\(\frac {10}{2}\)
∴ Oxidation number of V in V2\(\mathrm{O}_{7}^{4-}\) = +5

x. CuSO4
Oxidation number of Cu = +2
Oxidation number of O = -2
CuSO4 is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ (Oxidation number of Cu) + (Oxidation number of S) + 4 × (Oxidation number of O) = 0
∴ (+2) + Oxidation number of S + 4 × (-2) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of S + 2 – 8 = 0
∴ Oxidation number of S in CuSO4 = +6

xi. Bi\(\mathrm{O}_{3}^{-}\)
Oxidation number of O = -2
Bi\(\mathrm{O}_{3}^{-}\) is an ionic species.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = – 1
∴ (Oxidation number of Bi) + 3 × (Oxidation number of O) = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of Bi + 3 × (-2) = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of Bi = – 1 + 6
∴ Oxidation number of Bi in Bi\(\mathrm{O}_{3}^{-}\) = +5

xii. CH3OH
Oxidation number of H = +1
Oxidation number of O = -2
CH3OH is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ (Oxidation number of C) + 4 × (Oxidation number of H) + (Oxidation number of O) = 0
∴ (Oxidation number of C) + 4 × (+1) + (-2) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of C + 2 = 0
∴ Oxidation number of C in CH3OH = -2

xiii. H2O2
Oxidation number of O = -1 (for peroxide)
H2O2 is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of H) + 2 × (Oxidation number of O) = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of H) + 2 × (-1) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of H = +\(\frac {2}{2}\)
∴ Oxidation number of H in H2O2 = +1

xiv. C4H4\(\mathrm{O}_{6}^{2-}\)
Oxidation number of H = +1
Oxidation number of O = -2
C4H4\(\mathrm{O}_{6}^{2-}\) is an ionic species.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = – 2
∴ 4 × (Oxidation number of C) + 4 × (Oxidation number of H) + 6 × (Oxidation number of O) = – 2
∴ 4 × (Oxidationnumber of C) + 4 × (+1) +6 × (-2) = -2
∴ 4 × (Oxidation number of C) + 4 – 12 = -2
∴ 4 × (Oxidation number of C) = – 2 + 8
∴ Oxidation number of C = +\(\frac {6}{4}\)
∴ Oxidation number of C in C4H4\(\mathrm{O}_{6}^{2-}\) = +1.5

xv. H2As\(\mathrm{O}_{4}^{-}\)
Oxidation number of H = +1
Oxidation number of O = -2
H2As\(\mathrm{O}_{4}^{-}\) is an ionic species.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = – 1
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of H) + (Oxidation number of As) + 4 × (Oxidation number of O) = -1
∴ 2 × (+1) + Oxidation number of As + 4 × (-2) = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of As + 2 – 8 = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of As = – 1 + 6
∴ Oxidation number of As in H2As\(\mathrm{O}_{4}^{-}\) = +5

xvi. Mn(OH)3
Oxidation number of O = -2
Oxidation number of H = +1
Mn(OH)3 is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ (Oxidation number of Mn) + 3 × (Oxidation number of O) + 3 × (Oxidation number of H) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of Mn + 3 × (-2) + 3 × (+1) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of Mn – 6 + 3 = 0
∴ Oxidation number of Mn in Mn(OH)3 = +3

xvii. \(\mathrm{I}_{3}^{-}\)
\(\mathrm{I}_{3}^{-}\) is an ionic species.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = – 1
∴ 3 × Oxidation number of I = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of I in \(\mathrm{I}_{3}^{-}\) = –\(\frac {1}{3}\)

xviii. C2H5OH
Oxidation number of O = -2
Oxidation number of H = +1
C2H5OH is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of C) + 6 × (Oxidation number of H) + (Oxidation number of O) = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidationnumberof C) + 6 × (+1) + (-2) = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of C) = – 4
∴ Oxidation number of C = –\(\frac {4}{2}\)
∴ Oxidation number of C in C2H5OH = -2

xix. Na2CO3
Oxidation number of Na = +1
Oxidation number of O = -2
Na2CO3 is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of Na) + (Oxidation number of C) + 3 × (Oxidation number of O) = 0
∴ 2 × (+1) + (Oxidation number of C) + 3 × (-2) = 0
∴ Oxidation number of C + 2 – 6 = 0
∴ Oxidation number of C in Na2CO3 = +4

xx. I[latex]\mathrm{O}_{4}^{-}[/latex]
Oxidation number of O = -2
I\(\mathrm{O}_{4}^{-}\) is an ionic species.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = – 1
∴ (Oxidation number of I) + 4 × (Oxidation number of O) = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of I + 4 × (-2) = – 1
∴ Oxidation number of I = -1 +8
∴ Oxidation number of I in I\(\mathrm{O}_{4}^{-}\) = +7

xxi. V\(\mathrm{O}_{4}^{3-}\)
Oxidation number of O = -2
V\(\mathrm{O}_{4}^{3-}\) is an ionic species.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = – 3
∴ (Oxidation number of V) + 4 × (Oxidation number of O) = – 3
∴ Oxidation number of V + 4 × (-2) = – 3
∴ Oxidation number of V = -3 + 8
∴ Oxidation number of V in V\(\mathrm{O}_{4}^{3-}\) = +5

xxii. Ni2O3
Oxidation number of O = -2
Ni2O3 is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of Ni) + 3 × (Oxidation number of O) = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of Ni) + 3 × (-2) = 0
∴ 2 × (Oxidation number of Ni) = +6
∴ Oxidation number of Ni = +\(\frac {6}{2}\)
∴ Oxidation number of Ni in Ni2O3 = +3

xxiii. K3[Fe(CN)6]
Oxidation number of K = +1
Oxidation number of CN group = -1
K3[Fe(CN)6] is a neutral molecule.
∴ Sum of the oxidation numbers of all atoms = 0
∴ 3 × (Oxidation number of K) + (Oxidation number of Fe) + 6 × (Oxidation number of CN group) = 0
∴ 3 × (+1) + Oxidation number of Fe + 6 × (-1) = O
∴ Oxidation number of Fe + 3 – 6 = 0
∴ Oxidation number of Fe in K3[Fe(CN)6] = +3

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

Question 18.
Define: Stock notation.
Answer:
Representation in which oxidation number of an atom is denoted by Roman numeral in parentheses after the chemical symbol is called Stock notation. This name was given after the German scientist, Alfred Stock. e.g. Au1+Cl1- → Au(I)Cl

Question 19.
What is the use of Stock notation?
Answer:
The Stock notation is used to specify the oxidation number of the metal.

Question 20.
How will you write Stock notations for the following compounds?
i. AuCl3
ii. SnCl4
iii. SnCl2
iv. MnO2
Answer:
i. AuCl3: The charge on each element is \(\mathrm{Au}^{3+} \mathrm{Cl}_{3}^{1-}\). Hence, the stock notation is Au(III)Cl3.
ii. SnCl4: The charge on each element is \(\mathrm{Sn}^{4+} \mathrm{Cl}_{4}^{1-}\). Hence, the stock notation is Sn(IV)Cl4.
iii. SnCl2: The charge on each element is \(\mathrm{Sn}^{2+} \mathrm{Cl}_{2}^{1-}\). Hence, the stock notation is Sn(II)Cl2.
iv. MnO2: The charge on each element is \(\mathrm{Mn}^{4+} \mathrm{O}_{2}^{2-}\). Hence, the stock notation is Mn(IV)O2.

Question 21.
Write the formula for each of the following ionic compounds:
i. Nickel(III) oxide
ii. Tin(IV) chloride
iii. Bismuth(V) chloride
iv. Cobalt(III) chloride
v. Lead(IV) oxide
vi. Chromium(II) chloride
Answer:
i. Ni2O3
ii. SnCl4
iii. BiCl5
iv. CoCl3
v. PbO2
vi. CrCl2

Question 22.
Define the terms oxidation and reduction in terms of oxidation number.
Answer:
i. Oxidation is an increase in the oxidation number of an element in a given substance.
e.g. Fe(s) → \(\mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\)
ii. Reduction is a decrease in the oxidation number of an element in a given substance. e.g. \(\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\) → Cu(s)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

Question 23.
Define the terms oxidant and reductant in terms of oxidation number.
Answer:

  1. Oxidant: Oxidant or oxidising agent is a substance which increases the oxidation number of an element in a given substance, and itself undergoes decrease in oxidation number of a constituent element in it.
  2. Reductant: Reductant or reducing agent is a substance that lowers the oxidation number of an element in a given substance, and itself undergoes an increase in the oxidation number of a constituent element in it.

Question 24.
Identify whether the following reaction is redox or NOT. State oxidant and reductant therein.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 10
Answer:
i. Write oxidation number of all the atoms of reactants and products.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 11

ii. Identify the species that undergoes change in oxidation number.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 12
iii. The oxidation number of As increases from +3 to +5 and that of Br decreases from +5 to -1. Because oxidation number of one species increases and that of the other decreases, the reaction is a redox reaction.
iv. The oxidation number of As increases by loss of electrons and therefore, As is a reducing agent and itself is oxidised. On the other hand, the oxidation number of Br decreases and therefore, Br is an oxidising agent and itself is reduced by gain of electrons.
Result:
a. The given reaction is a redox reaction.
b. Oxidant/oxidising agent: \(\mathrm{BrO}_{3}^{-}\)
c. Reductant/reducing agent: H3AsO3

Question 25.
For the reaction, \(\mathrm{SeO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}+\mathrm{Cl}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+2 \mathrm{OH}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{SeO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}+2 \mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\), complete the following table.

Oxidising agent ————–
Reducing agent ————–
Oxidised species ————–
Reduced species ————–

Answer:

Oxidising agent Cl2(g)
Reducing agent \(\mathrm{Se} \mathrm{O}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}\)
Oxidised species \(\mathrm{Se} \mathrm{O}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}\)
Reduced species \(2 \mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)

Question 26.
Using oxidation number concept, identify the redox reactions, identify oxidizing and reducing agents in case of redox reactions.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 13
Answer:
i. H3PO4(aq) + 3KOH(aq) → K3PO4(aq) + 3H2O(l)
a. Write oxidation number of all the atoms of reactants and products
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 14
b. Since, the oxidation numbers of all the species remain same, this is NOT a redox reaction.

Result:
The given reaction is NOT a redox reaction.

ii. Zn(s) + 2HCl(aq) → ZnCl2((aq)) + H2(g)
a. Write oxidation number of all the atoms of reactants and products.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 15
b. Identify the species that undergoes change in oxidation number.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 16
c. The oxidation number of Zn increases from 0 to +2 and that of H decreases from +1 to 0. Because oxidation number of one species increases and that of other decreases, the reaction is redox reaction.
d. The oxidation number of Zn increases by loss of electrons and therefore, Zn is a reducing agent and itself is oxidized. On the other hand, the oxidation number of H decreases by gain of electrons and therefore, H is oxidising an agent and itself is reduced by gain of electrons.

Result:

  1. The given reaction is a redox reaction.
  2. Oxidant/oxidising agent: HCl
  3. Reductant/reducing agent: Zn

iii.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 17
c. The oxidation number of Fe increases from +2 to +3 and that of Br decreases from +5 to -1. Because oxidation number of one species increases and that of the other decreases, the reaction is a redox reaction.
d. The oxidation number of Fe increases by loss of electrons and therefore, Fe is a reducing agent and itself is oxidized. On the other hand, the oxidation number of Br decreases by gain of electrons and therefore, Br is an oxidising an agent and itself is reduced.

Result:

  1. The given reaction is a redox reaction.
  2. Oxidant/oxidising agent: \(\mathrm{BrO}_{3}^{-}\)
  3. Reductant/reducing agent: Fe2+

iv. 2Zn(s) + O2(g) → 2ZnO(s)
a. Write oxidation number of all the atoms of reactants and products.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 18
b. Identify the species that undergoes change in oxidation number.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 19
c. The oxidation number of Zn increases from 0 to +2 and that of O decreases from 0 to -2. Because oxidation number of one species increases and that of the other decreases, the reaction is a redox reaction.
d. The oxidation number of Zn increases by loss of electrons and therefore, Zn is a reducing agent and itself is oxidized. On the other hand, the oxidation number of O decreases by gain of electrons and therefore, O is an oxidising agent and itself is reduced.

Result:

  1. The given reaction is a redox reaction.
  2. Oxidant/oxidising agent: O2
  3. Reductant/reducing agent: Zn

v. \(\mathrm{Sn}_{(a q)}^{2+}+\mathrm{IO}_{4(2 q)}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Sn}_{(aq)}^{4+}+\mathrm{I}_{(a \mathrm{q})}^{-}\)
a. Write oxidation number of all the atoms of reactants and products.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 20
b. Identify the species that undergoes change in oxidation number.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 21
c. The oxidation number of Sn increases from +2 to +4 and that of I decreases from +7 to -1. Because oxidation number of one species increases and that of the other decreases, the reaction is a redox reaction.
d. The oxidation number of Sn increases by loss of electrons and therefore, Sn is a reducing agent and itself is oxidized. On the other hand, the oxidation number of I decreases by gain of electrons and therefore, I is an oxidising agent and itself is reduced.

Result:

  1. The given reaction is a redox reaction.
  2. Oxidant/oxidising agent: Sn2+
  3. Reductant/reducing agent: \(\mathrm{IO}_{4}^{-}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

Question 27.
Name two methods used to balance redox reactions.
Answer:

  1. Oxidation number method
  2. Half reaction method or ion electrode method

Question 28.
Describe the steps involved in balancing redox reactions by the oxidation number method.
Answer:
i. Step 1: Write the unbalanced equation for redox reaction. Balance the equation for all atoms in the reactions, except H and O. Identify the atoms which undergo change in oxidation number and by how much. Draw the bracket to connect atoms of the elements that changes the oxidation number.

ii. Step 2: Show an increase in oxidation number per atom of the oxidised species and hence, the net increase in oxidation number. Similarly, show a decrease in the oxidation number per atom of the reduced species and the net decrease in oxidation number. Determine the factors which will make the total increase and decrease equal. Insert the coefficients into the equation.

iii. Step 3: Balance oxygen atoms by adding H2O to the side containing less O atoms, one H2O is added for one O atom. Balance H atoms by adding H+ ions to the side having less H atoms.

iv. Step 4: If the reaction occurs in basic medium, then add OH ions equal to the number of H+ ions added in step 3, on both the sides of equation. The H+ and OH ions on same side of reactions are combined to give H2O molecules.

v. Step 5: Check the equation with respect to both, the number of atoms of each element and the charges. It is balanced.
Note: For acidic medium, step 4 is omitted.

Question 29.
Using the oxidation number method write the net ionic equation for the reaction of potassium permanganate, KMnO4, with ferrous sulphate, FeSO4.
\(\mathrm{MnO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Mn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+\mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}\)
Answer:
Step 1: Write skeletal equation and balance the elements other than O and H.
\(\mathrm{MnO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Mn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+\mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}\)

Step 2: Assign oxidation number to Mn and Fe, and calculate the increase and decrease in the oxidation number and make them equal.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 22
To make the net increase and dicrease equal, we must take 5 atoms of Fe2+
\(\mathrm{MnO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+5 \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Mn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+5 \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}\)

Step 3: Balance the ‘O’ atoms by adding 4H2O to the right-hand side.
\(\mathrm{MnO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+5 \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Mn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+5 \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}+4 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

Step 4: The medium is acidic. To make the charges and hydrogen atoms on the two sides equal, add 8H+ on the left-hand side.
\(\mathrm{MnO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+5 \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+8 \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Mn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+5 \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}+4 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

Step 5: Check the two sides for balance of charges and atoms. The net ionic equation obtained in step 4 is the balanced equation.
Hence, balanced equation:
\(\mathrm{MnO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+5 \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+8 \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Mn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+5 \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}+4 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

Question 30.
Balance the following reaction by oxidation number method.
CuO + NH3 → Cu + N2 + H2O
Answer:
Step 1: Write skeletal equation and balance the elements other than O and H.
CuO + 2NH3 → Cu + N2 + H2O
Step 2: Assign oxidation number to Cu and N. Calculate the increase and decrease in the oxidation number and make them equal.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 23
To make the net increase and decrease equal, we must take 3 atoms of Cu and 2 atoms of N. (There are already 2 N atoms.)
3CuO + 2NH3 → 3Cu + N2 + H2O
Step 3: Balance ‘O’ atoms by adding 3H2O to the right-hand side.
3CuO + 2NH3 → 3Cu + N2 + 3H2O
Step 4: Charges are already balanced.
Step 5: Check two sides for balance of atoms and charges. The equation obtained in step 3 is balanced.
Hence, balanced equation: 3CuO + 2NH3 → 3Cu + N2 + 3H2O

Question 31.
Balance the following redox equation by oxidation number method. The reactions occur in acidic medium.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 24
Answer:
i. \(\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}+\mathrm{Cr}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{7 \text { (aq) }}^{2-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\mathrm{Cr}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}\)
Step 1: Write skeletal equation and balance the elements other than O and H.
\(\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}+\mathrm{Cr}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{7 \text { (aq) }}^{2-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+2 \mathrm{Cr}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}\)

Step 2: Assign oxidation number to O and Cr. Calculate the increase and decrease in the oxidation number and make them equal.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 25
Since there are two Cr atoms, the net decrease in oxidation number is 6. In order to make the net increase and decrease equal, we must take 6 atoms of O i.e., 3H2O2.
\(3 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}+\mathrm{Cr}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{7(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-} \longrightarrow 3 \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+2 \mathrm{Cr}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}\)

Step 3: Balance ‘O’ atoms by adding 7H2O to the right-hand side.
\(3 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}+\mathrm{Cr}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{7(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-} \longrightarrow 3 \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+2 \mathrm{Cr}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}+7 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

Step 4: The medium is acidic. To make the charges and hydrogen atoms on the two sides equal, add 8H+ on the left-hand side.
\(3 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}+\mathrm{Cr}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{7(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}+8 \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+} \longrightarrow 3 \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+2 \mathrm{Cr}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}+7 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

Step 5: Check two sides for balance of atoms and charges.
Hence, balanced equation:
\(3 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}+\mathrm{Cr}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{7(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}+8 \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+} \longrightarrow 3 \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+2 \mathrm{Cr}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}+7 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

ii. \(\mathrm{Ag}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\mathrm{NO}_{3(\mathrm{q})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Ag}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{NO}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\)

Step 1: Write skeletal equation and balance the elements other than O and H.
\(\mathrm{Ag}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\mathrm{NO}_{3(\mathrm{q})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Ag}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{NO}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\)

Step 2: Assign oxidation number to Ag and N. Calculate the increase and decrease in the oxidation number and make them equal.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 26
Because net increase is equal to net decrease, multiplying coefficients are not required.

Step 3: Balance ‘O’ atoms by adding H2O to the right-hand side.
\(\mathrm{Ag}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\mathrm{NO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Ag}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{NO}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

Step 4: The medium is acidic. To make the charges and hydrogen atoms on the two sides equal, add 2H+ on the left-hand side.
\(\mathrm{Ag}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\mathrm{NO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+2 \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Ag}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{NO}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)
Thus, the equation is balanced with respect to the atoms as well as charges.

Step 5: Check two sides for balance of atoms and charges.
Hence, balanced equation: \(\mathrm{Ag}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\mathrm{NO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+2 \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Ag}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{NO}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

iii. \(\mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathfrak{a q})}^{2+}+\mathrm{IO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{4+}+\mathrm{I}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)

Step 1: Write skeletal equation and balance the elements other than O and H.
\(\mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathfrak{a q})}^{2+}+\mathrm{IO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{4+}+\mathrm{I}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)

Step 2: Assign oxidation number to Sn and I. Calculate the increase and decrease in the oxidation number and make them equal.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 27
To make the net increase and decrease equal, we must take 4 atoms of Sn.
\(4 \mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+\mathrm{IO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow 4 \mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{4+}+\mathrm{I}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)

Step 3: Balance ‘O’ atoms by adding 4H2O to the right-hand side.
\(4 \mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+\mathrm{IO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow 4 \mathrm{Sn}_{(\text {aq })}^{4+}+\mathrm{I}_{(\text {aq })}^{-}+4 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

Step 4: The medium is acidic. To make the charges and hydrogen atoms on the two sides equal, add 8H+ on the left-hand side.
\(4 \mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+\mathrm{IO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+8 \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+} \longrightarrow 4 \mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{4+}+\mathrm{I}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+4 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

Step 5: Check two sides for balance of atoms and charges.
Hence, balanced equation: \(4 \mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+\mathrm{IO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+8 \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+} \longrightarrow 4 \mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{4+}+\mathrm{I}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+4 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

iv. \(\mathrm{MnO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{IO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{MnO}_{2(\mathrm{~s})}+\mathrm{IO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)

Step 1: Write skeletal equation and balance the elements other than O and H.
\(\mathrm{MnO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{IO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{MnO}_{2(\mathrm{~s})}+\mathrm{IO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)

Step 2: Assign oxidation number to Mn and I. Calculate the increase and decrease in the oxidation number and make them equal.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 28
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 29
To make the net increase and decrease equal, we must take 2 atoms of Mn and 3 atoms of I.
\(2 \mathrm{MnO}_{4(a q)}^{-}+3 \mathrm{IO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow 2 \mathrm{MnO}_{2(\mathrm{~s})}+3 \mathrm{IO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)

Step 3: Balance ‘O’ atoms by adding 1H2O to the right-hand side.
\(2 \mathrm{MnO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+3 \mathrm{IO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow 2 \mathrm{MnO}_{2(\mathrm{~s})}+3 \mathrm{IO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

Step 4: The medium is acidic. To make the charges and hydrogen atoms on the two sides equal, add 2H on the left-hand side.
\(2 \mathrm{MnO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+3 \mathrm{IO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+2 \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+} \longrightarrow 2 \mathrm{MnO}_{2(\mathrm{~s})}+3 \mathrm{IO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

Step 5: Check two sides for balanced of atoms and charges.
Hence, balanced equation: \(2 \mathrm{MnO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+3 \mathrm{IO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+2 \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+} \longrightarrow 2 \mathrm{MnO}_{2(\mathrm{~s})}+3 \mathrm{IO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

Question 32.
Balance the following redox equation in basic medium by oxidation number method:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 30
Answer:
i. \(\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\mathrm{NO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{NH}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}+\mathrm{Zn}(\mathrm{OH})_{6(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}\)

Step 1: Write skeletal equation and balance the elements other than 0 and H.
\(\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\mathrm{NO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{NH}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}+\mathrm{Zn}(\mathrm{OH})_{6(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}\)

Step 2: Assign oxidation number to Zn and N. Calculate the increase and decrease in the oxidation number and make them equal.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 31
To make the net increase and decrease equal, we must take 2 atoms of Zn.
\(2 \mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\mathrm{NO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{NH}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}+2 \mathrm{Zn}(\mathrm{OH})_{6(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}\)

Step 3: Balance ‘O’ atoms by adding 9H2O to the left-hand side.
\(2 \mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\mathrm{NO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+9 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)} \longrightarrow \mathrm{NH}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}+2 \mathrm{Zn}(\mathrm{OH})_{6(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}\)

Step 4: The medium is basic. To make hydrogen atoms on the two sides equal, add 3H on the right-hand side.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 32

Step 5: Check two sides for balance of atoms and charges.
Hence, balanced equation:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 33

ii. \(\mathrm{MnCl}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}+\mathrm{HO}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Mn}(\mathrm{OH})_{3(\mathrm{~s})}+\mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)

Step 1: Write skeletal equation and balance the elements other than O and H.
\(\mathrm{MnCl}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}+\mathrm{HO}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Mn}(\mathrm{OH})_{3(\mathrm{~s})}+\mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)

Step 2: Assign oxidation number to Mn and O. Calculate the increase and decrease in the oxidation number and make them equal.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 34
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 35

iii. Cu(OH)2(s) + N2H4(aq) → Cu(s) + N2(g)
Step 1: Write skeletal equation and balance the elements other that O and H.
Cu(OH)2(s) + N2H4(aq) → Cu(s) + N2(g)
Step 2: Assign oxidation number to Cu and N. Calculate the increase and decrease in the oxidation number and make them equal.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 36
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 37
To make the net increase and decrease equal, we must take 2 atoms of Cu.
2Cu(OH)2(s) + N2H4(aq) → 2Cu(s) + N2(g)
Step 3: Balance ‘O’ atoms by adding 4H20 to the right-hand side.
2Cu(OH)2(s) + N2H4(aq) → 2Cu(s) + N2(g) + 4H2O(l)
Step 4: The equation is balanced for both atoms as well as charges.
Step 5: Check two sides for balance of atoms and charges.
Hence, balanced equation: 2Cu(OH)2(s) + N2H4(aq) → 2Cu(s) + N2(g) + 4H2O(l)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

Question 33.
Describe the steps involved in balancing redox reactions by ion electron method (Half reaction method).
Answer:
In this method two half equations are balanced separately and then added together to give balanced equation. Following steps are involved.

  • Step 1: Write unbalanced equation for the redox reaction, assign oxidation number to all the atoms in the reactants and products. Divide the equation into two half equations. One half equation involves increase in oxidation number and another involves decrease in oxidation number (Write two half equations separately).
  • Step 2: Balance the atoms except O and H in each half equation. Balance oxygen atom by adding H2O to the side with less O atoms.
  • Step 3: Balance H atoms by adding H+ ions to the side having less H atoms.
  • Step 4: Balance the charges by adding appropriate number of electrons to the right side of oxidation half equation and to the left of reduction half equation.
  • Step 5: Multiply half equation by suitable factors to equalize the number of electrons in two half equations. Add two half equations and cancel the number of electrons on both sides of equation.
  • Step 6: If the reaction occurs in basic medium then add OH ions, equal to number of H+ ions on both sides of equation. The H+ and OH ions on same side of equation combine to give H2O molecules.
  • Check that the equation is balanced in both, the atoms and the charges.

Question 34.
Balance the following unbalanced equation (in acidic medium) by ion electron method (half reaction method).
\(\mathrm{Mn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+\mathrm{ClO}_{3(\mathrm{qq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{MnO}_{2(\mathrm{~s})}+\mathrm{ClO}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}\)
Answer:
Step 1: Write imbalanced equation for the redox reaction. Assign oxidation number to all the atoms in reactants and products. Divide the equation into two half equations.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 38

Step 2: Balance the atoms except O and H in each half equation. Balance half equations for O atoms by adding H2O to the side with less O atoms. Add 2H2O to left side of oxidation half equation and 1H2O to the right side of reduction half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 39

Step 3: Balance H atoms by adding H+ ions to the side with less H. Hence add 4H+ ions to the right side of oxidation half equation and 2H+ ions to the left side of reduction half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 40

Step 4: Now add 2 electrons to the right side of oxidation half equation and 1 electron to the left side of reduction half equation to balance the charges.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 41

Step 5: Multiply reduction half equation by 2 to equalize number of electrons in two half equations. Then add two half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 42
Add two half equations:
\(\mathrm{Mn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+2 \mathrm{ClO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{MnO}_{2(\mathrm{~s})}+2 \mathrm{ClO}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}\)
The equation is balanced in terms of number of atoms and the charges.
Hence, balanced equation: \(\mathrm{Mn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+2 \mathrm{ClO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{MnO}_{2(\mathrm{~s})}+2 \mathrm{ClO}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}\)

Question 35.
Balance the following unbalanced equation by ion electron method (half reaction method).
\(\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}+\mathrm{ClO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{ClO}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\)
Answer:
Step 1: Write unbalanced equation for the redox reaction. Assign oxidation number to all the atoms in reactants and products. Divide the equation into two half equations.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 43

Step 2: Balance the atoms except O and H in each half equation. Balance the half equation for O atoms by adding H2O to the side with less O atoms. Hence, add 2H2O to the right side of reduction half equation and none to the oxidation half equation
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 44

Step 3: Balance H atoms by adding H+ ions to the side with less H. Hence add 2H+ ions to the right side of oxidation half equation and 4H+ ions to the left side of reduction half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 45

Step 4: Add 2 electrons to the right side of oxidation half equation and 4 electrons to the left side of reduction half equation to balance the charges.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 46

Step 5: Multiply oxidation half equation by 2 to equalize the number of electrons and then add two half equations.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 47

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

Question 36.
Balance the following redox equations by ion-electron (half reaction method).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 48
Answer:
i. \(\mathrm{Cr}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{7(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}+\mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Cr}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}+\mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}(\text { acidic })\)
Step 1: Write unbalanced equation for the redox reaction. Assign oxidation number to all the atoms in reactants and products. Divide the equation into two half equations.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 49
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 50

Step 2: Balance the atoms except O and H in each half equation. Balance half equation for O atoms by adding 7H2O to the right side of reduction half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 51

Step 3: Balance H atoms by adding H+ ions to the side with less H. Hence, add 14H+ ions to the left side of reduction half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 52

Step 4: Now add 1 electron to the right side of oxidation half equation and 6 electrons to the left side of reduction half equation to balance the charges.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 53

Step 5: Multiply oxidation half equation by 6 to equalize number of electrons in two half equations. Then add two half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 54

ii. \(\mathrm{SO}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+\mathrm{SO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}(\text { acidic })\)
Step 1 : Write unbalanced equation for the redox reaction. Assign oxidation number to all the atoms in reactants and products in them. Divide the equation into two half equations.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 55

Step 2: Balance the atoms except O and H in each half equation. Balance half equation for O atoms by adding 2H2O to the left side of oxidation half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 56

Step 3: Balance H atoms by adding H+ ions to the side with less H. Hence, add 4H+ ions to the right side of oxidation half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 57

Step 4: Now add 2 electrons to the right side of oxidation half equation and 1 electron to the left side of reduction half equation to balance the charges.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 58

Step 5: Multiply reduction half equation by 2 to equalize number of electrons in two half equations. Then add two half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 59

iii. \(\mathrm{ClO}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{Cr}(\mathrm{OH})_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{CrO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}+\mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \text {(basic) }\)
Step 1: Write unbalanced equation for the redox reaction: Assign oxidation number to all the atoms in reactants and products. Divide the equation into two half equations.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 60

Step 2: Balance the atoms except O and H in each half equation. Balance half equation for O atoms by adding 1H2O to the right side of reduction half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 61

Step 3: Balance H atoms by adding H+ ions to the side with less H. Hence, add 4H+ ions to the right side of oxidation half equation and 2H+ ions to the left side of reduction half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 62

Step 4: Now add 3 electrons to the right side of oxidation half equation and 2 electrons to the left side of reduction half equation to balance the charges.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 63

Step 5: Multiply oxidation half equation by 2 and reduction half equation by 3 to equalize number of electrons in two half equations. Then add two half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 64

Step 6: The reaction takes place in basic medium. 20H ions, equal to the number of H+ ions (2H+ ions) are added on both sides of the equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 65

iv. \(\mathrm{SeO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}+\mathrm{Cl}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \longrightarrow \mathrm{SeO}_{4(a q)}^{2-}+\mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \text {(basic) }\)
Step 1: Write unbalanced equation for the redox reaction. Assign oxidation number to all the atoms in reactants and products in them. Divide the equation into two half equations.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 66
Step 2: Balance the atoms except O and H in each half equation. Balance half equation for O atoms by adding H2O to the left side of oxidation half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 67

Step 3: Balance H atoms by adding H+ ions to the side with less H. Hence, add 2H+ ions to the right side of oxidation half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 68

Step 4: Now add 2 electrons to the right side of oxidation half equation and 2 electrons to the left side of reduction half equation to balance the charges.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 69

Step 5: There is equal number of electrons in two half equations. Add two half equation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 70

Question 37.
Explain displacement reaction in terms of redox reaction by giving example.
Answer:
i. Displacement reaction can be looked upon as redox reaction. Consider the following displacement reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 71
ii. Here, Zn gets oxidized to Zn2+ ion and Cu2+ ions get reduced to metallic Cu. A direct transfer of electron from zinc atom to cupric ions takes place in this case.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

Question 38.
Explain construction of Daniel cell.
Answer:

  • The zinc and copper plates are connected by an electric wire through a switch and voltmeter.
  • The solution in two containers are connected by salt bridge (U-shaped glass tube containing a gel of KCl or NH4NO3 in agar-agar).
  • When switch is on, electrical circuit is complete as indicated by the deflection in the voltmeter.
  • The circuit has two parts, one in the form of electrical wire which allows the flow of electrons and the other in the form of two solutions joined by salt bridge. In solution part of the circuit, the electric current is carried by movement of ions.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 72

Question 39.
Explain working of Daniel cell.
Answer:
i. When a circuit is complete, the zinc atoms on zinc plates spontaneously lose electrons which are picked up in the external circuit.
ii. The electrons flow from the zinc plate to copper plate through wire.
iii. Cu2+ ions in the second container receive these electrons through the copper plate and are reduced to copper atoms which get deposited on the copper plate.
iv. Here, zinc plate acts as anode (negative electrode) and the copper plate acts as cathode (positive electrode).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 73
v. Thus, when two half reactions, namely, oxidation and reduction, are allowed to take place in separate containers and provision is made for completing the electrical circuit, electron transfer take place through the circuit.
vi. This results in flow of electric current in the circuit as indicated by deflection in voltmeter.
vii. Thus, in Daniel cell, electricity is generated by redox reaction.

Question 40.
Draw a neat and labelled diagram of Daniel cell.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 74

Question 41.
Chalcopyrite (CuFeS2) is a common ore of copper. Since it has low concentration of copper, the ore is first concentrated through froth floatation process. The concentrated ore is then heated strongly with silicon dioxide (silica) and oxygen in a furnace. The product obtained, copper(I) sulphide, is further converted to copper (99.5% pure) with a final blast of air (O2) during which sulphur dioxide is released as a by-product.
i. Write a balanced reaction for the extraction of copper from copper(I) sulphide.
ii. Which species undergoes an increase in the oxidation state?
iii. Which species accepts electrons?
Answer:
i. Cu2S + O2 → 2Cu + SO2
ii. Sulphur undergoes an increase in the oxidation state from -2 (in Cu2S) to +4 (in SO2).
iii. Copper accepts one electron and undergoes a decrease in the oxidation state from +1(in Cu2S) to 0 (in Cu). Oxygen accepts two electrons and undergoes a decrease in the oxidation state from 0 (in O2) to -2 (in SO2).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

Question 42.
Consider the elements: Cs, Ne, I and F
i. Identify the element that exhibits only negative oxidation state.
ii. Identify the element that exhibits only positive oxidation state.
iii. Identify the element that exhibits both negative as well as positive oxidation state.
iv. Identify the element that exhibits neither the negative nor the positive oxidation state.
Answer:
i. F: It is most electronegative. It shows only a negative oxidation state of -1.
ii. Cs: Alkali metals have only one electron in their valence shell and hence, exhibits only positive (+1) oxidation state.
iii. I: Because of the presence of 7 electrons in its valence shell, I shows negative oxidation state of -1 (to have stable noble gas configuration) and positive oxidation numbers of +1, +3, +5 and +7 because of the presence of d-orbitals.
iv. Ne: It is an inert gas and therefore, does not exhibit negative or positive oxidation state.

Multiple Choice Questions

1. Loss of electrons means ………….
(A) reduction
(B) oxidation
(C) precipitation
(D) complexometry
Answer:
(B) oxidation

2. Reduction involves ……………
(A) gain of electrons
(B) addition of oxygen
(C) increase in oxidation number
(D) loss of electron
Answer:
(A) gain of electrons

3. Which of the following statement is INCORRECT?
(A) Oxidant is a substance which increases the oxidation number of other substance.
(B) Reductant is a substance which decreases the oxidation number of other substance.
(C) The oxidation number of oxidant decreases.
(D) In oxidation, there is decrease in oxidation number.
Answer:
(D) In oxidation, there is decrease in oxidation number.

4. Which of the following is an example of oxidation process?
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 75
Answer:
(D) \(\mathrm{Li}_{(\mathrm{s})} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Li}_{(\mathrm{g})}^{+}+\mathrm{e}^{-}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

5. Which is the best description of the behaviour of chlorine in the reaction?
H2O + Cl2 → HOCl + HCl
(A) Neither oxidized not reduced
(B) Both oxidised and reduced
(C) Oxidised only
(D) Reduced only
Answer:
(B) Both oxidised and reduced

6. In the reaction,
\(\begin{array}{r} 3 \mathrm{Br}_{2}+6 \mathrm{CO}_{3}^{2-}+3 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O} \longrightarrow \ 5 \mathrm{Br}^{-}+\mathrm{BrO}_{3}^{-}+6 \mathrm{HCO}_{3}^{-} \end{array}\) …………..
(A) Br2 is oxidised and carbonate is reduced
(B) bromine is reduced and water is oxidised
(C) bromine is neither reduced nor oxidised
(D) bromine is both reduced and oxidised
Answer:
(D) bromine is both reduced and oxidised

7. A chemical reaction in which oxidation and reduction processes takes place simultaneously is known as ………… reaction.
(A) redox
(B) precipitation
(C) complexometric
(D) titration
Answer:
(A) redox

8. Which of the following is a redox reaction?
(A) NaCl + KNO3 → NaNO3 + KCl
(B) CaC2O4 + 2HCl → CaCl2 + H2C2O4
(C) Mg(OH)2 + 2NH4Cl → MgCl2 + 2NH4OH
(D) Zn + 2AgCN → 2Ag + Zn(CN)2
Answer:
(D) Zn + 2AgCN → 2Ag + Zn(CN)2

9. Oxidation number of metal ion is always …………..
(A) positive
(B) negative
(C) zero
(D) non zero
Answer:
(A) positive

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

10. The oxidation number of oxygen in peroxide is …………..
(A) -2
(B) -1
(C) +1
(D) +2
Answer:
(B) -1

11. The oxidation number of oxygen is …………. in oxygen difluoride.
(A) -2
(B) -1
(C) +2
(D) +1
Answer:
(C) +2

12. Oxidation number of carbon in CH2F2 is ………….
(A) +1
(B) -1
(C) 0
(D) +2
Answer:
(C) 0

13. In calcium hydride (CaH2), the oxidation number of hydrogen is ………….
(A) +1
(B) -1
(C) +2
(D) -2
Answer:
(B) -1

14. The element with atomic number 9 can exhibit oxidation state of …………..
(A) +1
(B) +3
(C) -1
(D) +5
Answer:
(C) -1

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

15. The highest and lowest oxidation states possible for Te (group 16) are ……………
(A) +6, -2
(B) +6, 0
(C) +4, -4
(D) +6, -6
Answer:
(A) +6, -2

16. What is the oxidation state of S in Na2S2 ?
(A) +1
(B) -2
(C) -1
(D) 0
Answer:
(C) -1

17. The oxidation state of S in S2O82- is ………….
(A) +2
(B) + 4
(C) +6
(D) + 7
Answer:
(D) + 7

18. The oxidation state of phosphorus in Ba(H2PO2)2 is …………..
(A) +3
(B) +2
(C) +1
(D) -1
Answer:
(C) +1

19. Amongst the following, identify the species having an atom with +6 oxidation state.
(A) \(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{-}\)
(B) \(\mathrm{Cr}(\mathrm{OH})_{3}^{6-}\)
(C) \(\mathrm{NiF}_{6}^{2-}\)
(D) CrO2Cl2
Answer:
(D) CrO2Cl2

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

20. In which of the following compounds, the oxidation number of carbon is NOT zero?
(A) (CHCl)2
(B) HCHO
(C) CH3COOH
(D) CH2Cl2
Answer:
(C) CH3COOH

21. The oxidation number of S in S8, S2F2 and H2S respectively are ………….
(A) 0, +1, -2
(B) +2, +1, -2
(C) 0, +1, +2
(D) +2, +1, -2
Answer:
(A) 0, +1, -2

22. The coefficients x, y, and z in the following balanced equation
xZn + \(\mathrm{yNO}_{3}^{-}\) + 10H+ → zZn2+ + \(\mathrm{NH}_{4}^{+}\) + 3H2O are …………..
(A) 4, 1, 4
(B) 2, 2, 2
(C) 4, 2, 4
(D) 4, 4, 4
Answer:
(A) 4, 1, 4

23. For the redox reaction:
\(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}{ }^{-}+\mathrm{C}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{4}^{2-}+\mathrm{H}^{+} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Mn}^{2+}+\mathrm{CO}_{2}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}\)
The CORRECT coefficients of the reactants in the balanced reaction are ……………
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions 76
Answer:
(A)

24. In the reaction
3CuO + 2NH3 → N2 + 3H2O + 3Cu
the change of NH3 to N2 involve ……………..
(A) loss of 6 electrons per mol of N2
(B) loss of 3 electrons per mol of N2
(C) gain of 6 electrons per mole N2
(D) gain of 3 electrons per mole N2
Answer:
(A) loss of 6 electrons per mol of N2

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Redox Reactions

25. When KMnO4 acts as an oxidizing agent and ultimately forms \(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{2-}\), MnO2, Mn2O3, and Mn2+, then the number of electrons transferred in each case is …………..
(A) 4, 3, 1, 5
(B) 1, 5, 3, 7
(C) 1, 3, 4, 5
(D) 3, 5, 7, 1
Answer:
(C) 1, 3, 4, 5

26. In electrochemical cell, the magnitude and direction of the electrode potential depends on which of the following?
(A) Nature of metal and ions
(B) Concentration of ions
(C) Temperature
(D) All of these
Answer:
(D) All of these

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 1.
Explain the electronic theory of valence.
Answer:
Electronic theory of valence:

  • The electronic theory of valence was proposed by Kossel and Lewis in 1916.
  • They gave a logical explanation of valence which was based on the inertness of noble gases (that is, the octet rule developed by Lewis).
  • According to Lewis, the atom can be pictured in terms of a positively charged ‘kernel’ (the nucleus plus inner electrons) and outer shell that can accommodate a maximum of eight electrons. This octet of electrons represents a stable electronic arrangement.
  • Thus, according to this theory, during the formation of a chemical bond, each atom loses, gains or shares outer electrons so that it achieves stable octet.
  • The formation of NaCl involves transfer of one electron from sodium (Na) to chlorine (Cl). Na+ and Cl ions are formed which are held together by chemical bond. The formation of H2, F2, Cl2, HCl, etc., involves sharing of a pair of electrons between the atoms. In both cases, each atom attains a stable outer octet of electrons.

Question 2.
Give the significance of octet rule. Explain why this rule is not valid for H and Li atoms.
Answer:
i. Significance: Octet rule is found to be very useful:

  • in explaining the normal valence of elements
  • in the study of the chemical combination of atoms leading to the formation of molecules.

ii. Octet rule is not valid for H and Li atoms. According to octet rule, during the formation of a chemical bond, each atom loses, gains or shares electrons so that it achieves stable octet (eight electrons in the valence shell). However, H and Li atoms tend to have only two electrons in their valence shell similar to that of Helium (1s2), which called duplet. Hence, octet rule is not valid for H and Li atoms.

Question 3.
Define ionic bond.
Answer:
The bond formed by complete transfer of one or more electrons from an electropositive atom to an electronegative atom, leading to formation of ions which are held together by electrostatic attraction is called ionic bond or electrovalent bond.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 4.
Explain the formation of ionic bond in sodium chloride (NaCl).
Answer:
Formation of sodium chloride (NaCl):
i. The electronic configurations of sodium and chlorine are:
Na (Z = 11): 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s1 or (2, 8, 1)
Cl (Z = 17): 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p5 or (2, 8, 7)
ii. Sodium has one electron in its valence shell. It has tendency to lose one electron to acquire the electronic configuration of the nearest inert gas, neon (2, 8).
iii. Chlorine has seven electrons in its valence shell. It has tendency to gain one electron and thereby acquire the electronic configuration of the nearest inert gas, argon (2, 8, 8).
iv. During the combination of sodium and chlorine atoms, the sodium atom transfers its valence electron to the chlorine atom.
v. Sodium atom changes into Na+ ion while the chlorine atom changes into Cl ion. The two ions are held together by strong electrostatic force of attraction.
vi. The formation of ionic bond between Na and Cl can be shown as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 1

Question 5.
Explain the formation of ionic bonds in calcium chloride (CaCl2).
Answer:
Formation of calcium chloride (CaCl2):
i. The electronic configurations of calcium and chlorine are:
Na (Z = 11): 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 4s2 or (2, 8, 8, 2)
Cl (Z = 17): 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p5 or (2, 8, 7)
ii. Calcium has two electrons in its valence shell. It has tendency to lose two electrons to acquire the electronic configuration of the nearest inert gas, argon (2, 8, 8).
iii. Chlorine has seven electrons in its valence shell. It has tendency to gain one electron and thereby acquire the electronic configuration of the nearest inert gas, argon (2, 8, 8).
iv. During the combination of calcium and chlorine atoms, the calcium atom transfers its valence electrons to two chlorine atoms.
v. Calcium atom changes into Ca2+ ion while the two chlorine atoms change into two Cl ions. These ions are held together by strong electrostatic force of attraction.
vi. The formation of ionic bond(s) between Ca and Cl can be shown as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 2

Question 6.
What are ionic solids?
Answer:
Ionic solids are solids which contain cations and anions held together by ionic bonds.
e.g. Sodium chloride (NaCl), Calcium chloride (CaCl2)

Question 7.
Define lattice enthalpy.
Answer:
Lattice enthalpy of an ionic solid is defined as the energy required to completely separate one mole of solid ionic compound into the gaseous components.
Note: Lattice enthalpy values of some ionic compounds:

Compound Lattice enthalpy kJ mol1
LiCl 853
NaCl 788
BeF2 3020
CaCl2 2258
AlCl3 5492

Question 8.
Arrange NaCl, CaCl2 and AlCl3 in increasing order of lattice enthalpy (positive value). Justify your answer.
Answer:
Compounds having cations with higher charge have large lattice enthalpy (higher positive value) than compounds having cations with lower charge.
Hence, the correct order is NaCl < CaCl2 < AlCl3.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 9.
Lattice enthalpy of LiF is more than that of NaF. Explain.
Answer:
As the size of the cation decrease, lattice enthalpy increases. Li+ ion is smaller than Na+ ion. Hence, lattice enthalpy of LiF is more than that of NaF.

Question 10.
Define covalent bond.
Answer:
The attractive force which exists due to the mutual sharing of electrons between the two atoms of similar electronegativity or having small difference in electronegativities is called a covalent bond.

Question 11.
Explain the formation of covalent bond in H2 molecule.
Answer:
Formation of H2 molecule:
i. The electronic configuration of H atom is 1s1.
ii. It needs one more electron to complete its valence shell.
iii. When two hydrogen atoms approach each other at a certain internuclear distance, they share their valence electrons.
iv. The shared pair of electrons belongs equally to both the hydrogen atoms. The two atoms are said to be linked by a single covalent bond and a H2 molecule is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 3

Question 12.
Explain the formation of covalent bond in Cl2 molecule.
Answer:
Formation of Cl2 molecule:
i. The electronic configuration of Cl atom is [Ne] 3s2 3p5.
ii. It needs one more electron to complete its valence shell.
iii. When two chlorine atoms approach each other at a certain internuclear distance, they share their valence electrons. In the process, both the atoms attain the valence shell of octet of nearest noble gas, argon.
iv. The shared pair of electrons belongs equally to both the chlorine atoms. The two atoms are said to be linked by a single covalent bond and a Cl2 molecule is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 4

Question 13.
What are the important features of covalent bond?
Answer:

  • Each covalent bond is formed as a result of sharing of electron pair between the two atoms.
  • When a covalent bond is formed, each combining atom contributes one electron to the shared pair.
  • The combining atoms attain the outer shell noble gas configuration as a result of the sharing of electrons.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 14.
Explain the types of covalent bond with suitable examples.
Answer:
The three types of covalent bonds are as follows.
i. Single bond: When two combining atoms share one electron pair, the covalent bond between them is called single bond.
Single bond is observed in number of molecules.
e.g. H2, Cl2, water molecule, etc.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 5

ii. Double bond: When two combining atoms share two pairs of electrons, the covalent bond between them is called a double bond, e.g. Double bond is present in C2H4 molecule
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 6

iii. Triple bond: When two combining atoms share three pairs of electrons, the covalent bond between them is called a triple bond, e.g. Triple bond is present in N2 molecule.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 7
Note: Formation of covalent bonds in CO2, CCl4 and C2H2:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 8

Question 15.
Distinguish between ionic bond and covalent bond.
Answer:
Ionic bond:

  1. It is formed by the transfer of electrons from one atom to another.
  2. It is formed by the transfer of electrons from one atom to another.
  3. In this, oppositely charged ions are formed.
  4. There are no multiple ionic bonds.
  5. This bond usually exists between metal and non-metal atoms.
  6. e.g. NaCl, CaCl2

Covalent bond:

  1. It is formed by sharing of electrons.
  2. Atoms are held together due to shared pair of electrons.
  3. In this, oppositely charged ions are not formed.
  4. Covalent bonds may be single or double or triple bonds.
  5. This bond usually exists between non-metal atoms.
  6. e.g. H2, Cl2

Question 16.
What are the steps to write Lewis dot structure?
Answer:
Steps to write Lewis dot structures:

  • Add the total number of valence electrons of combining atoms in the molecule.
  • In anions, add one electron for each negative charge.
  • In cations, subtract one electron from valence electrons for each positive charge.
  • Write skeletal structure of the molecule to show the atoms and number of valence electrons forming the single bond between the atoms.
  • Add remaining electron pairs to complete the octet of each atom.
  • If octet is not complete form multiple bonds between the atoms such that octet of each atom is complete.
  • In polyatomic atoms and ions, the least electronegative atom is the central atom.
    e.g. In \(\mathrm{SO}_{4}^{2-}\) ion, ‘S’ is the central atom and in \(\mathrm{NO}_{3}^{-}\), ‘N’ is the central atom.
  • After writing the number of electrons as shared pairs forming single bonds, the remaining electron pairs are used either for multiple bonds or they remain as lone pairs.

Question 17.
Write the Lewis structure of nitrite ion, \(\mathrm{NO}_{2}^{-}\).
Answer:
Step I: Count the total number of valence electrons of nitrogen atom, oxygen atom and one electron of additional negative charge.
Valence shell configuration of nitrogen and oxygen are:
N ⇒ (2s2 2p3), O ⇒ (2s2 2p4)
The total electrons available are:
5 + (2 × 6) + 1 = 18 electrons
Step II: The skeletal structure of \(\mathrm{NO}_{2}^{-}\) is written as O N O
Step III: Draw a single bond i.e., one shared electron pair between the nitrogen and each oxygen atoms. Then distribute the remaining electrons to achieve noble gas configuration for each atom. This does not complete the octet of nitrogen.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 9
Hence, there is a multiple bond between nitrogen and one of the oxygen atoms (a double bond). The remaining two electrons constitute a lone pair on nitrogen.
Following are Lewis dot structures of \(\mathrm{NO}_{2}^{-}\).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 10

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 18.
Write the Lewis structure of CO molecule.
Answer:
Step I: Count number of electrons of carbon and oxygen atoms. The valence shell configuration of carbon and oxygen atoms are: 2s2 2p2 and 2s2 2p4, respectively. The valence electrons available are:
4 + 6=10
Step II: The skeletal structure of CO is written as
C O
Step III: Draw a single bond (One shared electron pair) between C and O and complete the octet on O. The remaining two electrons is a lone pair on C.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 11
The octet on carbon is not complete. Hence, there is a multiple bond between C and O (a triple bond between C and O atom). This satisfies the octet rule for carbon and oxygen atoms.
The Lewis structure of CO molecule is:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 12

Question 19.
Explain the term formal charge.
Answer:
i. Formal charge is the charge assigned to an atom in a molecule, assuming that all electrons are shared equally between atoms, regardless of their relative electronegativities.
ii. While determining the best Lewis structure per molecule, the structure is chosen such that the formal charge is as close to zero as possible.
iii. The structure having the lowest formal charge has the lowest energy.
iv. Formal charge is assigned to an atom based on electron dot structures of the molecule/ion.
v. Formal charge on an atom in a Lewis structure of a polyatomic species can be determined using the following formula:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 13

Question 20.
Explain the calculation of the formal charge on oxygen atoms in case of O3 (ozone) molecule.
Answer:
i. Lewis dot structure of O3 (ozone) molecule is:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 14
Three oxygen atoms are present in the O3 molecule and are labelled as 1, 2 and 3.
ii. Formal charges on oxygen atoms labelled as 1, 2, 3 are calculated as shown below:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 15
iii. On the basis of the formal charge values, O3 is shown as
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 16
[Note: Indicating the charges on the atoms in the Lewis structure helps in keeping track of the valence electrons in the molecule. Formal charges help in the selection of the lowest energy structure from a number of possible Lewis structures for a given species.]

Question 21.
CO2 can be represented by following three structures:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 17
Calculate the formal charge on each atom in all the three structures of CO2 molecule. Identify the structure with lowest energy.
Answer: Formal charges on atoms labelled as 1, 2, 3 are calculated as shown below:
Structure (I):
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 18
Structure (II):
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 19
Structure (III):
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 20
While determining the best Lewis structure per molecule, the structure is chosen such that the formal charge is as close to zero as possible. The structure having the lowest formal charge has the lowest energy.

In structure (I), the formal charge on each atom is 0 while in structures (II) and (III) formal charge on carbon is 0 while oxygens have formal charge -1 or +1. Hence, the possible structure with the lowest energy will be structure (I). Thus, formal charges help in the selection of the lowest energy structure from a number of possible Lewis structures for a given species.

Question 22.
Find out the formal charges on S, C and N.
(S = C = N) ; (S – C ≡ N) ; (S ≡ C – N)
Answer:
Step I:
Write Lewis dot diagrams for the structures:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 21
Step II:
Assign formal charges for all the atoms:
F.C. = V.E. – N.E. – 1/2 (B.E.)
Structure A:
Formal charge on S = 6 – 4 – 1/2(4) = 0
Formal charge on C = 4 – 0 – 1/2 (8) = 0
Formal charge on N = 5 – 4 – 1/2 (4) = -1
Structure B:
Formal charge on S = 6 – 6 – 1/2(2) = -1
Formal charge on C = 4 – 0 – 1/2 (8) = 0
Formal charge on N = 5 – 2 – 1/2 (6) = 0
Structure C:
Formal charge on S = 6 – 2 – 1/2(6) = +1
Formal charge on C = 4 – 0 – 1/2(8) = 0
Formal charge on N = 5 – 6 – 1/2(2) = -2

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 23.
Give the limitations of octet rule:
Answer:
Limitations of octet rule:
i. Octet rule does not explain stability of some molecules.
The octet rule is based on the inert behaviour of noble gases, which have their octet complete i.e., have eight electrons in their valence shell. It is very useful to explain the structures and stability of organic molecules. However, there are many molecules whose existence cannot be explained by the octet theory. The central atoms in these molecules does not have eight electrons in their valence shell, and yet they are stable.
Such molecules can be categorized as having:
a. Incomplete octet
b. Expanded octet
c. Odd electrons

a. Molecules with incomplete octet: e.g. BF3, BeCl2, LiCl
In these covalent molecules, the atoms B, Be and Li have less than eight electrons in their valence shell but these molecules are stable.
Li in LiCl has only two electrons, Be in BeCl2 has four electrons while B in BF3 has six electrons in the valence shell.

b. Molecules with expanded octet: Some molecules like SF6, PCl5, H2SO4 have more than eight electrons around the central atom.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 22

c. Odd electron molecules:
Some molecules like NO (nitric oxide) and NO2 (nitrogen dioxide) do not obey the octet rule. These molecules, have odd number of valence electrons.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 23
ii. The observed shape and geometry of a molecule, cannot be explained, by the octet rule.
iii. Octet rule fails to explain the difference in energies of molecules, though all the covalent bonds are formed in an identical manner, that is, by sharing a pair of electrons. The rule fails to explain the differences in reactivities of different molecules.
Note: Sulphur also forms many compounds in which octet rule is obeyed. For example, in sulphur dichloride, the sulphur atom has eight electrons around it.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 24

Question 24.
State the basic idea on which VSEPR theory was proposed by Sidgwick and Powell.
Answer:
Valence Shell Electron Pair Repulsion (VSEPR) theory is based on the basic idea that the electron pairs on the atoms shown in the Lewis diagram repel each other. In the real molecule, they arrange themselves in such a way that there is minimum repulsion between them.

Question 25.
Give the rules of VSEPR Theory.
Answer:
Rules of VSEPR Theory:
i. Electron pairs arrange themselves in such a way that repulsion between them is minimum.
ii. The molecule acquires minimum energy and maximum stability.
iii. Lone pair of electrons also contribute in determining the shape of the molecule.
iv. Repulsion of other electron pairs by the lone pair (L.P.) stronger than that of bonding pair (B.P.).
Trend for repulsion between electron pair is as follows:
L.P. – L.P. > L.P. – B.P. > B.P. – B.P.
Lone pair-Lone pair repulsion is maximum because this electron pair is under the influence of only one nucleus while the bonded pair is shared between two nuclei.
Thus, the number of lone pair and bonded pair of electrons decide the shape of the molecules. Molecules having no lone pair of electrons have a regular geometry.

Note:
i. Electron pair geometry: The arrangement of electrons around the central atom is called as electron pair geometry. These electron pairs may be shared in a covalent bond or they may be lone pairs.
ii. Geometry of some molecules (having no lone pair of electrons):
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 25
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 26
iii. Geometry of some molecules (having one or more lone pairs of electrons):
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 27
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 28

Question 26.
Match the following:

Molecule Shape
i. SbF5 a. Trigonal bipyramidal
ii. SO2 b. Bent
iii. SF4 c. Square pyramidal
iv. IF5 d. See-saw

Answer:
i – a,
ii – b,
iii – d,
iv – c

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 27.
Complete the following table:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 29
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 30

Question 28.
Explain geometry of NH3 molecule according to VSEPR theory.
Answer:

  • In NH3 molecule, the central atom nitrogen has five electrons in its valence shell. On bond formation with three hydrogen atoms, there are 8 electrons in the valence shell of nitrogen. Out of these, three pairs are bond pairs (N – H covalent bonds) and one forms lone pair. The expected geometry is tetrahedral and bond angle is 109° 28′.
  • There are two types of repulsions between the electron pairs: Lone pair – bond pair and bond pair – bond pair
  • The lone pair – bond pair repulsions are stronger and the bonded pairs are pushed inwards. Thus, reducing the bond angle to 107°18′ and shape of the molecule becomes trigonal pyramidal.

Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 31

Question 29.
Explain geometry of H2O molecule according to VSEPR theory.
Answer:

  • In H2O molecule, the central atom oxygen has six electrons in its valence shell. On bond formation with two hydrogen atoms, there are 8 electrons in the valence shell of oxygen. Out of these, two pairs are bond pairs and two are lone pairs.
  • Due to lone pair – lone pair repulsion, the lone pairs are pushed towards the bond pairs and bond pair – lone pair repulsions become stronger thereby reducing the H-O-H bond angle from 109° 28′ to 104° 35′ and the geometry of the molecule becomes angular (bent).

Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 32

Question 30.
Write the postulates of Valence Bond Theory.
Answer:
Postulates of Valence Bond Theory:

  • A covalent bond is formed when the half-filled valence orbital of one atom overlaps with the half-filled valence orbital of another atom.
  • The electrons in the half-filled valence orbitals must have opposite spins.
  • During bond formation, the half-filled orbitals overlap and the opposite spins of the electrons get neutralized. The increased electron density decreases the nuclear repulsion and energy is released during overlapping of the orbitals.
  • Greater the extent of overlap, stronger is the bond formed. However, complete overlap of orbitals does not take place due to intemuclear repulsions.
  • If an atom possesses more than one unpaired-electrons, then it can form more than one bond. So, number of bonds formed will be equal to the number of half-filled orbitals in the valence shell i.e., number of unpaired electrons.
  • The distance at which the attractive and repulsive forces balance each other is the equilibrium distance between the nuclei of the bonded atoms. At this distance, the total energy of the two bonded atoms is minimum and stability of the molecule is maximum.
  • Electrons which are paired in the valence shell cannot participate in bond formation. However, in an atom if there is one or more vacant orbital present then these electrons can unpair and participate in bond formation provided the energies of the filled and vacant orbitals differ slightly from each other.
  • During bond formation, the ‘s’ orbital which is spherical can overlap in any direction. The ‘p’ orbitals can overlap only in the x, y or z directions. Similarly, ‘d’ and ‘f orbitals are oriented in certain directions in space and overlap only in these directions. Thus, the covalent bond is directional in nature.

Note: In order to explain the covalent bonding, Heitler and London developed the valence bond theory on the basis of wave mechanics. This theory was further extended by Pauling and Slater.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 31.
Explain the formation of hydrogen molecule with the help of potential energy curve.
OR
Explain the formation of H2 on the basis of VBT.
Answer:
Formation of H2 on the basis of VBT:

  • Hydrogen atom has electronic configuration 1s1. It contains one unpaired electron in its valence shell.
  • When the two hydrogen atoms containing unpaired electrons with opposite spins are separated by a large distance, they can neither attract nor repel each other (there are no interactions between them). The energy of the system is the sum of the potential energies of the two atoms which is arbitrarily taken as zero.
  • When the two atoms approach each other, attractive and repulsive forces begin to operate on them. Experimentally, it has been found that during formation of hydrogen molecule, the magnitude of the newly developed attractive forces contributes more than the newly developed repulsive forces. As a result, the potential energy of the system begins to decrease.
  • As the atoms come closer to one another the energy of the system decreases. The overlap of the atomic orbitals increases only up to a certain distance between the two nuclei, where the attractive and repulsive forces balance each other and the system attains minimum energy. At this stage, a stable bond is formed between the two atoms.
  • If the distance between the two atoms is decreased further, the repulsive forces exceed the attractive forces and the energy of the system increases and stability decreases.
  • When two hydrogen atoms with electrons having parallel spin approach each other, the potential energy of the system increases and bond formation does not take place.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 33

Question 32.
Define:
i. Sigma overlap
ii. pi overlap
Answer:
i. Sigma overlap (σ bond): When two half-filled orbitals of two atoms overlap along the internuclear axis, it is called as sigma overlap or sigma bond.
ii. pi overlap (π bond): When two half-filled orbitals of two atoms overlap side-ways (laterally), it is called as π overlap or π bond.

Question 33.
Explain with example:
i. s-s σ overlap
ii. p-p σ overlap
iii. s-p a overlap
Answer:
i. s-s σ overlap:
a. The overlap between two half-filled s orbitals of two different atoms containing unpaired electrons with opposite spins is called s-s overlap.
e.g. Formation of H2 molecule by s-s overlap:
Hydrogen atom (Z = 1) has electronic configuration: 1s1. The 1s1 orbitals of two hydrogen atoms overlap along the internuclear axis to form a σ bond between the atoms in H2 molecule.
b. Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 34

ii. p-p σ overlap:
a. This type of overlap takes place when two p orbitals from different atoms overlap along the internuclear axis.
e.g. Formation of F2 molecule by p-p overlap:
Fluorine atom (Z = 9) has electronic configuration 1s2 2s2 \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{x}}^{2}\) \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{y}}^{2}\) \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{z}}^{1}\).
During the formation of F2 molecule, half-filled 2pz orbital of one F atom overlaps with similar half-filled 2pz orbital containing electron with opposite spin of another F atom axially and a p-p σ bond is formed.
b. Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 35

iii. s-p σ overlap:
a. In this type of overlap one half filled s orbital of one atom and one half filled p orbital of another orbital overlap along the internuclear axis.
e.g. Formation of HF molecule by s-p overlap:
Hydrogen atom (Z = 1) has electronic configuration: 1s1 and fluorine atom (Z = 9) has electronic configuration 1s2 2s2 \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{x}}^{2}\) \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{y}}^{2}\) \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{z}}^{1}\). During the formation of HF molecule, half-filled 1s orbital of hydrogen atom overlaps coaxially with half-filled 2pz orbital of fluorine atom with opposite electron spin and an s-p σ bond is formed.
b. Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 36

Question 34.
Explain the formation of π bond with diagram.
OR
Explain π overlap with diagram.
Answer:

  • When two half-filled p orbitals of two atoms overlap side-ways (laterally), it is called π overlap and the bond formed is called π bond.
  • π bond is perpendicular to the intemuclear axis.

Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 37

Question 35.
Identify the type of bond formed:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 38
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 39
Answer:
i. σ bond
ii. π bond
iii. σ bond
iv. σ bond

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 36.
Explain divalency of beryllium, though number of unpaired electrons in a beryllium atom is zero.
Answer:
Beryllium (Z = 4) has electronic configuration 1s2 2s2 in its ground state.
When one of the 2s electrons of Be is promoted to the vacant 2p orbital, the electronic configuration of Be in its excited state becomes 1s2 2s1 \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{x}}^{1}\). This is called formation of an excited state and it has two unpaired electrons. Hence, though the number of unpaired electrons in the ground state of Be atom is zero, beryllium shows divalency.

Question 37.
Define the term hybridization.
Answer:
Hybridization is defined as the process of mixing of valence orbitals of same atom and recasting them into equal number of new equivalent orbitals (hybrid orbitals).

Question 38.
Explain in detail the steps involved in hybridization.
Answer:
Steps involved in hybridization:
i. Formation of the excited state:
a. The paired electrons in the ground state are uncoupled and one electron is promoted to the vacant orbital having slightly higher energy.
b. Now, total number of half-filled orbitals is equal to the valency of the element in the stable compound, e.g. In BeF2, valency of Be is two. In the excited state, one electron from 2s orbital is uncoupled and promoted to 2p orbital.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 40

ii. Mixing and recasting:

  • In this step, the two ‘s’ and ‘p’ orbitals having slightly different energies mix with each other.
  • Redistribution of electron density and energy takes place and two new orbitals having exactly same shape and energy are formed.
  • These new orbitals arrange themselves in space in such a way that there is minimum repulsion and maximum separation between them. e.g. During formation of sp hybrid orbitals as in Be, the two sp hybrid orbitals form an angle of 180° with each other.

Question 39.
List the important conditions required for hybridization.
Answer:
Conditions for hybridization:

  • Orbitals belonging to the same atom can participate in hybridization.
  • Orbitals having nearly same energy can undergo hybridization.

[Note: 2s and 2p orbitals of the same atom undergo hybridization but 3s and 2p orbitals of the same atom do not.]

Question 40.
Enlist the characteristic features of hybrid orbitals.
Answer:
Characteristic features of hybrid orbitals:

  • Number of hybrid orbitals formed is exactly the same as the participating atomic orbitals.
  • They have same energy and shape.
  • Hybrid orbitals are oriented in space in such a way that there is minimum repulsion and thus are directional in nature.
  • The hybrid orbitals are different in shape from the participating atomic orbitals, but they bear the characteristics of the atomic orbitals from which they are derived.
  • Each hybrid orbitals can hold two electrons with opposite spins.
  • A hybrid orbital has two lobes on the two sides of the nucleus. One lobe is large and the other small.
  • Covalent bonds formed by hybrid orbitals are stronger than those formed by pure orbitals, because the hybrid orbital has electron density concentrated on the side with a larger lobe and the other is small allowing greater overlap of the orbitals.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 41.
Explain with diagrams:
i. sp3 hybridization
ii. sp2 hybridization
iii. sp hybridization
Answer:
i. sp3 hybridization:
In this type, one s and three p orbitals having comparable energy mix and recast to form four sp3 hybrid orbitals, ‘s’ orbital is spherically symmetrical while the px, py, pz, orbitals have two lobes and are directed along x, y and z axes, respectively.

The four sp3 hybrid orbitals formed are equivalent in energy and shape. They have one large lobe and one small lobe. They are at an angle of 109° 28′ with each other in space and point towards the comers of a tetrahedron. CH4, NH3, H2O are examples where the orbitals on central atom undergo sp3 hybridization.

Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 41

ii. sp2 hybridization:
This hybridization involves the mixing of one s and two p orbitals to give three sp2 hybrid orbitals of same energy and shape. The three orbitals are maximum apart and oriented at an angle of 120° and are in one plane. The third p orbital does not participate in hybridization and remains at right angles to the plane of the sp2 hybrid orbitals. BF3, C2H4 molecules are examples of sp2 hybridization.
Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 42

iii. sp hybridization:
In this type, one s and one p orbital undergo mixing and recasting to form two sp hybrid orbitals of same energy and shape. The two hybrid orbitals are placed at an angle of 180°. Other two p orbitals do not participate in hybridization and are at right angles to the hybrid orbitals. For example, BeCl2 and acetylene molecule (HC ≡ CH).
Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 43

Question 42.
Explain the formation of an ammonia molecule on the basis of hybridization.
Answer:
Formation of an ammonia (NH3) molecule on the basis of sp3 hybridization:
i. Ammonia molecule (NH3) has one nitrogen atom and three hydrogen atoms.
ii. The ground state electronic configuration of nitrogen (Z = 7) is 1s2 2s2 \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{x}}^{1}\) \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{y}}^{1}\) \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{z}}^{1}\)
Electronic configuration of nitrogen:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 44
iii. The ground state electronic configuration explains the observed valency of nitrogen in NH3 which is three.
iv. The 2s, 2px, 2py and 2pz orbitals of nitrogen atom mix and recast to form four sp3 hybrid orbitals of equivalent energy. These orbitals are tetrahedrally oriented in space. One of the sp3 hybrid orbital contains a lone pair of electrons.
v. Three half-filled sp3 hybrid orbitals of N atom overlap axially with half-filled 1s orbital of three different hydrogen atoms to form three N-H (sp3-s) sigma covalent bonds.
vi. Since, there is one lone pair of electrons in one of the sp3 hybrid orbitals of nitrogen, there is repulsion between lone pair and bonding pair of electrons. As a result, the H-N-H bond angle is reduced from regular tetrahedral angle 109° 28′ to 107° 18′. Geometry of NH3 molecule is pyramidal or distorted tetrahedral.

Question 43.
Explain the formation of water (H2O) molecule on the basis of hybridization.
Answer:
Formation of water (H2O) molecule on the basis of sp3 hybridization:
i. Water molecule (H2O) has one oxygen atom and two hydrogen atoms.
ii. The ground state electronic configuration of oxygen (Z = 8) is 1s2 2s2 \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{x}}^{2}\) \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{y}}^{1}\) \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{z}}^{1}\).
Electronic configuration of oxygen:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 45
iii. The ground state electronic configuration explains the observed valency of oxygen in H2O molecule which is 2.
iv. The 2s, 2px, 2py and 2pz orbitals of oxygen atom mix and recast to form four sp3 hybrid orbitals of equivalent energy. These orbitals are tetrahedrally oriented in space. Two of the sp hybrid orbitals contain lone pair of electrons.
v. Two half-filled sp3 hybrid orbitals of O atom overlap axially with half-filled 1s orbitals of two different hydrogen atoms to fonn two O-H (sp3-s) sigma covalent bonds.
vi. Since, there are two lone pairs of electrons in two of the sp3 hybrid orbitals of oxygen, there is repulsion between lone pair and bonding pair of electrons. As a result, the H-O-H bond angle is reduced from regular tetrahedral angle 109°28′ to 104°35′. The geometry of H2O molecule is angular or V shaped.

Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 46

Question 44.
Explain the formation of an ethene molecule on the basis of hybridization.
Answer:
Formation of an ethene (ethylene) molecule on the basis of sp2 hybridization:
i. Ethene molecule (C2H4) has two carbon atoms and four hydrogen atoms.
ii. The ground state electronic configuration of C (Z = 6) is 1s2 2s2 \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{x}}^{1}\) \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{y}}^{1}\) \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{z}}^{0}\).
Electronic configuration of carbon:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 47
iii. One electron from 2s orbital of each carbon atom is excited to the 2pz orbital. Then each carbon atom undergoes sp2 hybridization.
iv. One ’s’ orbital and two ‘p’ orbitals on carbon hybridize to form three sp2 hybrid orbitals of equal energy and symmetry.
v. Two sp2 hybrid orbitals overlap axially two ‘s’ orbitals of hydrogen to form sp2-s σ bond. The unhybridized ‘p’ orbitals on the two carbon atoms overlap laterally to form a π bond. Thus, the C2H4 molecule has four sp2-s σ bonds, one sp2-sp2 σ bond and one p-p π bond.
vi. Each H-C-H and H-C-C bond angle in ethene molecule is 120°. All the six atoms in ethene (ethylene) molecule are in one plane. Geometry of the molecule at each carbon atom is trigonal planar.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 48

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 45.
Explain the formation of boron trifluoride on the basis of hybridization.
Answer:
Formation of boron trifluoride on the basis of sp2 hybridization:
i. Boron trifluoride (BF3) has one boron atom and three fluorine atoms.
ii. Observed valency of boron in BF3 molecule is three and its geometry is trigonal planar. This can be explained on the basis of sp2 hybridization.
iii. The ground state electronic configuration of B (Z = 5) is 1s2 2s2 \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{x}}^{1}\) \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{y}}^{0}\) \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{z}}^{0}\).
Electronic configuration of boron:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 49
iv. One electron from 2s orbital of boron atom is uncoupled and promoted to vacant 2py orbital.
v. The three orbitals i.e. 2s, 2px of and 2py of boron undergoes sp2 hybridization to form three sp2 hybrid orbitals of equivalent energy, which are oriented along the three comers of an equilateral triangle making an angle of 120°.
vi. Each sp2 hybrid orbital of boron atom having unpaired electron overlaps axially with half-filled 2pz orbital of fluorine atom containing electron with opposite spin to form three B-F sigma bonds by sp2-p type of overlap.
vii. Each F-B-F bond angle in BF3 molecule is 120°. The geometry of BF3 molecule is trigonal planar.

Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 50

Question 46.
Explain the formation of an acetylene molecule on the basis of hybridization.
Answer:
Formation of acetylene (ethyne) molecule on the basis of sp hybridization:
i. Acetylene molecule (C2H2) has two carbon atoms and two hydrogen atoms.
ii. The ground state electronic configuration of C (Z = 6) is 1s2 2s2 \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{x}}^{1}\) \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{y}}^{1}\) \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{z}}^{0}\).
Electronic configuration of carbon:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 51
iii. Each carbon atom undergoes sp hybridization. One s and one p orbitals mix and recast to give two sp hybrid orbitals arranged at 180° to each other.
iv. Out of the two sp hybrid orbitals of carbon atom, one overlaps axially with s orbital of hydrogen while the other sp hybrid orbital overlaps with sp hybrid orbital of other carbon atom to form the sp-sp σ bond. The C H σ bond is formed by sp-s overlap.
v. The remaining two unhybridized p orbitals overlap laterally to form two p-p π bonds. So, there are three bonds between the two carbon atoms: one C-C σ bond (sp-sp) overlap, two C-C π bonds (p-p) overlap. There are two sp-s σ bonds in acetylene (one between each C and H).
vi. Each H-C-C bond angle in ethyne molecule is 180°. All the four atoms in ethyne molecule are in a straight line. The geometry of acetylene molecule is linear.

Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 52

Question 47.
Explain the formation of BeCl2.
Answer:
Formation of BeCl2:
i. BeCl2 molecule has one Be atom and two chlorine atoms.
ii. Electronic configuration of Be is 1s2 2s2 \(2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{z}}^{0}\).
Electronic configuration of beryllium:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 53
iii. The 2s and 2pz orbitals undergo sp hybridization to form two sp hybrid orbitals oriented at 180° with each other. 2pz orbitals of two chlorine atoms overlap with the sp hybrid orbitals to form two sp-p σ bonds.
Cl – Be – Cl bond angle is 180°. The geometry of the molecule is linear.

Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 54

Question 48.
Match the following:

Molecule Hybridization and bond angle
i. Water a. Sp2, 120°
ii. Boron trifluoride b. Sp3, 104.5°
iii. Beryllium fluoride c. Sp3, 109.5°
iv. Methane d. Sp, 180°

Answer:
i – b
ii – a
iii – d
iv – c

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 49.
Give the importance of valence bond theory.
Answer:
Valence Bond theory introduced five new concepts in chemical bonding:

  • Delocalization of electron over the two nuclei
  • Shielding effect of electrons
  • Covalent character of bond
  • Partial ionic character of a covalent bond
  • The concept of resonance and connection between resonance energy and molecular stability

Question 50.
What are the limitations of valence bond theory?
Answer:
Limitations of valence bond theory:

  • Valence Bond theory explains only the formation of covalent bond in which a shared pair of electrons comes from two bonding atoms. However, it offers no explanation for the formation of a coordinate covalent bond in which both the electrons are contributed by one of the bonded atoms.
  • Oxygen molecule is expected to be diamagnetic according to this theory. The two atoms in oxygen molecule should have completely filled electronic shells which give no unpaired electrons to the molecule making it diamagnetic. However, experimentally the molecule is found to be paramagnetic having two unpaired electrons. Thus, this theory fails to explain paramagnetism of oxygen molecule.
  • Valence bond theory does not explain the bonding in electron deficient molecules like B2H6 in which the central atom possesses a smaller number of electrons than required for an octet of electron.

Question 51.
What are the two ways in which two atomic orbitals combine to form molecular orbitals (MOs)?
Answer:
Two atomic orbitals can combine in two ways to form molecular orbitals:
i. By addition of their wave functions.
ii. By subtraction of their wave functions.
Addition of the atomic orbtials wave functions results in formation of a molecular orbital which is lower in energy than atomic orbitals and is termed as Bonding Molecular Orbital (BMO). Subtraction of the atomic orbitals results in the formation of a molecular orbital which is higher in energy than the atomic orbitals and is termed as Antibonding Molecular Orbital (AMO).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 55

Question 52.
State True or False. Correct the false statement.
i. According to MO theory, the formation of molecular orbitals from atomic orbitals is expressed in terms of Linear Combination of Atomic Orbitals (LCAO).
ii. An MO contains maximum two electrons with opposite spins.
iii. Interference of electron waves of combining atoms can only be constructive.
iv. In bonding molecular orbital, the large electron density is observed between the nuclei of the bonding atoms than the individual atomic orbitals.
v. In the antibonding molecular orbital, the electron density is nearly zero between the nuclei.
Answer:
i. True
ii. True
iii. False
Interference of electron waves of combining atoms can be constructive or destructive.
iv. True
v. True

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 53.
What are the conditions required for linear combination of atomic orbitals to form molecular orbitals?
Answer:
The following conditions are required for the linear combination of atomic orbitals (LCAO) to form molecular orbitals:
i. The combining atomic orbitals must have comparable energies.
So, Is orbitals of one atom can combine with 1 s orbital of another atom but not with 2s orbital, because energy of 2s orbital is much higher than that of 1 s orbital.

ii. The combining atomic orbitals must have the same symmetry along the molecular axis. Conventionally, z axis is taken as the internuclear axis. So even if atomic orbitals have same energy but their symmetry is not same they cannot combine. For example, 2s orbital of an atom can combine only with 2pz orbital of another atom, and not with 2px or 2py orbital of that atom because the symmetries are not same. pz is symmetrical along z axis while px is symmetrical along x axis.

iii. The combining atomic orbitals must overlap to the maximum extent. Greater the overlap, greater is the electron density between the nuclei and so stronger is the bond formed.

Question 54.
Explain and draw an energy level diagram obtained by the linear combination of two 1s atomic orbitals.
Answer:
The s-orbitals are spherically symmetrical along x, y and z axis. Two Is atomic orbitals combine to form σ 1s (bonding molecular orbital) and σ*1s (antibonding molecular orbital). Both the a bonding and σ* antibonding orbitals are symmetrical along the bond axis.
Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 56
[Note: If we consider ‘z’ to be internuclear axis then linear combination of pz orbitals from two atoms can form σ 2pz bonding σ*(2pz) molecular orbitals.]

Question 55.
Explain the formation of π and π* molecular orbitals with the help of a diagram.
Answer:
When the atomic orbitals overlap laterally, a pi (π) molecular orbital is formed.
The px and py orbitals are not symmetrical along the bond axis. They have a positive lobe above the axis and negative lobe below the axis. Hence, linear combination of such orbitals leads to the formation of molecular orbitals with positive and negative lobes above and below the bond axis. These are designed as π bonding and π antibonding orbitals. The electron density in such π orbitals is concentrated above and below the bond axis. The π molecular orbitals has a node between the nuclei.
Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 57

Question 56.
Write the increasing order of energies of molecular orbitals in various diatomic molecules of second row elements.
Answer:
The increasing order of energies of molecular orbitals for molecules (except O2 and F2) is:
σ1s < σ*1s < σ2s < σ*2s < (π2px = π2py) < σ2pz < (π*2px = π*2py) < σ*2pz
The increasing order of energy of molecular orbitals for diatomic molecules like O2 and F2 is:
σ1s < σ*1s < σ2s < σ*2s < σ2pz < (π2px = π2py) < (π*2px = π*2py) < σ*2pz

Question 57.
Explain briefly the information provided by the electronic configuration of molecules.
Answer:
The electronic configuration of molecules provides the following information:

  • Stability of molecules: If the number of electrons in bonding MOs is greater than the number in antibonding MOs the molecule is stable.
  • Magnetic nature of molecules: If all MOs in a molecule are completely filled with two electrons each, the molecule is diamagnetic (i.e., repelled) by magnetic field. However, if at least one MO is half-filled with one electron, the molecule is paramagnetic (i. e., attracted by magnetic field).
  • Bond order of molecule: The bond order of the molecule can be calculated from the number of electrons in bonding MOs (Nb) and antibonding MOs (Na).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 58.
What are the key ideas of MO theory?
OR
What are the salient features of MO theory?
Answer:
Key ideas of MO Theory:

  • MOs in molecules are similar to AOs of atoms. Molecular orbital describes region of space in the molecule representing the probability of an electron.
  • MOs are formed by combining AOs of different atoms. The number of MOs formed is equal to the number of AOs combined.
  • Atomic orbitals of comparable energies and proper symmetry combine to form molecular orbitals.
  • MOs those are lower in energy than the starting AOs are bonding MOs and those higher in energy are antibonding MOs.
  • The electrons are filled in MOs beginning with the lowest energy.
  • Only two electrons occupy each molecular orbital and they have opposite spins, that is, their spins are paired.
  • The bond order of the molecule can be calculated from the number of bonding and antibonding electrons.

Question 59.
Explain the formation of the following molecules on the basis of MOT. Also find the bond order.
i. H2
ii. Li2
iii. N2
iv. O2
v. F2
Answer:
i. Hydrogen molecule (H2):
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 58
a. Hydrogen atom (Z = 1) has electronic configuration as 1s1.
b. Hydrogen atom contains one electron, hence hydrogen molecule which is diatomic contains two electrons.
c. Linear combination of two 1s atomic orbitals gives rise to two molecular orbitals σ1s and σ*1s.
d. The two electrons from the hydrogen atoms occupy the σ1s molecular orbital and σ*1s remains vacant.
e. Thus, electronic configuration of H2 molecule is σ1s2.
f. Since, no unpaired electron is present in hydrogen molecule, it is diamagnetic.
g. There are no electrons in the antibonding molecular orbital (σ*1s).
h. The bond order of H2 molecule is
Bond order = \(\frac{\mathrm{N}_{\mathrm{b}}-\mathrm{N}_{\mathrm{a}}}{2}=\frac{2-0}{2}\) = 1
Thus, a single covalent bond is present between two hydrogen atoms.
[Note: The bond length is 74 pm and the bond dissociation energy is 438 kJ mol-1.]

ii. Lithium molecule (Li2):
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 59
a. Lithium atom (Z = 3) has electronic configuration as 1s2 2s1.
b. Lithium atom has 3 electrons, hence Li2 molecule has 6 electrons.
c. Linear combination of four atomic orbitals gives rise to four molecular orbitals namely σ1s, σ*1s, σ2S and σ*2s.
d. The electronic configuration of Li2 molecule is (σ1s)2 (σ*1s)2 (σ2s)2.
e. Since no unpaired electron is present in lithium molecule, it is diamagnetic.
f. Bond order of Li2 molecule
\(=\frac{\mathrm{N}_{\mathrm{b}}-\mathrm{N}_{\mathrm{a}}}{2}=\frac{4-2}{2}=1\)
Thus, a single covalent bond is present between two Li atoms. Hence, Li2 is a stable molecule.

iii. Nitrogen molecule (N2):
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 60
a. Nitrogen atom (Z = 7) has electronic configuration as 1s2 2s2 2p3.
b. Nitrogen atom contains 7 electrons, hence nitrogen molecule contains 14 electrons.
c. Linear combination of atomic orbitals gives rise to different molecular orbitals.
d. The electronic configuration of N2 molecule is
N2: (σ1s)2 (σ*1s)2 (σ2s)2 (σ*2s)2 (π2px)2 (π2py)2 (σ2pz)2
e. Since N2 molecule does not have unpaired electron, it is diamagnetic.
f. Bond order of N2 molecule
\(=\frac{\mathrm{N}_{\mathrm{b}}-\mathrm{N}_{\mathrm{a}}}{2}=\frac{10-4}{2}=3\)
Thus, there are three bonds in N2 molecule.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 60.
Study the following tables showing bond enthalpies of single and multiple bonds.

Bond ΔaH/kJ mol-1
C-H 400-415
N-H 390
O-H 460-464
C-C 345
C-N 290-315
C-O 355-380
C-Cl 330
Bond ΔaH/kJ mol-1
C-Br 275
O-O 175-184
C=C 610-630
C≡C 835
C=O 724-757
C≡N 854

i. Among single bonds, which bond is the strongest?
ii. How is bond enthalpy related to bond strength?
Answer:
i. Among single bonds, O-H bond is the strongest.
ii. Larger the bond enthalpy, stronger is the bond.

Question 61.
Write a short note on bond length.
Answer:
Bond length:

  • Bond length is defined as the equilibrium distance between the nuclei of two covalently bonded atoms in a molecule.
  • Each atom of the bonded pair contributes to the bond length.
  • Bond length depends upon the size of atoms and multiplicity of bonds. It increases with increase in size of atom and decreases with increase in multiplicity of bond.
    e.g. C – C single bond is longer than C ≡ C triple bond.
  • Bond lengths are measured by X-ray and electron diffraction techniques.

Question 62.
Cl-Cl covalent bond length is smaller than Br-Br covalent bond length. Explain.
Answer:
Bond length increases with increase in size of atom. Cl atom is smaller than Br atom. Hence, Cl-Cl covalent bond length is smaller than Br-Br covalent bond length.

Question 63.
Arrange the following bonds in decreasing order of bond strength: C-N, C=N, C≡N
Answer:
C≡N > C=N > C-N
Note: Average bond lengths for some single, double and triple bonds:

Type of bond

Covalent bond length (pm)

O-H 96
C-H 107
N-O 136
C-O 143
C-N 143
C-C 154
C=C 121
N=O 122
C=C 133
C=N 138
C≡N 116
C≡C 120
Type of bond

Covalent bond length (pm)

H2(H-H) 74
F2(F-F) 144
Cl2(Cl-Cl) 199
Br2(Br-Br) 228
I2(I-I) 267
N2(N≡N) 109
O2(O-O) 121
HF (H-F) 92
HCl (H-Cl) 127
HBr (H-Br) 141
HI (H-I) 160

Question 64.
Write a short note on bond order.
Answer:
i. According to the Lewis theory, bond order is given by the number of bonds between the two atoms in a molecule.
e.g. a. In hydrogen molecule, bond order between hydrogen atoms is one as one electron pair is shared.
b. In oxygen molecule, bond order between oxygen atoms is two as two electron pairs are shared.
c. In acetylene molecule, bond order between two carbon atoms is three as three electron pairs are shared.

ii. The isoelectronic molecules and ions have identical bond orders.
e.g. a. The bond order of F2 and \(\mathrm{O}_{2}{ }^{2-}\) is one.
b. The bond order of N2, CO and NO+ is 3.

iii. As the bond order increases, the bond enthalpy increases and bond length decreases.
iv. With the help of bond order, the stability of a molecule can be predicted.
[Note: N2 molecule has bond enthalpy of 946 kJ mol-1. It is one of the highest for diatomic molecules.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 65.
Explain how polarity (ionic character) is developed in a covalent bond.
Answer:
i. Covalent bonds are formed between two atoms of the same or different elements.
ii. When a covalent bond is formed between atoms of same element such as H-H, F-F, Cl-Cl, etc., the shared pair of electrons is attracted equally to both atoms and is situated midway between two atoms. Such covalent bond is termed as nonpolar covalent bond.
iii. When a covalent bond is formed between two atoms of different elements that have different electronegativities, the shared electron pair does not remain at the centre. The electron pair is pulled towards the more electronegative atom resulting in the separation of charges. This give rise to dipole. The more electronegative atom acquires a partial -ve charge and the other atom gets a partial +ve charge. Such a bond is called as polar covalent bond. The examples of polar molecules include HF, HC1, etc.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 61
Fluorine is more electronegative than hydrogen, therefore, the shared electron pair is more attracted towards fluorine and the atoms acquire partial +ve and -ve charges, respectively.
iv. Polarity of the covalent bond increases as the difference in the electronegativity between the bonded atoms increases. When the difference in electronegativities of combining atom is about 1.7, ionic percentage in the covalent bond is 50%.

Question 66.
Define and explain the term dipole moment.
Answer:
i. Dipole moment (μ) is the product of the magnitude of charge and distance between the centres of +ve and -ve charges.
ii. It is given by, µ = Q × r
where, Q = charge, r = distance of separation.
iii. Unit of dipole moment is Debye (D).
iv. Dipole moment being a vector quantity is represented by a small arrow with the tail on the positive centre and head pointing towards the negative centre.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 62
Note: 1 D = 3.33564 × 10-30 C m
where C is coulomb and m is meter.

Question 67.
Dipole moment in case of BeF2 is zero. Explain.
Answer:

  • Dipole moment is a vector quantity. Therefore, the resultant dipole moment of a molecule is the vector sum of dipole moments of various bonds in the molecule.
  • In BeF2 molecule, Be-F bond is polar and has a bond dipole moment.
  • BeF2 is a linear molecule with two Be-F bonds oriented at 180° (opposite to each other).
  • The two bond dipoles are equal in magnitude and act in opposite direction to cancel each other. Therefore, the net dipole moment in case of BeF2 is zero.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 63

Question 68.
Dipole moment in case of BF3 is zero. Explain.
Answer:
i. Dipole moment is a vector quantity. Therefore, the resultant dipole moment of a molecule is the vector sum of dipole moments of various bonds in the molecule.
ii. In BF3 molecule, B-F bond is polar and has a bond dipole moment.
iii. Also, in BF3, the three B-F bonds are oriented at an angle of 120° to one another.
iv. The resultant of any two bond moments is equal in magnitude and opposite in direction to that of third. Hence, the net sum is zero and the dipole moment of tetra-atomic BF3 molecule is zero.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 64

Question 69.
Dipole moment of H2O is higher than that of NH3. Explain.
Answer:
In both NH3 and H2O, the central atom undergoes sp3 hybridization. In both the molecules, the orbital dipole due to the lone pair increases the effect of resultant dipole moment. However, in NH3, nitrogen has only one lone pair while in H2O, oxygen has two lone pairs. Hence, dipole moment of H2O is higher than that of NH3.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 65

Question 70.
Dipole moment of NF3 is less than that of NH3, even though N-F bond is more polar than N-H bond. Explain.
Answer:

  • Both NH3 and NF3 have pyramidal structure with a lone pair on the N atom. In NF3, F is more electronegative than N while in NH3, N is more electronegative.
  • In NH3, the orbital dipole due to the lone pair is in the same direction as the resultant dipole moment of N-H bonds, whereas in NF3 the orbital dipole is in the direction opposite to the resultant dipole moment of three N-F bonds.
  • The orbital dipole because of lone pair decreases the effect of the resultant N-F bond moments, which results in the low dipole moment of NF3 (0.8 × 10-30 C m) as compared to NH3 (4.90 × 10-30 C m).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 66

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 71.
CHCl3 is polar. Explain.
Answer:
In CHCl3, the dipoles are not equal and do not cancel each other. Hence, CHCl3 is polar with a non-zero dipole moment.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 67
Note: Dipole moments and geometry of some molecules are given in the following table:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 68

Question 72.
Explain Fajan’s rule with suitable examples.
Answer:
Fajan’s rule:
i. Smaller the size of the cation and larger the size of the anion, greater is the covalent character of the ionic bond. For example, Li+ Cl is more covalent than Na+Cl. Similarly, Li+I is more covalent than Li+Cl.

ii. Greater the charge on cation, more is covalent character of the ionic bond. For example, covalent character of AlCl3, MgCl2 and NaCl decreases in the following order Al3+(Cl)3 > Mg2+(Cl)2 > Na+ Cl

iii. A cation with the outer electronic configuration of the s2p6d10 type possesses greater polarising power compared to the cation having the same size and same charge but having outer electronic configuration of s2p6 type.

This is because d electrons of the s2p6d10 shell screen nuclear charge less effectively compared to s and p electrons of s2p6 shell. Hence, the effective nuclear charge in a cation having s2p6d10 configuration is greater than that of the one having s2p6 configuration. For example: Cu+Cl is more covalent than Na+Cl. Here,
(Cu+ = 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d10; Na+ = 1s2 2s2 2p6)

Question 73.
Explain resonance with respect to \(\mathrm{CO}_{3}^{2-}\) ion.
Answer:
i. Three structures written for \(\mathrm{CO}_{3}^{2-}\) as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 69
ii. Each structure differs from the other only in the position of electrons without changing positions of the atoms. None of these individual structures is adequate to explain the properties of \(\mathrm{CO}_{3}^{2-}\).
iii. The actual structure of \(\mathrm{CO}_{3}^{2-}\) is a combination of three Lewis structures and is called as the resonance hybrid.
iv. Energy of the resonance hybrid structure is less than the energy of any single canonical form. Hence, resonance stabilizes certain polyatomic molecules or ions.
v. The average of all resonating structures contributes to overall bonding characteristic features of the molecule or ion.

Question 74.
Explain O3 molecule is the resonance hybrid.
Answer:
Ozone is a resonance hybrid of structures I and II. The structures I and II are canonical forms while structure III is a resonance hybrid. The energy of structure III is less than that of I and II.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 70

Question 75.
Define resonance energy.
Answer:
Resonance energy is defined as the difference in energy of the most stable contributing structure and the resonating forms.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Question 76.
Write the resonance structures of \(\mathrm{NO}_{3}^{-}\) ion.
Answer:
Resonance structures of \(\mathrm{NO}_{3}^{-}\) :
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 71

Question 77.
A student represents the Lewis dot structure of AlCl3 molecule as shown below:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 72
i. Is the representation correct? Justify your answer.
ii. If the chlorine atoms are replaced by bromine atoms, what will be the number of electrons present in the valence shell of aluminium?
Answer:
i. No, the representation is incorrect. There will be no lone pair of electrons on aluminium.
ii. The number of electrons present in the valence shell of aluminium will be six.

Question 78.
Below is an incomplete Lewis structure for glycine. Complete the following Lewis structure and answer the following questions. (Hint: Add lone pairs and multiple bonds to the structure below to give each atom a formal charge of zero.)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 73
i. How many lone pairs of electrons are present on N-atom in the structure?
ii. How many pi bonds are present in the structure?
iii. How many sigma bonds are present in the structure?
Answer:
The correct Lewis structure is:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 74
i. The number of lone pairs of electrons on N-atom is 1.
ii. The number of pi bonds in the structure is 1.
iii. The number of sigma bonds in the structure is 9.

Question 79.
Consider the following four species and answer the below given questions.
\(\mathrm{O}_{2}^{-}\), O2 \(\mathrm{O}_{2}^{+}\), \(\mathrm{O}_{2}^{2-}\)
i. What is the bond order of \(\mathrm{O}_{2}^{+}\) ?
ii. Which species is least stable?
Answer:
i. Electronic configuration of \(\mathrm{O}_{2}^{+}\) can be given as:
(σ1s)2 (σ*1s)2 (σ2s)2 (σ*2s)2 (σ2pz)2 (π2px)2 (π2py)2 (π*2px)1 (π*2py)0
∴ Bond order = \(\frac {1}{2}\) (10 – 5) = 2.5

ii. Stability of the molecule or species ∝ Bond order
Bond order decreases as: \(\mathrm{O}_{2}^{+}\) > O2 > \(\mathrm{O}_{2}^{-}\) > \(\mathrm{O}_{2}^{2-}\)
∴ Stability decreases as: \(\mathrm{O}_{2}^{+}\) > O2 > \(\mathrm{O}_{2}^{-}\) > \(\mathrm{O}_{2}^{2-}\)
Hence, least stable species is \(\mathrm{O}_{2}^{2-}\).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

Multiple Choice Questions

1. The CORRECT Lewis structure of CO molecule is:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 75
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 76

2. Which of the following molecule does NOT obey octet rule?
(A) BF3
(B) CO2
(C) H2O
(D) N2
Answer:
(A) BF3

3. In BF3, bond angle is .
(A) 90°
(B) 109°
(C) 120°
(D) 180°
Answer:
(C) 120°

4. Identify the geometry represented by the following diagram.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 77
(A) Trigonal bipyramidal
(B) T-shape
(C) square planar
(D) square pyramidal
Answer:
(D) square pyramidal

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

5. The geometry of H2S is ………….
(A) tetrahedral
(B) angular
(C) linear
(D) trigonal planar
Answer:
(B) angular

6. What will be the shape of molecule whose central atom is associated with 3 bonds and one lone pair?
(A) Trigonal pyramidal
(B) Tetrahedral
(C) Square planar
(D) Triangular planar
Answer:
(A) Trigonal pyramidal

7. Pair of molecules having identical geometry is …………..
(A) BF3, NH3
(B) BF3, AlF3
(C) BeF2, H2O
(D) BCl3, PCl3
Answer:
(B) BF3, AlF3

8. Which of the following molecule has bent shape?
(A) PCl3
(B) OF2
(C) BH3
(D) BeBr2
Answer:
(B) OF2

9. Which of the following is INCORRECT?
(A) The strength of the bond depends on the extent of overlap of the atomic orbitals.
(B) The extent of overlap depends on the shape and size of the atomic orbitals.
(C) The energy of the bonded atoms is more than that of the free atoms.
(D) During overlap of atomic orbitals, the electron density increases in between the two nuclei.
Answer:
(C) The energy of the bonded atoms is more than that of the free atoms.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

10. In the potential energy curve for hydrogen molecule, the maximum stability is achieved when …………..
(A) potential energy of the system is maximum
(B) potential energy of the system is minimum
(C) force of repulsion become greater than force of attraction
(D) no bond formation takes place
Answer:
(B) potential energy of the system is minimum

11. In acetylene, C-C σ bond is formed by …………. overlap.
(A) sp2-sp2
(B) sp-sp
(C) sp-s
(D) p-p
Answer:
(B) sp-sp

12. The formation of O-H bonds in a water molecule involves …………. overlap.
(A) sp3-s
(B) sp1-s
(C) sp-p
(D) sp3-p
Answer:
(A) sp3-s

13. The molecular orbital shown in the diagram can be described as ………….
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding 78
(A) σ
(B) σ*
(C) π*
(D) π
Answer:
(C) π*

14. The bond order of lithium molecule is ………….
(A) one
(B) two
(C) three
(D) four
Answer:
(A) one

15. The bond order in N2 molecule is …………
(A) 1
(B) 2
(C) 3
(D) 4
Answer:
(C) 3

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

16. The bond energies of F2, Cl2, Br2 and I2 are 37, 58, 46, and 36 kcal/mol respectively. The strongest bond is present in …………..
(A) Br2
(B) I2
(C) Cl2
(D) F2
Answer:
(C) Cl2

17. The common features among the species CO and NO+ are: ……………
(A) isoelectronic species and bond order 3
(B) isoelectronic species and bond order 2
(C) odd electron species and unstable
(D) odd electron species and bond order 1
Answer:
(A) isoelectronic species and bond order 3

18. Which of the following is CORRECT for H2O ?

H=O bond H2O molecule
(A) polar nonpolar
(B) nonpolar polar
(C) polar polar
(D) nonpolar nonpolar

Answer:
(C)

19. Each of the following molecules has a non-zero dipole moment EXCEPT:
(A) NF3
(B) BF3
(C) SO2
(D) LiH
Answer:
(B) BF3

20. Which of the following compounds is non-polar?
(A) HCl
(B) CH2Cl2
(C) CHCl3
(D) CCl4
Answer:
(D) CCl4

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Chemical Bonding

21. The dipole moment of …………..
(A) NF3 is higher than that of NH2
(B) BF3 is higher than that of NH3
(C) H2S is higher than that of H2O
(D) HCl is higher than that of HBr
Answer:
(D) HCl is higher than that of HBr

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 1.
Complete the information about the properties of subatomic particles in the following table:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 1
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 2

Question 2.
What are three important subatomic particles of an atom?
Answer:
Electron, proton and neutron are the three important subatomic particles of an atom.

Question 3.
Write a short note on discovery of electron.
Answer:

  • In the year 1897, J J. Thomson studied the properties of cathode rays through a cathode ray tube experiment and found that the cathode rays are a stream of very small, negatively charged particles.
  • These particles are 1837 times lighter than a hydrogen atom and are present in all atoms.
  • These particles were later named as electrons.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 3

Question 4.
Draw labelled diagram of Rutherford’s α-particle scattering experiment.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 4

Question 5.
Write a short note on discovery of proton.
Answer:

  • After the discovery of nucleus in an atom, Rutherford found that the fast moving α-particles transmuted nitrogen into oxygen with simultaneous liberation of hydrogen.
    \({ }_{7}^{14} \mathrm{~N}+{ }_{2}^{4} \alpha \longrightarrow{ }_{8}^{17} \mathrm{O}+{ }_{1}^{1} \mathrm{H}\)
  • He further showed that other elements could also be transmuted similarly and hydrogen was always emitted in the process.
  • Based on these observations, he proposed that the hydrogen nucleus must be contained inside nuclei of all the elements. Hence, he renamed hydrogen nucleus as proton.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 6.
Write a short note on discovery of neutron.
Answer:

  • In 1920, Ernest Rutherford proposed the existence of an electrically neutral and massive particle in the nucleus of an atom in order to account for the disparity in atomic number and atomic mass of an element.
  • In 1932, James Chadwick measured the velocity of protons ejected from paraffin by an unidentified radiation from beryllium (Be).
  • From that he determined the mass of the particles of this unidentified neutral radiation, which was found to be almost same as that of the mass of a proton.
  • He named this neutral particle as ‘neutron’, which was earlier predicted by Rutherford.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 5

Question 7.
State true or false. Correct the false statement.
i. An electron is 1837 times lighter than a proton.
ii. In Rutherford’s experiment of scattering of α-particles by thin gold foil, most of the α-particles
bounced back.
iii. Cathode rays are a stream of very small, positively charged particles.
Answer:
i. True
ii. False,
In Rutherford’s experiment of scattering of α-particles by thin gold foil, very few α-particles bounced back.
iii. False,
Cathode rays are a stream of very small, negatively charged particles.

Question 8.
Explain the term: Atomic number
Answer:

  • Atomic number is defined as the number of protons present in the nucleus of an atom of a particular element.
  • Atomic number is represented by Z.
  • An atom is electrically neutral. Hence, the number of protons equals to the number of electrons. In other words, the atomic number of an atom is equal to the number of electrons.

∴ Atomic Number (Z) = Number of protons = Number of electrons

Question 9.
Give reason: The approximate atomic mass in Daltons is numerically equal to the number of nucleons in the atom.
Answer:

  • The electrons possess negligible mass. They do not contribute much to the mass of an atom.
  • Therefore, the entire mass of an atom is supposed to be present in the nucleus which consists of protons and neutrons, which are collectively called as nucleons.

Hence, approximate atomic mass in Daltons is numerically equal to the number of nucleons in the atom.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 10.
Explain: Atomic mass number.
Answer:

  • The sum of the total number of protons and neutrons present in the nucleus of an atom is called the atomic mass number of that atom.
  • Atomic mass number is represented by A
  • Mass number (A) = Number of protons (Z) + Number of neutrons (N) = Total number of nucleons
    ∴ A = Z + N OR N = A – Z

Question 11.
How is an atom of an element ‘X’ having atomic number ‘Z’ and atomic mass number ‘A’ represented?
Answer:
An atom of an element ‘X’ having atomic number ‘Z’ and atomic mass number ‘A’ is represented as: \({ }_{Z}^{A} X\)

Question 12.
What is a nuclide?
Answer:
The atom or nucleus having a unique composition as specified by \({ }_{Z}^{A} X\) is called as a nuclide.

Question 13.
If an element ‘X’ has 6 protons and 8 neutrons, then write its representation.
Answer:
The representation of the given element is \({ }_{6}^{14} \mathrm{X}\).

Question 14.
Three elements Q, R and T have mass number 40. Their atoms contain 22, 21 and 20 neutrons respectively. Represent their atomic composition with appropriate symbol.
Answer:
Mass number (A) = Number of protons (Z) + Number of neutrons (N) .
A = Z + N
∴ Z = A – N
For the given three elements, A = 40. Values of their atomic numbers Z, are calculated from the given values of the number of neutrons, N, using the above formula.
For Q: Z = A – N = 40 – 22 = 18
For R: Z = A – N = 40 – 21 = 19
For T: Z = A – N = 40 – 20 = 20
Now, atomic composition of an element (X) is represented as \({ }_{Z}^{A} X\).
The atomic compositions of the three elements are written as follows:
\({ }_{18}^{40} \mathrm{Q}\), \({ }_{19}^{40} \mathrm{R}\), \({ }_{20}^{40} \mathrm{T}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 15.
Find out the number of protons, electrons and neutrons in the nuclide \({ }_{18}^{40} \mathrm{Ar}\).
Solution:
For the given nuclide,
Atomic number, Z = 18, Mass number, A = 40
Number of protons = Number of electrons = Z = 18
Number of neutrons (N) = A – Z = 40 – 18 = 22
Ans: Number of protons = 18, Number of electrons = 18, Number of neutrons = 22

Question 16.
How many protons, electrons and neutrons are there in the following nuclei?
i. \({ }_{8}^{17} \mathrm{O}\)
ii. \({ }_{12}^{25} \mathrm{Mg}\)
iii. \({ }_{35}^{80} \mathrm{Br}\)
Solution:
i. \({ }_{8}^{17} \mathrm{O}\)
Atomic number, Z = 8, Mass number, A = 17
Number of protons = Number of electrons = Z = 8
Number of neutrons (N) = A – Z = 17 – 8 = 9
Ans: Number of protons = 8, Number of electrons = 8, Number of neutrons = 9

ii. \({ }_{12}^{25} \mathrm{Mg}\)
Atomic number, Z = 12, Mass number, A = 25
Number of protons = Number of electrons = Z = 12
Number of neutrons (N) = A – Z = 25 – 12 = 13
Ans: Number of protons = 12, Number of electrons = 12, Number of neutrons = 13

iii. \({ }_{35}^{80} \mathrm{Br}\)
Atomic number, Z = 35, Mass number, A = 80
Number of protons = Number of electrons = Z = 35
Number of neutrons (N) = A – Z = 80 – 35 = 45
Ans: Number of protons = 35, Number of electrons = 35, Number of neutrons = 45

Question 17.
Define isotopes.
Answer:
Isotopes are defined as the atoms of an element having the same number ofprotons but different number of neutrons in their nuclei.
e.g. \({ }_{6}^{12} \mathrm{C}\), \({ }_{6}^{13} \mathrm{C}\) and \({ }_{6}^{14} \mathrm{Br}\) are isotopes.

Question 18.
Complete the information about the isotopes of carbon in the following table:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 6
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 7

Question 19.
Define isobars.
Answer:
Isobars are defined as the atoms of different elements having the same mass number but different atomic number.
e.g. \({ }_{6}^{14} \mathrm{C}\) and \({ }_{7}^{14} \mathrm{N}\) are isobars.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 20.
Complete the following table:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 8
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 9

Question 21.
The two natural isotopes of chlorine viz. \({ }_{17}^{35} \mathrm{Cl}\) and \({ }_{17}^{37} \mathrm{Cl}\) exist in relative abundance of 3 : 1. Find out the average atomic mass of chlorine.
Solution:
Given: Isotopes of chlorine \({ }_{17}^{35} \mathrm{Cl}\) and \({ }_{17}^{37} \mathrm{Cl}\).
Ratio of relative abundance of these isotopes is 3 : 1.
To find: Average atomic mass of chlorine
Calculation: From the relative abundance 3 : 1, it is understood that out of 4 chlorine atoms, 3 atoms have mass 35 and 1 atom has mass 37.
Therefore, the average atomic mass of chlorine = \(\frac{3 \times 35+1 \times 37}{4}\) = 35.5
∴ Average atomic mass of chlorine = 35.5 u
Ans: The average atomic mass of chlorine is 35.5 u.

Question 22.
Find out the average atomic mass of lithium (Li) from the following data:

Isotope Atomic mass (u) Abundance
6Li 6.015 7.59%
7Li 7.016 92.41%

Solution:
Given: Three isotopes of lithium along with respective atomic mass and % abundance.
To find: Average atomic mass of lithium
Calculation:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 10
Ans: Average atomic mass of lithium is 6.940 u.

Question 23.
Certain results were obtained when scientists studied the interactions of radiation with matter. What were the two results, utilized by Neils Bohr to overcome the drawbacks of Rutherford model?
Answer:
The two results utilized by Neils Bohr to overcome the drawbacks of Rutherford model were:

  • Wave particle duality of electromagnetic radiation
  • Line emission spectra of hydrogen

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 24.
Explain in short the wave particle duality of light (electromagnetic radiation).
Answer:
Wave particle duality of light (electromagnetic radiation):

  • Light has both particle and wave like nature.
    Phenomena such as diffraction and interference of light could be explained by treating light as electromagnetic wave.
  • However, the black-body radiation or photoelectric effect could not be explained by wave nature of light. This could be accounted for by considering particle nature of light. Thus, both phenomena could be explained only by accepting that light has dual behaviour.
  • When light interacts with matter it behaves as a stream of particles (called photons) and when light propagates, it behaves as an electromagnetic wave.

Question 25.
Observe the following figure of an electromagnetic wave and answer the questions given below:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 11
i. What does ‘x’ represent?
ii. What does ‘y’ represent?
Answer:
i. ‘x’ represents amplitude of the wave.
ii. ‘y’ represents wavelength of the wave.

Question 26.
Define and explain the following terms:
i. Wavelength (λ).
ii. Frequency (ν)
iii. Wavenumber (\(\bar{v}\))
iv. Amplitude (A)
v. Velocity (c)
Answer:
i. Wavelength (λ):

  • The distance between two consecutive crests or two consecutive troughs in a wave is called wavelength.
  • It is represented by Greek letter λ (lambda).
  • The SI unit for wavelength is metre (m).

Note: The other units include Angstrom, nanometre, picometer (1 pm = 10-12 m) and micron (1µ = 10-6 m).
1Å = 10-8 cm = 10-10 m
1nm = 10-9 m = 10Å

ii. Frequency (ν):

  • The number of waves that pass a given point in one second is called frequency.
  • It is represented by Greek letter ‘ν’ (nu).
  • The SI unit of frequency is Hertz (Hz) or s-1.

Note: 1 Hz = 1 cycle per second (1 cps)
The units, kilo Hertz (kHz) and mega Hertz (mHz) are commonly used.
1 kHz = 103 Hz = 103 cps
1 mHz = 106 Hz = 106 cps

iii. Wavenumber (\(\bar{v}\)):

  • The number of wavelengths per unit length is called the wavenumber.
  • It is represented by \(\bar{v}\) (nu bar).
  • The commonly used unit for wavenumber is cm-1 while its SI unit is m-1.
  • Wavenumber of a wave is related to the wavelength as follows:
    \(\bar{v}\) = \(\frac{1}{\lambda}\)

iv. Amplitude (A):

  • The height of a crest or the depth of a trough from the line of propagation of the wave is called
    amplitude.
  • It is represented by letter ‘A’.
  • The square of the amplitude represents the intensity (brightness) of the radiation.

v. Velocity (c):

  • The distance travelled by a wave in one second is called the velocity of the wave.
  • It is denoted by letter c.
  • It is the product of the frequency and wavelength. Hence, c = νλ
  • The velocity of all types of electromagnetic radiations (in space or in vacuum) is the same and it is equal to the velocity of light (3 × 1010 cm s-1 or 3 × 108 m s-1. However, they may have different wavelengths and frequencies.

Question 27.
Write a short note on quantum theory of radiation.
Answer:
i. Max Planck put forward a theory known as Planck’s quantum theory to explain black-body radiation.
ii. According to this theory, the energy of electromagnetic radiation depends upon the frequency and not the amplitude.
iii. The smallest quantity of energy that can be emitted or absorbed in the form of electromagnetic radiation is called as ‘quantum’.
iv. The energy (E) of each quantum of radiation is directly proportional to its frequency (ν).
i.e., E ∝ ν ; E = hν
where, h = Planck’s constant = 6.626 × 10-34 J s.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 28.
Parameters of blue and red light are 400 nm and 750 nm respectively. Which of the two is of higher energy?
Answer:
400 nm and 750 nm are the wavelengths of blue and red light respectively. Energy of radiation is given by the expression E = hν and the frequency (ν), of radiation is related to the wavelength by the expression.
ν = \(\frac{c}{\lambda}\)
∴ E = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\)
Therefore, shorter the wavelength, λ, larger the frequency, ν, and higher the energy, E. Thus, blue light which has shorter λ (400 nm) than red light (750 nm) has higher energy.

Question 29.
What is an emission spectrum?
Answer:

  • When a substance is irradiated with electromagnetic radiation, it absorbs energy. Atoms, molecules or ions, which have absorbed radiation are said to be ‘excited’. Heating can also result in an excited state.
  • The excited species emits the absorbed energy in the form of radiation. This process is called emission of radiation and the recorded spectrum of this emitted radiation is called ‘emission spectrum’.

Question 30.
Give some examples of commonly used light sources that work on atomic emission.
Answer:
Examples are fluorescent tube, sodium vapor lamp, neon sign and halogen lamp.

Question 31.
Write a short note on emission spectrum of hydrogen. Also, list all the five series of lines in the hydrogen spectrum.
Answer:
i. When electric discharge is passed through gaseous hydrogen, it emits radiation. The recorded spectrum of this emitted radiation is called hydrogen emission spectrum.

ii. This spectrum falls in different regions of electromagnetic radiation and it is comprised of a series of lines corresponding to different frequencies. That is, the spectrum was discontinuous.

iii. In the year, 1885, Balmer expressed the wave numbers of the emission lines in the visible region of electromagnetic spectrum by the formula:
\(\overline{\mathrm{v}}=109677\left[\frac{1}{2^{2}}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}^{2}}\right] \mathrm{cm}^{-1}\)
where, n = 3, 4, 5,…
These lines are known as Balmer series.

iv. Rydberg found that other series of lines could be described by the following formula:
\(\bar{v}=109677\left[\frac{1}{n_{1}^{2}}-\frac{1}{n_{2}^{2}}\right] \mathrm{cm}^{-1}\)
where, 109677 cm-1 is called Rydberg constant for hydrogen (RH).

v. Different series of emission spectral lines for hydrogen are as follows:

Series n1 n2 Region
Lyman 1 2, 3, 4, …. Ultraviolet
Balmer 2 3, 4, 5, …. Visible
Paschen 3 4, 5, 6, …. Infrared
Bracket 4 5, 6, 7, …. Infrared
Pfund 5 6, 7, 8,…. Infrared

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 32.
Observe the emission spectrum of hydrogen and answer the following questions.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 12
i. Is the spectrum continuous?
ii. In which region of electromagnetic radiation does the Paschen series belong?
iii. Which series falls in the visible region of electromagnetic radiation?
Answer:
i. The spectra is not continuous and comprises of a series of lines corresponding to different frequencies.
ii. Paschen series falls in the infrared region of electromagnetic radiation.
iii. Balmer series falls partly in the visible region of electromagnetic radiation.

Question 33.
Give the expression to calculate wavenumber of the emission lines in the Balmer series.
Answer:
\(\bar{v}=109677\left[\frac{1}{2^{2}}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}^{2}}\right] \mathrm{cm}^{-1}\)
where, n = 3, 4, 5, ….

Question 34.
Visible light has wavelengths ranging from 400 nm (violet) to 750 nm (red). Express these wavelengths in terms of frequency (Hz). (1 nm = 10-9 m)
Solution:
Given: Wavelengths: λ1 = 400 nm (for violet light), λ2 = 750 nm (for red light)
To find: Frequencies: ν1, ν2
Formula: ν = \(\frac{c}{\lambda}\)
Calculation: i. Wavelength of violet light, λ1 = 400 nm = 400 × 10-9 m
Frequency, ν = \(\frac{c}{\lambda}\) where c is speed of light = 3.0 × 108 ms-1
∴ ν1 = \(\frac{3.0 \times 10^{8} \mathrm{~ms}^{-1}}{400 \times 10^{-9} \mathrm{~m}}\) = 7.50 × 1014 Hz
ii. Wavelength of red light, λ2 = 750 nm = 750 × 10-9 m
Frequency, ν = \(\frac{c}{\lambda}\)
∴ ν2 = \(\frac{3.0 \times 10^{8} \mathrm{~m} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}{750 \times 10^{-9} \mathrm{~m}}\) = 4.00 × 1014 Hz
Ans: The frequency of violet light is 7.50 × 1014 Hz and that of red light is 4.00 × 1014 Hz.

Question 35.
Yellow light emitted from a lamp has a wavelength of 580 nm. Find the frequency and wavenumber of this light.
Solution:
Given: Wavelength (λ) = 580 nm
To find: Frequency (ν), Wave number \(\bar{v}\)
Formulae : \(v=\frac{c}{\lambda}, \bar{v}=\frac{1}{\lambda}\)
Calculation: Wavelength of yellow light (λ) = 580 nm = 580 × 10-9 m [1 nm = 10-9 m]
We know that frequency (ν) is related to wavelength as: ν = \(\frac{c}{\lambda}\)
where, c, velocity of light = 3.0 × 10-8 m s-1
∴ ν = \(\frac{3.0 \times 10^{8} \mathrm{~m} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}{580 \times 10^{-9} \mathrm{~m}}=5.17 \times 10^{14} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}\)
Again, Wave number, \(\bar{v}=\frac{1}{\lambda}=\frac{1}{580 \times 10^{-9} \mathrm{~m}}=1.72 \times 10^{6} \mathrm{~m}^{-1}\)
Ans: Frequency = 5.17 × 1014 s-1 and wave number = 1.72 × 106 m-1

Question 36.
Calculate the energy of a photon of radiation having wavelength 300 nm. [h = 6.63 × 10-34 J s]
Solution:
Given: Wavelength (λ) = 300 nm
To find: Energy of a photon (E)
Formulae: E = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\)
Calculation: From formula,
E = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~J} \mathrm{~s} \times 3 \times 10^{8} \mathrm{~m} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}{300 \times 10^{-9} \mathrm{~m}}=6.63 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}\)
Ans: Energy of a photon is 6.63 × 10-19 J.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 37.
Explain briefly the results of Bohr’s theory for hydrogen atom.
Answer:
i. The stationary states for electrons are numbered n = 1, 2, 3……. These integers are known as principal quantum numbers.
ii. The radii of the stationary states are rn = n2 a0, where a0 = 52.9 pm (picometer). Thus, the radius of the first stationary state, called the Bohr radius is 52.9 pm.
iii. The most important property associated with the electron is the energy of its stationary state. It is given by the formula:
En = -RH (1/n2), where n = 1, 2, 3, …..
RH is the Rydberg constant for hydrogen and its value in joules is 2.18 × 10-18 J.
The lowest energy state is called the ground state. Energy of the ground state (n = 1) is:
E1 = -2.18 × 10-18 × 1/12 = -2.18 × 10-18 J
Energy of the stationary state corresponding to n = 2 is
E2 = -2.18 × 10-18 × (1/(2)2) = -0.545 × 10-18 J.
iv. Bohr theory can be applied to hydrogen like species. For example, He+, Li2+, Be3+ and so on. Energies and radii of the stationary states associated with these species are given by:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 13
where, Z is the atomic number. From the above expressions, it can be seen that the energy decreases (becomes more negative) and radius becomes smaller as the value of Z increases.
v. Velocities of electrons can also be calculated from the Bohr theory. Qualitatively, it is found that the magnitude of velocity of an electron increases with increase of Z and decreases with increase in the principal quantum number (n).

Question 38.
How many electrons are present in \({ }_{1}^{2} \mathrm{H}\), 2He and He+ ? Which of these are hydrogen-like species?
Answer:
Hydrogen-like species contain only one electron.
Consider \({ }_{1}^{2} \mathrm{H}\):
Number of protons = Number of electrons = 1
Consider 2He:
Number of protons = Number of electrons = 2
Consider He+:
Number of electrons = (Number of electrons in He – 1) = 2 – 1 = 1
Thus, \({ }_{1}^{2} \mathrm{H}\) and He+ are hydrogen-like species.
[Note: Bohr’s theory is applicable to hydrogen atom and hydrogen-like species, which contain only one electron.]

Question 39.
Describe how the line spectrum of hydrogen is explained by Bohr theory.
Answer:
i. According to second postulate of Bohr theory, radiation is emitted when an electron moves from an outer orbit of higher principal quantum number (ni) to an inner orbit of lower principal quantum number (nf). The energy difference (ΔE) between the initial and final orbit of the electronic transition corresponds to the energy of the emitted radiation.
ii. From the third postulate of Bohr theory, ΔE can be expressed as
ΔE = Ei – Ef …….(1)
iii. According to the results derived from Bohr theory, the energy (En) of an orbit is related to its principal quantum number ‘n’ by the equation:
E = \(-\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{H}}\left(\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}^{2}}\right)\) ……(2)
iv. On combining these two equations, we get:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 14
v. Substituting the value of RH in joules, we get
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 15
vi. This expression can be rewritten in the terms of wavenumber of the emitted radiation in the following steps:
(ΔE) J = (h) J s × (ν) Hz
and
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 16
This equation appears like the Rydberg equation, where, nf = n1 and ni = n2.
In other words, Bohr theory successfully accounts for the empirical Rydberg equation for the line emission spectrum of hydrogen.

Question 40.
Observe the following diagram showing electronic transition in the hydrogen spectrum.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 17
i. Electron jumps from higher energy level to n = 1. Which series does it correspond to?
ii. Electron jumps from higher energy level to n = 4. Which series does it correspond to?
iii. Which transition will give second line of Balmer series?
Answer:
i. When electron jumps from higher energy level to n = 1, it corresponds to Lyman series.
ii. When electron jumps from higher energy level to n = 1, it corresponds to Bracket series.
iii. When electron jumps from n = 4 to n = 1, the second line of Balmer series is observed.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 41.
Explain de Broglie’s equation.
Answer:
de Broglie’s equation:

  • de Broglie proposed (in 1924) that matter should exhibit a dual behaviour. That is, every object which possesses a mass and velocity behaves both as a particle and as a wave. An electron has mass and velocity. This means that an electron should have momentum (p), a property of particle as well as wavelength (λ), a property of wave.
  • According to de Broglie, the wavelength λ of a particle of mass m moving with a velocity v is
    λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{mv}}\) where, h is Planck’s constant.
  • The quantity mv gives the momentum of the particles.
    λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{p}}\) where, p represents the momentum of the particle.
  • de Broglie’s prediction was confirmed by diffraction experiments (a wave property).

[Note: According to de Broglie’s equation, the wavelength of a moving particle is inversely proportional to its mass. Therefore, heavier particles have much smaller wavelength than lighter particles like electrons.]

Question 42.
Write a note on Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle.
Answer:
i. Uncertainty principle was proposed by Wemer Heisenberg in 1927. It can be stated as “It is impossible to determine simultaneously, the exact position and exact momentum (or velocity) of an electron ”.
ii. If Δx is the uncertainty in the determination of the position of a very small moving particle and Δpx is the uncertainty in the determination of its momentum, then
Δx Δpx ≥ \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{4 \pi}\) …….(1) where h is Planck’s constant
iii. The above equation can alternatively be stated as,
Δx × m × Δvx ≥ \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{4 \pi}\), because Δpx = m × Δvx ……..(2)
where Δvx is the uncertainty in the determination of velocity and m is the mass of the particle.

Question 43.
Calculate the radius and energy associated with the first orbit of He.
Solution:
Given: n = 1
To find: Radius and energy associated with the first orbit of He+
Formulae:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 18
Calculation: He+ is a hydrogen-like species having Z = 2.
Using formula (i),
Radius of the first orbit of He+ = r1 = \(\frac{52.9 \times(1)^{2}}{2} \mathrm{pm}\)
= 26.45 pm
Using formula (ii),
Energy of the first orbit of He+ = E1 = -2.18 × 10-18 \(\left(\frac{2^{2}}{1^{2}}\right) \mathrm{J}\)
= -8.72 × 10-18 J
Ans: Radius of the first orbit of He+ is 26.45 pm and energy of the first orbit of He+ is -8.72 × 10-18 J.

Question 44.
What is the wavelength of the photon emitted during the transition from the orbit of n = 5 to that of n = 2 in hydrogen atom?
Solution:
Given: ni = 5, nf = 2
To find: Wavelength of the photon emitted
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 19
Ans: Wavelength of the photon emitted is 434 nm.

Question 45.
Calculate the mass of a hypothetical particle having wavelength 5894 A and velocity 1.0 × 108 ms-1.
Solution:
Given: Wavelength (λ) = 5894 Å, Velocity (ν) = 1.0 × 108 ms-1
To find: Mass of a particle
Formula: λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{mv}}\) or m = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\lambda \mathrm{v}}\) (according to de-Broglie equation)
Calculation: m = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\lambda \mathrm{v}}\)
∴ m = \(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~kg} \mathrm{~m}^{2} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}{\left(5894 \times 10^{-10} \mathrm{~m}\right) \times\left(1.0 \times 10^{8} \mathrm{~ms}^{-1}\right)}\)
= 1.124 × 10-35 kg
Ans: Mass of a particle is 1.124 × 10-35 kg.

[Calculation using log table:
\(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{5894 \times 10^{-10} \times 1.0 \times 10^{8}}=\frac{6.626}{5894} \times 10^{-32}\)
= Antilog10 [log10 6.626 – log10 5894] × 10-32
= Antilog10 [0.8213 – 3.7704] × 10-32
= Antilog10 [latex]\overline{3} .0509[/latex] × 10-32 = 1.124 × 10-35]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 46.
Write a short note on Schrodinger equation.
Answer:
Schrodinger equation or wave equation:
i. Schrodinger developed the fundamental equation of quantum mechanics which incorporates wave particle duality of matter. The Schrodinger equation or wave equation is written as:
It \(\hat{\mathbf{H}}\)ψ = Eψ
Here \(\hat{\mathbf{H}}\) is a mathematical operator called Hamiltonian, ψ (psi) is the wave function and E is the total energy of the system.

ii. When Schrodinger equation is solved for an electron in hydrogen atom, the possible values of energy states (E) that the electron may have along with the corresponding wave function (ψ) are obtained. As a consequence of solving this equation, a set of three quantum numbers characteristic of the quantized energy levels and the corresponding wave functions are obtained. These are: Principal quantum number (n), azimuthal quantum number (l) and magnetic quantum number (ml).

iii. The solution of Schrodinger wave equation led to three quantum numbers and successfully predicted features of hydrogen atom emission spectrum.

iv. Splitting of spectral lines in multi-electron atomic emission spectra could not be explained through such model. These were explained by George Uhlenbeck and Samuel Goudsmit (1925) who proposed the presence of the fourth quantum number called electron spin quantum number, ms.

Question 47.
Write a short note on magnetic orbital quantum number (ml).
Answer:
Magnetic orbital quantum number (ml):

  • Magnetic orbital quantum number describes the relative spatial orientation of the orbitals in a given subshell.
  • It is denoted by m; and it has values from -l to +l through zero, giving total values or total orientations equal to (2l + 1).
  • For s-subshell, 1 = 0, hence, ml = 0. Thus, s-subshell contains only one orbital.
  • For p-subshell, l = 1, hence, ml = +1, 0, -1. Thus, p-subshell contains three orbitals having distinct orientations.

Question 48.
If n = 2, what are the values of quantum number l and ml ?
Answer:
For a given n, l = 0 to (n – 1) and for given l, ml = -l…., 0…. + l
Therefore, the possible values of l and ml for n = 2 are:

Value of n Value of l Value of ml
2 0 ml = 0
1 ml = -1

ml = 0

ml = +1

Question 49.
What are the values of ml for f-subshell?
Answer:
For f-subshell, l = 3. Therefore, ml has seven values: + 3, + 2, + 1, 0, -1, -2, -3.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 50.
How many orbitals make the N-shell? What is the subshell wise distribution of orbitals in the N-shell?
Answer:
For N-shell principal quantum number n = 4
∴ Total number of orbitals in N-shell = n2 = 42 = 16. The total number of subshells in N-shell = n = 4.
The four subshells with their azimuthal quantum numbers and the constituent number of orbitals are as shown below:

Azimuthal quantum number (l) Symbol of subshell Number of orbitals (2l + 1)
l = 0 s (2 × 0) + 1 = 1
l = 1 P (2 × 1) + 1 = 3
l = 2 d (2 × 2) + 1 = 5
l = 3 f (2 × 3) + 1 = 7

Question 51.
Complete the following flow chart:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 20
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 21

Question 52.
Write a short note on electron spin quantum number.
Answer:
Electron spin quantum number (ms):

  • Electron spin quantum number describes the spin state of the electron in an orbital. It is designated as ms.
  • An electron spins around its axis and this imparts spin angular momentum to it.
  • The two orientations which the spin angular momentum of an electron can take up give rise to the spin states which can be distinguished from each other by the spin quantum number, ms, which can be either +1/2 or -1/2.
  • The two spin states are represented by two arrows, ↑ (pointing up) and ↓ (pointing down) and thus have opposite spins.

Question 53.
An atom has two electrons in its 4s orbital. Write the values of the four quantum numbers for each of them.
Answer:
For the 4s orbital, 4 stands for the principal quantum number n; s stands for the subshell s having the value of azimuthal quantum number, l = 0. In the ‘s’ subshell, there is only one orbital and has magnetic quantum number, ml = 0. The two electrons in this orbital have opposite spins. Thus, the four quantum numbers of two electrons in 4s orbital are:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 22

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 54.
Write a short note on probability density of electron.
Answer:
i. The probability of finding an electron at a given point in an atom is proportional to the square of the wave function at that point (ψ2).
ii. According to Max Born, the square of wave function at a point in an atom is the probability density of the electron at that point.
The following figure shows the probability density diagrams of Is and 2s atomic orbitals. These diagrams appear like a cloud.
The electron cloud of 2s orbital shows one node, which is a region with nearly zero probability density and displays the change of sign for its corresponding wavefunction.
Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 23

Question 55.
What is meant by the term ‘boundary surface diagram’?
Answer:
A boundary surface is drawn in space for an orbital such that the value of probability density (ψ2) is constant and encloses a region where the probability of finding electron is typically more than 90%. Such a boundary surface diagram is a good representation of shape of an orbital.
e.g. Boundary surface diagram of Is and 2s orbitals are spherical in shape.

Question 56.
Describe the shape of s orbital.
Answer:
Shape of s orbital:

  • For each value of principal quantum number ‘n’, there is only one s-orbital.
  • For s-orbital, l = 0 and ml = 0, hence s-orbital has only one orientation i.e., the probability of finding the electrons is same in all directions. Thus, s-orbital is spherically symmetrical around the nucleus.
  • The value of n determines the size of an orbital. With increase in the value of n, the size of the s-orbital increases.

Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 24

Question 57.
Describe the shape of 2p orbitals.
Answer:
Shape of 2p orbitals:
i. For p orbital, l = 1. For l = 1, ml = +1, 0, -1. Thus, p orbitals have three orientations.
ii. Each orbital has two lobes on the two sides of a nodal plane passing through the nucleus.
iii. Shape of 2p orbitals resembles a dumbbell.
iv. The size and energy of the three 2p orbitals are the same. However, their orientations in space are different. The lobes of the three 2p orbitals are along the x, y and z axes. Accordingly, the corresponding orbitals are designated as 2px, 2py and 2pz. The size and energy of the orbitals in p subshell increase with the increase of principal quantum number.
Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 25

Question 58.
Describe the shape of 3d orbitals.
Answer:
Shape of 3d orbitals:

  • For d orbital, l = 2. For l = 2, ml = +2, +1, 0, -1, -2. Thus, d orbitals have five orientations.
  • They are designated as dxy, dyz, dzx, dx2-y2 and dz.
  • Shape of 3d orbitals are shown in the following figure. The first three have double dumb-bell shape. They lie in xy, yz and xz plane, respectively. The dx2-y2 is also dumb-bell shaped and lies along the x and y axes. dz2 is dumb-bell shaped along z axis with a dough-nut shaped ring of high electron density around the nucleus in xy plane.
  • In spite of difference in their shapes, the five d orbitals are equivalent in energy. The shapes of 4d, 5d, 6d…….. orbitals are similar to those of 3d orbitals, but their respective size and energies are large or they are said to be more diffused.

Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 26

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 59.
Explain (n + l) rule with respect to energies of orbitals.
Answer:
The lower the sum (n + l) for an orbital, the lower is its energy. If two orbitals have the same (n + l) values, then the orbital with the lower value of n is of lower energy. This is called the (n + l) rule.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 27

Question 60.
What are the two methods of representing electronic configuration of an atom?
Answer:
The two methods of representing electronic configuration of an atom are:
i. Orbital notation: nsa npb ndc …..
In the orbital notation method, a shell is represented by the principal quantum number (n) followed by respective symbol of the subshell. The number of electrons occupying that subshell being written as superscript on right side of the symbol.

ii. Orbital diagram:
In the orbital diagram method, each orbital in a subshell is represented by a box and the electrons represented by an arrow (↑ for up spin and ↓ for down spin) are placed in the respective boxes. In this method, all the four quantum numbers of electron are accounted for.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 28
Note: Consider two electrons in 3s orbital:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 29

Question 61.
Complete the following table:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 30
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 31

Question 62.
Explain condensed orbital notation of electronic configuration of an atom.
Answer:

  • The orbital notation of electronic configuration of an element with high atomic number comprises a long train of symbols of orbitals with an increasing order of energy.
  • It can be condensed by dividing it into two parts: Inner or core part of electronic configuration and outer electronic configuration.
  • Electronic configuration of the preceding inert gas is a part of the electronic configuration of any element. In the condensed orbital notation, it is implied by writing symbol of that inert gas in a square bracket. It is core part of the electronic configuration of that element. The outer electronic configuration is specific to a particular element and written immediately after the bracket.
  • For example, the orbital notation of potassium ‘K (Z = 19) is Is2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 4s1’. Its core part is the electronic configuration of the preceding inert gas argon ‘Ar: 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6, while ‘4s1’ is an outer part. Therefore, the condensed orbital notation of electronic configuration of potassium is ‘K: [Ar] 4s2.’

Note: Electronic configuration of the elements with atomic numbers 1 to 30 is as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 32
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 33

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 63.
Write electronic configuration of 18Ar and 19K using orbital notation and orbital diagram method.
Answer:
From the atomic numbers, it is understood that 18 electrons are to be filled in Ar atom and 19 electrons are to be filled in K atom. These are to be filled in the orbitals according to the Aufbau principle. The electronic configuration of these atoms can be represented as:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 34

Question 64.
Write condensed orbital notation of electronic configuration of the following elements:
i. Fluorine (Z = 9)
ii. Scandium (Z = 21)
iii. Cobalt (Z = 27)
iv. Zinc (Z = 30)
Answer:

No. Element Condensed orbital notation
i. Fluorine (Z = 9) [He] 2s2 2p5
ii. Scandium (Z = 21) [Ar] 4s2 3d1
iii. Cobalt (Z = 27) [Ar] 4s2 3d7
iv. Zinc (Z = 30) [Ar] 4s2 3d10

Question 65.
Find out one dinegative anion and one unipositive cation which are isoelectronic with Ne atom. Write their electronic configuration using orbital notations and orbital diagram method.
Answer:
Atomic number (Z) of Ne is 10. Therefore, Ne and its isoelectronic species contain 10 electrons each. The dinegative anionic species, isoelectronic with Ne is obtained by adding two electrons to the atom with Z = 8. This is O2- ion.
The unipositive cationic species, isoelectronic with Ne is obtained by removing one electron from an atom with Z = 11. It is Na+ ion.
These species and their electronic configurations are shown below:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 35

Question 66.
A student pictorially represented the electronic configuration of cobalt (Z = 27) in ground state as shown in the following figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 36
i. Is this the correct representation?
ii. Identify the rules of electron filling that are violated (if any) in the above answer and give the correct representation.
Answer:
i. No, the electronic configuration of cobalt in ground state is incorrectly represented.
ii. The mles of electron filling that are violated in the above diagram are Pauli’s exclusion principle and Hund’s rule. The correct electronic configuration is:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 37

Question 67.
With reference to the representative model of the gold foil experiment, answer the following questions:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 38
i. What evidence regarding an atom do lines A, B and C provide?
ii. How does Rutherford’s model contradict Thomson’s plum-pudding model?
iii. What results would you expect from the experiment if Thomson’s plum-pudding model was correct?
Answer:
i. Line A – Most of the space inside the atom is empty because most of the α-particles passed through the gold foil without getting deflected.
Line B – The nucleus is positively charged since some α-particles were deflected at small angles.
Line C – The nucleus contains most of the atoms mass since few α-particles were deflected backward, i.e. toward the radioactive source.

ii. According to plum-pudding model, an atom was considered a positively charged sphere with negatively charged electrons embedded in it. However, Rutherford’s gold foil experiment proved that an atom consists of large empty space with positive charge concentrated only at the centre (nucleus) and negatively charged electrons revolve around the nucleus in various orbits.

iii. If Thomson’s plum-pudding model was correct, then in the gold foil experiment we would not expect to see any significant deflection of the α-particles, i.e., Most α-particles would pass through the foil with very small or no deflections.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

Question 68.
Complete the following table:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 39
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 40

Multiple Choice Questions

1. Which of the following statements about the electron is INCORRECT?
(A) It is a negatively charged particle.
(B) The mass of electron is equal to the mass of neutron.
(C) It is a basic constituent of all atoms.
(D) It is a constituent of cathode rays.
Answer:
(B) The mass of electron is equal to the mass of neutron.

2. The isotopes of an element differ in
(A) the number of neutrons in the nucleus
(B) the charge on the nucleus
(C) the number of extra-nuclear electrons
(D) both the nuclear charge and the number of extra-nuclear electrons
Answer:
(A) the number of neutrons in the nucleus

3. The difference between U235 and U238 atoms is that U238 contains ………….
(A) 3 more protons
(B) 3 more protons and 3 more electrons
(C) 3 more neutrons and 3 more electrons
(D) 3 more neutrons
Answer:
(D) 3 more neutrons

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

4. The number of electrons, protons and neutrons in 31P3- ion is respectively ……………
(A) 15, 15, 16
(B) 15, 16, 15
(C) 18, 15, 16
(D) 15, 16, 18
Answer:
(C) 18, 15, 16

5. In vacuum, the speed of all types of electromagnetic radiation is equal to ………….
(A) 3.0 × 106 m s-1
(B) 3.0 × 108 m s-1
(C) 3.0 × 1010 m s-1
(D) 3.0 × 1012 m s-1
Answer:
(B) 3.0 × 108 m s-1

6. In the electromagnetic spectrum, the ultraviolet region is around ………….. Hz.
(A) 106
(B) 1010
(C) 1016
(D) 1026
Answer:
(C) 1016

7. In hydrogen spectrum, the series of lines appearing in ultraviolet region of electromagnetic spectrum are called ………….
(A) Lyman series
(B) Balmer series
(C) Pfund series
(D) Brackett series
Answer:
(A) Lyman series

8. The energy of electron in the nth Bohr orbit of H-atom is …………
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom 41
Answer:
(C) \(-\frac{2.18 \times 10^{-18}}{\mathrm{n}^{2}} \mathrm{~J}\)

9. Which of the following is a hydrogen-like species?
(A) He2+
(B) Be3+
(C) Li+
(D) H+
Answer:
(B) Be3+

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

10. The de Broglie wavelength associated with a particle of mass 10-6 kg moving with a velocity of 10 m s-1 is ………..
(A) 6.63 × 10-22 m
(B) 6.63 × 10-29 m
(C) 6.63 × 10-31 m
(D) 6.63 × 10-34 m
Answer:
(B) 6.63 × 10-29 m

11. An orbital is designated by …………. quantum numbers while an electron in an atom is designated by …………. quantum numbers.
(A) two, three
(B) three, two
(C) four, two
(D) three, four
Answer:
(D) three, four

12. In a multi-electron atom, the energy of the orbital depends on two quantum numbers: ……….
(A) n and ms
(B) n and ml
(C) ml and ms
(D) n and l
Answer:
(D) n and l

13. The number of subshells in a shell is equal to ………..
(A) n
(B) n2
(C) n – 1
(D) l + 1
Answer:
(A) n

14. The maximum number of electrons in a subshell for which l = 3 is …………..
(A) 14
(B) 10
(C) 8
(D) 4
Answer:
(A) 14

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

15. Which of the following is INCORRECT?
(A) A nodal plane has ψ2 very close to zero.
(B) The value of ψ2 at any finite distance from the nucleus is always zero.
(C) A boundary surface diagram enclosing 100 % probability density cannot be drawn.
(D) A boundary surface diagram is a good representation of shape of an orbtial.
Answer:
(B) The value of ψ2 at any finite distance from the nucleus is always zero.

16. pz-Orbital has ……….. nodal plane/planes.
(A) zero
(B) one
(C) two
(D) three
Answer:
(B) one

17. Which of the following pairs of d-orbitals will have electron density along the axis?
(A) dxy, dx2-y2
(B) dz2, dxz
(C) dxz, dyz
(D) dz2, dx2-y2
Answer:
(D) dz2, dx2-y2

18. The two electrons have the following set of quantum numbers:
P = 3, 2, -2, +\(\frac {1}{2}\)
Q = 3, 0, 0, +\(\frac {1}{2}\)
Which of the following statement is TRUE?
(A) P and Q have same energy
(B) P has greater energy than Q
(C) P has lesser energy than Q
(D) P and Q represent same electron
Answer:
(B) P has greater energy than Q

19. For 3d orbital, the values of n and l are ………… respectively.
(A) 0, 3
(B) 3, 2
(C) 3, 0
(D) 3, 3
Answer:
(B) 3, 2

20. For the electron present in 1 s orbital of helium atom, the correct set of values of quantum numbers is ………..
(A) 1, 0, 0, +1/2
(B) 1, 1, 0, +1/2
(C) 1, 1, 1, +1/2
(D) 2, 0, 0, +1/2
Answer:
(A) 1, 0, 0, +1/2

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Structure of Atom

21. The ground state electronic configuration for chromium atom (Z = 24) is …………
(A) [Ar] 3d5 4s1
(B) [Ar] 3d4 4s2
(C) [Ar] 3d8
(D) [Ar] 4s1 4p5
Answer:
(A) [Ar] 3d5 4s1

22. The electronic configuration of Ni2+ is ……….. (Atomic number of Ni = 28)
(A) [Ar] 4s2 3d6
(B) [Ar] 4s1 3d8
(C) [Ar] 3d8
(D) [Ar] 4s2 3d8
Answer:
(C) [Ar] 3d8

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques

Question 1.
Give reason: Purification of a chemical substance is important before investigating its composition and properties.
Answer:

  • Chemical substances occur in nature in the impure stage.
  • Also, chemical substances synthesized in the laboratory are obtained in crude and impure form.
  • Impurities present in the chemical substances may interfere with the properties to be determined (e.g. melting point or boiling point).
  • Therefore, before investigating the composition and properties of a given chemical substance, it is important to obtain it in pure form.

Question 2.
What are the different types of impurities that a solid may contain?
Answer:
A solid substance may contain two types of impurities:

  • Impurities that are soluble in the same solvent as the main substance.
  • Impurities that are not soluble in the same solvent as the main substance.

Question 3.
For which of the following cases, is the process of filtration feasible? Why?
Case 1: A solid substance containing impurities that are soluble in the same solvent as the main substance.
Case 2: A solid substance containing impurities that are not soluble in the same solvent as the main substance.
Answer:
Impurities which are not soluble in the same solvent as the main compound can be separated by a simple process called filtration. Hence, for ‘Case 2’, filtration is more feasible.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques

Question 4.
Describe the process of filtration with a neat and labelled diagram.
Answer:
i. Impurities which are not soluble in the same solvent as the main compound can be separated by a simple process called filtration.
ii. Procedure:
a. A circular piece of filter paper is folded to form a cone and fitted in the funnel.
b. The funnel is fixed on a stand and a beaker is kept below.
c. The mixture which has to be purified is added to a suitable solvent in which the main compound dissolves.
d. The paper is made moist, and the solution to be filtered is poured on the filter paper.
e. Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques 1
iii. The insoluble part remaining on the filter paper is called residue and the liquid which pass through the filter paper and collected in the beaker is called filtrate.
iv. This process is similar to separating tea leaves from decoction of tea or sand from mixture of sand and water.

Question 5.
Why is safety bottle used when filtration is carried out under suction?
Answer:
The safety bottle is used to prevent sucking of the filtrate into suction pump.

Question 6.
Name the steps involved in the process of crystallization.
Answer:
Steps involved in the process of crystallization:

  • Preparation of a saturated solution
  • Hot filtration
  • Cooling of the filtrate
  • Filtration

Question 7.
How is saturated solution of the crude solid prepared?
Answer:

  • A saturated solution of the crude solid is prepared by boiling it in a small but sufficient quantity of a suitable solvent.
  • The main solute from the sample of the crude solid dissolves to form a saturated solution on boiling.

[Note: The solution is not saturated with respect to the soluble impurities, as they are in small proportion.]

Question 8.
Explain the following steps with respect to the process of crystallization.
i. Preparation of a saturated solution
ii. Hot filtration
iii. Cooling of the filtrate
iv. Filtration
Answer:
i. Preparation of a saturated solution:

  • A saturated solution of the crude solid is prepared by boiling it in a small but sufficient quantity of a suitable solvent.
  • On doing so the main solute forms an almost saturated solution, but the solution is not saturated with respect to the soluble impurities, as they are in small proportion.

ii. Hot filtration: The hot saturated solution is quickly filtered to remove undissolved impurities as residue. Filtration under suction can be employed for rapid filtration.

iii. Cooling of the filtrate:

  • The hot filtrate is allowed to cool.
  • On cooling, the filtrate becomes supersaturated with respect to the main dissolved solute because solubility of a substance decreases with lowering of temperature.
  • The excess quantity of the dissolved solute comes out of the solution in the form of crystals.
  • The dissolved impurities, however, do not supersaturate the solution, as their quantity is small.
  • These continue to stay in the solution in dissolved state even on cooling. Therefore, the separated crystals are free from soluble impurities.

iv. Filtration:

  • The crystals obtained on cooling are further purified by filtration to remove insoluble impurities.
  • The filtrate obtained is called as mother liquor.
  • The crystals obtained after filtration are free from soluble as well as insoluble impurities.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques

Question 9.
Name the common solvents used in the process of crystallization.
Answer:
The commonly used solvents are water, ethyl alcohol, methyl alcohol, acetone, ether or their combinations.

Question 10.
Describe the process of crystallization of common salt from impure sample with the help of a diagram.
Answer:

  • Impure sample of a common salt is added to the required quantity of water and stirred with a glass rod.
  • More amount of salt is added and the solution is heated till no more salt dissolves.
  • The hot saturated solution is filtered off to remove insoluble impurities while the filtrate is collected in an evaporating dish.
  • The filtrate is allowed to cool which results in the formation crystals of pure salt (NaCl) leaving behind the soluble impurities.
  • The crystals are filtered and dried.

The diagram is as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques 2

Question 11.
Which solvent is used for the purification of copper sulphate and benzoic acid?
Answer:
The solvent used for the purification of copper sulphate and benzoic acid is water.

Question 12.
Define: Fractional crystallization
Answer:
Fractional crystallization is a process wherein two or more soluble substances having widely different solubilities in the same solvent at same temperature are separated by crystallization.

Question 13.
Give a brief description of the principle of fractional crystallization.
Answer:
Fractional crystallization is based on the differences in solubilities of two or more compounds in the same solvent at the same temperature. That is, the substance which is least soluble crystallizes out first and the most soluble substance crystallizes out last.
e.g. Mixture of two solutes A and B can be purified by fractional crystallization as follows:

  • Preparation of a saturated solution: Mixture of two solutes A and B are dissolved in a suitable hot solvent to prepare a saturated solution.
  • Hot filtration: The hot saturated solution is filtered to remove insoluble impurities.
  • Cooling of the filtrate: Hot filtrate is allowed to cool. On cooling, the solute which is least soluble crystallizes out first leaving behind the most soluble substance in the mother liquor.
  • Filtration: The crystals formed are filtered, washed with solvent and dried. Crystals obtained will be of a solute which is least soluble in a given solvent.
  • Concentration of a mother liquor: The mother liquor is concentrated by evaporating the solvent. These crystals are filtered and dried to obtain the second purified component (which was more soluble in given solvent).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques

Question 14.
Which type of impure liquids can be purified by the process of distillation?
Answer:
Distillation technique can be employed for the purification of

  • volatile liquids from non-volatile impurities.
  • liquids having sufficient difference in their boiling point.

Question 15.
Explain the construction of simple distillation unit using neat labelled diagram.
Answer:
i. The apparatus used for simple distillation is shown in the figure below:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques 3
ii. It consists of round bottom flask fitted with a cork having a thermometer.
iii. The flask has a sidearm through which it is connected to a condenser.
iv. The condenser has a jacket with two outlets through which water is circulated.
v. The liquid to be distilled is taken in the round bottom flask fixed by clamp.
vi. The flask is placed in a water bath or oil bath or sometimes wire gauze is kept on a stand as shown in the figure.

Question 16.
State the principle involved and describe the process to separate acetone and water from their mixture.
Answer:
i. Acetone and water can be separated from their mixture by simple distillation.

ii. Principle: Acetone and water are two miscible liquids having an appreciable difference (more than 30 K) in their boiling points. Acetone boils at 56 °C while boiling point of water is 100 °C. When the mixture of acetone and water is heated and temperature of the mixture reaches 56 °C acetone will distil out first. Once all acetone distils out, and when the temperature rises to 100 °C water will distil out.

iii. Process to separate acetone and water from their mixture:

  • Take the mixture of water and acetone in the distillation flask.
  • Heat the flask on a water bath carefully. At 56 °C acetone will distil out, collect it in receiver.
  • After all acetone distilled, change the receiver. Discard a few mL of the liquid. As the temperature reaches 100 °C water will begin to distil. Collect this in another receiver.

Question 17.
What is the advantage of fractional distillation over simple distillation?
Answer:
If in a mixture, the difference in boiling points of two liquids is not appreciable/large, they cannot be separated using simple distillation. To separate such liquids, fractional distillation is used.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques

Question 18.
Label the following diagram and explain the process by giving example.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques 4
Answer:
The labelled diagram is as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques 5
i. In fractional distillation, vapours first pass through the fractionating column.
ii. Vapours of more volatile liquid with lower boiling point rise up more than the vapours of liquid having higher boiling point.
e.g.

  • Suppose we have a mixture of two liquid ‘A’ and ‘B’ having boiling points 363 K and 373 K respectively.
  • ‘A’ is more volatile and ‘B’ is less volatile. As the mixture is heated, vapours of ‘A’ along with a little vapours of ‘B’ rise up and come in contact with the large surface of the fractionating column.
  • Vapours of ‘B’ condense rapidly into the distillation flask. While passing through the fractionating column, there is an exchange between the ascending vapours and descending liquid. The vapours of ‘B’ are scrubbed off by the descending liquid, this makes the vapours richer in ‘A’.
  • This process is repeated each time the vapours and liquid come in contact with the surface in the fractionating column.
  • Rising vapours become richer in ‘A’ and escape through the fractionating column and reach the condenser while the liquid in the distillation flask is richer in ‘B.
  • The separated components are further purified by repeating the process.

Question 19.
Give two examples of a mixture that can be separated by fractional distillation.
Answer:

  1. Mixture of acetone (b.p. 329 K) and methyl alcohol (b.p. 337.7 K)
  2. Mixture of acetone (b.p. 329 K) and benzene (b.p. 353 K)

Question 20.
Give one industrial application of fractional distillation.
Answer:
Fractional distillation is used in petroleum industry to separate different fractions of crude oil.

Question 21.
Write a short note on distillation under reduced pressure.
Answer:

  • Liquids having very high boiling points or which decompose on heating are purified by the method of distillation under reduced pressure.
  • In this method, the liquid is made to boil at a temperature lower than its normal boiling point by reducing the pressure on its surface.
  • The external pressure is reduced using a water pump or vacuum pump, e.g. Glycerol can be separated from soap by using this method.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques

Question 22.
Write the principle of solvent extraction and explain the process with labelled diagram.
Answer:
Principle: Extraction of compound takes place based on the difference in solubility of compound in two liquids.

  • In this process, the solute distributes itself between two immiscible liquids. From the aqueous phase the solute gets extracted in the organic phase.
  • On shaking for a few times with small volumes of organic phase, most of the solute gets extracted into the organic phase.
  • Then solute is then recovered from organic solvent either by evaporation of organic solvent or distillation.

Diagram:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques 6

Question 23.
Write a short note on continuous extraction method.
Answer:

  • During solvent extraction, if the solute is found to be less soluble in organic phase, then continuous extraction method is employed.
  • In this method, the same amount of organic solvent is used repeatedly for extraction.
  • This ensures that the most of the solute gets extracted in the organic phase.
  • This technique involves continuous distillation of the solvent within the same assembly. Hence, the use of large quantity of organic solvent is avoided.

Question 24.
Match the following:

Process Used in the purification/separation of
i. Crystallization a. Acetone and benzene
ii. Simple distillation b. Benzoic acid and water
iii. Fractional distillation c. Impure copper sulphate
iv. Solvent extraction d. Acetone and water

Answer:
i – c,
ii – d,
iii – a,
iv – b

Question 25.
What is chromatography? Explain the principle behind it.
Answer:
Chromatography is a technique used to separate components of a mixture, and also purify compounds.
Principle: The principle of separation of substances in chromatography is based on the distribution of the solutes in two phases, i.e., stationary phase and mobile phase.

  • Chromatography uses two phases for separation.
  • This technique is based on the difference in rates at which components in the mixture move through the stationary phase under the influence of the mobile phase.
  • In this technique, first the mixture of components is loaded at one end of the stationary phase and then the mobile phase is allowed to move over the stationary phase. The mobile phase can be a pure solvent or a mixture of solvents.
  • Depending on the relative affinity of the components toward the stationary phase and mobile phase, they remain on the surface of the stationary phase or move along with the mobile phase, and gradually get separated.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques

Question 26.
Give a brief description of column chromatography with an illustration.
Answer:
Column chromatography involves the separation of components over a column of stationary phase. The stationary phase material can be alumina, silica gel.
Procedure:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques 7

  • A slurry of the stationary phase material is filled in a long glass tube provided with a stopcock at the bottom and a glass wool plug at the lower end.
  • The mixture to be separated is dissolved in a suitable solvent and then it is loaded on top of adsorbent column.
  • A suitable mobile phase which could be a single solvent or a mixture of solvents is then poured over the adsorbent column.
  • The mixture along with the mobile phase slowly moves down the column.
  • The solutes get adsorbed on the stationary phase and depending on the degree to which they are adsorbed, they get separated from each other.
  • The component which is readily adsorbed are retained on the column and others move down the column to various distances forming distinct bands.
  • The component which is less strongly adsorbed is desorbed first and leaves the column first, while the strongly adsorbed component is eluted later.
  • The solutions of these components are collected separately.
  • These different components can be recovered by evaporating the solvent.

Question 27.
How is TLC plate or chromplate prepared?
Answer:
TLC plate or chromplate is prepared by applying a thin layer (0.2 mm thick) of adsorbent silica gel or alumina spread over a glass plate.

Question 28.
Describe the process of thin layer chromatography (TLC) and separation of components in it.
Answer:
i. Process:

  • A thin layer (about 0.2 mm thick) of an adsorbent like silica gel or alumina is spread over a thin glass plate (called chromplate or TLC plate). This plate acts as a stationary phase.
  • With the help of a capillary tube, the solution of the mixture to be separated is spotted at above 2 cm (on base line) from one end of the TLC plate.
  • The TLC plate is then placed in a closed jar containing a suitable solvent (mobile phase or eluant).
  • As the mobile phase rises up the plate, the components of the mixture move up along with the mobile phase to different distances depending upon their degree of adsorption, thus resulting in complete separation.

ii. Separation of components:

  • If the components are coloured, they appear as separated coloured spots on the plate.
  • If the components are not coloured but have property of fluorescence, they can be visualised under UV light, or the plate can be kept in a chamber containing a few iodine crystals. The Iodine vapours are adsorbed by the components and the spots appear brown.
  • Amino acids are visualised by spraying the plate with a solution of ninhydrin. This is known as spraying agent.

Question 29.
Name the physical state each of stationary phase and mobile phase in partition chromatography.
Answer:
In partition chromatography, both stationary and mobile phases are in liquid state.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques

Question 30.
State the principle of partition chromatography.
Answer:
Partition chromatography is based on continuous differential partitioning of components of a mixture between stationary and mobile phases.

Question 31.
Describe the process of paper chromatography.
Answer:
Process of paper chromatography:

  • The mixture of the compound to be analysed is dissolved in a suitable solvent and spotted on the chromatography paper about 2 cm from one end of the paper using a glass capillary.
  • The paper is then suspended in a chamber containing the mobile phase.
  • The mobile phase rises up the paper and flows over the spot, due to capillary action.
  • Different solutes are retained differently on the paper depending on their selective partitioning between the two phases. The paper strip so developed, is known as chromatogram.

Question 32.
Name the following:
i. A glass plate coated with a thin layer of silica gel.
ii. A spraying agent used for the visualization of amino acids.
Answer:
i. Chromplate/TLC plate
ii. Ninhydrin

Question 33.
Write a short note on Rf value.
Answer:
i. In chromatography, migration of the solute relative to the solvent front gives an idea about the relative retention of the solutes (or components of t the mixture) on the stationary phase.
ii. The relative adsorption of solutes is expressed in terms of its Rf value.
The symbol Rf stands for Retardation Factor.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques 8
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques 9

Question 34.
In a chemical laboratory, Priyal was asked to isolate an organic compound from its aqueous solution. She added ethyl acetate to the given sample, separated the organic layer and kept it for evaporation. At the end of her practical, Priyal found few crystals in the beaker which she kept for evaporation. Answer the following questions:
i. In the above passage, which method was used by Priyal for separation? State its principle.
ii. Why do you think the organic compound dissolved in ethyl acetate?
iii. Illustrate the method of separation used in the passage with an example.
Answer:
i. Method used: Solvent extraction method.
Principle: Extraction of compound takes place based on the difference in solubility of compound in two liquids,

  • In this process, the solute distributes itself between two immiscible liquids. From the aqueous phase the solute gets extracted in the organic phase.
  • On shaking for a few times with small volumes of organic phase, most of the solute gets extracted into the organic phase.
  • Then solute is then recovered from organic solvent either by evaporation of organic solvent or distillation.

ii. An organic compound (non-polar) dissolves in organic solvents (non-polar) because of the dipole-dipole interactions in between them (like dissolves like). Water is a polar solvent and it is unlikely that the covalent constituents of the organic substance is strong enough to break the ionic bonds. Any substance dissolves in other because it is able to break the bonds between the solvent molecules and form weak bonds with the solvent molecules. Hence, the organic compound will be more soluble in ethyl acetate as compared to water and this helps in its isolation from aqueous solution.

iii. An example for the separation of organic compound using solvents extraction method is: Benzoic acid in water can be extracted from its aqueous solution by using benzene.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques

Question 35.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques 10
Based on the above diagram, answer the following questions:
i. Name the chromatographic technique involved.
ii. From the developed chromatogram, state which has the highest and which has the lowest Rf value?
iii. Based on the TLC, which component would elute out at the end of a column chromatography?
iv. Mention two applications of TLC method.
Answer:
i. Thin layer chromatography
ii. Based on the developed chromatogram, spot ‘x’ has the highest Rf value while spot ‘z’ the lowest Rf value.
iii. Based on the TLC, spot ‘z’ being strongly adsorbed will elute at the end of a column chromatography.
iv. Applications of TLC are:

  • Separation of plant pigments from its mixture.
  • Separation of impurities from a given organic compound.
  • Separation of different amino acid.

Multiple Choice Questions

1. If a crude solid is made of mainly one substance and has some impurities then it is purified by ……………..
(A) crystallization
(B) distillation
(C) extraction
(D) sublimation
Answer:
(A) crystallization

2. Impure common salt can be purified by ……………
(A) crystallization
(B) distillation
(C) extraction
(D) sublimation
Answer:
(A) crystallization

3. Which of the following solvents is most commonly used for the crystallization of copper sulphate?
(A) Water
(B) Acetone
(C) Ether
(D) Methanol
Answer:
(A) Water

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques

4. In distillation of liquid, water condenser is used ……………
(A) to boil the liquid
(B) to collect the liquid
(C) to condense hot vapours of the liquid
(D) to adsorb the liquid
Answer:
(C) to condense hot vapours of the liquid

5. Separation of binary mixture of acetone and methyl alcohol is done by ……………
(A) simple distillation
(B) fractional distillation
(C) fractional crystallization
(D) re-crystallization
Answer:
(B) fractional distillation

6. Which of the following method is used to separate different fractions of crude oil?
(A) Solvent extraction
(B) Simple distillation
(C) Fractional distillation
(D) TLC
Answer:
(C) Fractional distillation

7. The method used to separate a given organic compound present in aqueous solution by shaking with a suitable solvent in which the compound is more soluble than water is called ……………….
(A) simple distillation
(B) fractional distillation
(C) solvent extraction
(D) crystallization
Answer:
(C) solvent extraction

8. Adsorption chromatography is a chromatographic technique based on the principle of ……………
(A) differential adsorption
(B) differential solubility
(C) differential extraction
(D) all of these
Answer:
(A) differential adsorption

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques

9. The stationary phase and mobile phase in TLC are ……………. respectively.
(A) solid and liquid
(B) solid and gas
(C) liquid and solid
(D) liquid and liquid
Answer:
(A) solid and liquid

10. Which of.the following is most commonly used for the visualization of amino acids in chromatography?
(A) Ultraviolet light
(B) Spraying agent
(C) Sunlight
(D) X-rays
Answer:
(B) Spraying agent

11. The stationary phase and mobile phase in partition chromatography are ………….. respectively.
(A) solid and liquid
(B) solid and gas
(C) liquid and solid
(D) liquid and liquid
Answer:
(D) liquid and liquid

12. Paper chromatography is based on the principle of …………….
(A) adsorption
(B) partition
(C) solubility
(D) volatility
Answer:
(B) partition

13. In paper chromatography, the mobile phase rises up the chromatography paper due to ………………
(A) evaporation of volatile solvent
(B) capillary action
(C) gravitational force
(D) differential adsorption
Answer:
(B) capillary action

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Basic Analytical Techniques

14. Which of the following is a type of partition chromatography?
(A) Column chromatography
(B) Thin layer chromatography
(C) Paper chromatography
(D) Both (B) and (C)
Answer:
(C) Paper chromatography

15. The principle of differential adsorption is applicable for which of the following chromatographic technique?
(A) Column chromatography
(B) Thin layer chromatography
(C) Paper chromatography
(D) Both (A) and (B)
Answer:
(D) Both (A) and (B)

16. Which of the following method will give clean separation of a sample of chloroform (organic liquid) and water in a short time span?
(A) TLC
(B) Distillation under reduced pressure
(C) Solvent extraction
(D) Simple distillation
Answer:
(C) Solvent extraction

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry

Question 1.
Explain the statement: Analytical chemistry provides physical or chemical information about a sample.
Answer:

  • Analytical chemistry facilitates the investigation of the chemical composition of substances.
  • It uses the instruments and methods to separate, identify and quantify a sample under study.

Thus, analytical chemistry provides chemical or physical information about a sample.

Question 2.
What is the difference between qualitative analysis and quantitative analysis?
Answer:

  1. Qualitative analysis deals with the detection of the presence or absence of elements in compounds and of chemical compounds in mixtures.
  2. Quantitative analysis deals with the determination of the relative proportions of elements in compounds and of chemical compounds in mixtures.

Question 3.
Explain the importance of chemical analysis.
Answer:

  • Chemical analysis is one of the most important methods of monitoring the composition of raw materials, intermediates and finished products, and also the composition of air in streets and premises of industrial plants.
  • In agriculture, chemical analysis is used to determine the composition of soils and fertilizers.
  • In medicine, it is used to determine the composition of medicinal preparations.

Question 4.
Write a note on the applications of analytical chemistry.
Answer:

  • Analytical chemistry has applications in forensic science, engineering and industry.
  • Analytical chemistry is also useful in the field of agriculture and pharmaceutical industry.
  • Industrial process as a whole and the production of new kinds of materials are closely associated with analytical chemistry.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry

Question 5.
What is semi-microanalysis?
Answer:

  • When the amount of a solid or liquid sample taken for analysis is a few grams, the analysis is called semi-microanalysis.
  • It is of two types: qualitative and quantitative analysis.

Question 6.
What does classical qualitative analysis method include?
Answer:
Classical qualitative analysis method includes separation and identification of compounds.

  • Separations may be done by methods such as precipitation, extraction and distillation.
  • Identification may be based on differences in colour, odour, melting point, boiling point, and reactivity.

Question 7.
Name two methods of classical quantitative analysis.
Answer:

  1. Volumetric analysis (Titrimetric analysis)
  2. Gravimetric analysis (i.e., decomposition, precipitation)

Question 8.
What are the two stages involved in the chemical analysis of a sample?
Answer:
The chemical analysis of a sample is carried out mainly in two stages: by the dry method and by the wet method. In dry method, the sample under test is not dissolved and in wet method, the sample under test is first dissolved and then analysed to determine its composition.

Question 9.
Explain: Qualitative analysis of organic compounds
Answer:

  • The majority of organic compounds are composed of a relatively small number of elements.
  • The most important ones are: carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen, sulphur, halogen, phosphorus.
  • Elementary qualitative analysis is concerned with the detection of the presence of these elements.
  • The identification of an organic compound involves tests such as detection of functional group, determination of melting/boiling points, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry

Question 10.
What does qualitative analysis of inorganic compounds involve?
Answer:
The qualitative analysis of simple inorganic compounds involves detection and confirmation of cationic and anionic species (basic and acidic radical) in them.

Question 11.
Explain: Chemical methods of quantitative analysis
Answer:

  • Quantitative analysis of organic compounds involves methods such as determination of percentage of constituent elements, concentrations of a known compound in the given sample, etc.
  • Quantitative analysis of simple inorganic compounds involves methods such as gravimetric analysis (i.e., decomposition, precipitation, etc.) and the titrimetric or volumetric analysis (i.e., progress of reaction between two solutions till its completion).
  • The quantitative analytical methods involve measurement of quantities such as mass and volume using some equipment/apparatus such as weighing machine, burette, etc.

Question 12.
Why is accurate measurement crucial in science?
Answer:

  • The accuracy of measurement is of a great concern in analytical chemistry. This is because faulty equipment, poor data processing or human error can lead to inaccurate measurements. Also, there can be intrinsic errors in the analytical measurement.
  • When measurements are not accurate, this provides incorrect data that can lead to wrong conclusions. For example, if a laboratory experiment requires a specific amount of a chemical, then measuring the wrong amount may result in an unsafe or unexpected outcome.
  • Hence, the numerical data obtained experimentally are treated mathematically to reach some quantitative conclusion.
  • Also, an analytical chemist has to know how to report the quantitative analytical data, indicating the extent of the accuracy of measurement, perform the mathematical operation and properly express the quantitative error in the result.

Question 13.
Why are scientific notations (exponential notations) used?
Answer:
A chemist has to deal with numbers as large as 602,200,000,000,000,000,000,000 for the molecules of 2 g of hydrogen gas or as small as 0.00000000000000000000000166 g. that is, mass of a H atom. To avoid the writing of so many zeros in mathematical operations, scientific notations i.e. exponential notations are used.

Question 14.
How are numbers expressed in scientific notations (exponential notations)?
Answer:
In scientific notations, numbers are expressed in the form of N × 10n, where ‘n’ is an exponent with positive or negative values and N can have a value between 1 to 10.
e.g. i. The number, 602,200,000,000,000,000,000,000 is expressed as 6.022 × 1023.
ii. The mass of a H atom, 0.00000000000000000000000166 g is expressed as 1.66 × 10-24 g.
iii. The number 123.546 is written as 1.23546 × 102.
iv. The number 0.00015 is written as 1.5 × 10-4.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry

Question 15.
Express the following quantities in scientific notations (exponential notations).
i. 0.0345
ii . 0.08
iii. 653.00
iv. 34.768
Answer:
i. 0.0345 = 3.45 × 10-2
ii. 0.08 = 8 × 10-2
iii. 653.00 = 6.5300 × 102
iv. 34.768 = 3.4768 × 101

Question 16.
Define: Accuracy of measurement
Answer:
Nearness of the measured value to the true value is called the accuracy of measurement.

Question 17.
Explain with the help of a diagram how accuracy depends upon the sensitivity or least count of the measuring equipment.
Answer:
A burette reading of 10.2 mL is as shown in the diagram below:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 1

  • For all the three situations in the above figure, the reading would be noted is 10.2 mL.
  • It means that there is an uncertainty about the digit appearing after the decimal point in the reading 10.2 mL because the least count of the burette is 0.1 mL.
  • The meaning of the reading 10.2 mL is that the true value of the reading lies between 10.1 mL and 10.3 mL.
  • This is indicated by writing 10.2 ± 0.1 mL.
  • Here, the burette reading has an error of ± 0.1 mL.
  • Smaller the error, higher is the accuracy.

Question 18.
How is absolute error calculated?
Answer:
Absolute error is calculated by subtracting true value from observed value.
Absolute error = Observed value – Tme value

Question 19.
Explain the term: Relative error
Answer:

  1. Relative error is the ratio of an absolute error to the true value.
  2. Relative error is generally a more useful quantity than absolute error.
  3. Relative error is expressed as a percentage and can be calculated as follows:
    Relative error = \(\frac{\text { Absolute error }}{\text { True value }} \times 100 \%\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry

Question 20.
Explain the term: Precision in measurement
Answer:

  • Multiple readings of the same quantity are noted to minimize the error.
  • If the multiple readings of the same quantity match closely, they are said to have high precision.
  • High precision implies reproducibility of the readings.
  • High precision is a prerequisite for high accuracy.
  • Precision is expressed in terms of deviation (i.e. absolute deviation and relative deviation).

Question 21.
Explain the following terms with respect to precise measurement:
i. Absolute deviation
ii. Mean absolute deviation
iii. Relative deviation
Answer:
i. Absolute deviation: An absolute deviation is the modulus of the difference between an observed value and the arithmetic mean for the set of several measurements made in the same way. It is a measure of absolute error in the repeated observation. It is expressed as follows:
Absolute deviation = |Observed value – Mean|

ii. Mean absolute deviation: Arithmetic mean of all the absolute deviations is called the mean absolute deviation in the measurements.

iii. Relative deviation: The ratio of mean absolute deviation to its arithmetic mean is called relative deviation. It is expressed as follows:
Relative deviation = \(\frac{\text { Mean absolute deviation }}{\text { Mean }}\) × 100%

Question 22.
Explain the need of significant figures in measurement.
Answer:

  • Uncertainty in measured value leads to uncertainty in calculated result.
  • Uncertainty in a value is indicated by mentioning the number of significant figures in that value. e.g. Consider, the column reading 10.2 ± 0.1 mL recorded on a burette having the least count of 0.1 mL. Here, it is said that the last digit ‘2’ in the reading is uncertain, its uncertainty is ±0.1 mL. On the other hand, the figure ‘10’ is certain.
  • The significant figures in a measurement or result are the number of digits known with certainty plus one uncertain digit.
  • In a scientific experiment, a result is obtained by doing calculation in which values of a number of quantities measured with equipment of different least counts are used.

Question 23.
How many significant figures are present in the following measurements?
i. 4.065 m
ii. 0.32 g
iii. 57.98 cm3
iv. 0.02 s
v. 4.0 × 10-4 km
vi. 604.0820 kg
vii. 307.100 × 10-5 cm
Answer:
i. 4
ii. 2
iii. 4
iv. 1
v. 2
vi. 7
vii. 6

Question 24.
How many significant figures are present in each of the following?
i. 45.0
ii. 0.001
iii. 2.10 × 10-8
iv. 340000
v. 0.0100
vi. 7890320
vii. 100.00
viii. 100
Answer:
i. 3
ii. 1
iii. 3
iv. 2
v. 3
vi. 6
vii. 5
viii. 1

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry

Question 25.
State the rules used to round off a number to the required number of significant figures.
Answer:
The following rules are used to round off a number to the required number of significant figures:

  • If the digit following the last digit to be kept is less than five, the last digit is left unchanged, e.g. 46.32 rounded off to two significant figures is 46.
  • If the digit following the last digit to be kept is five or more, the last digit to be kept is increased by one. e.g. 52.87 rounded to three significant figures is 52.9.

Question 26.
Round off each of the following to the number of significant digits indicated:
i. 1.223 to two digits
ii. 12.56 to three digits
iii. 122.17 to four digits
iv. 231.5 to three digits
Answer:
i. 1.223 to two digits = 1.2
This is because the third digit is less than 5, so we drop it and all the other digits to its right.
ii. 12.56 to three digits = 12.6
This is because the fourth digit is greater than 5, so we drop it and add 1 to the third digit.
iii. 122.17 to four digits = 122.2
This is because the fifth digit is greater than 5, so we drop it and add 1 to the fourth digit.
iv. 231.5 to three digits = 232
This is because the fourth digit is 5, so we drop it and add 1 to the third digit.

Question 27.
Add 5.55 × 104 and 6.95 × 103 and express the result in scientific notation.
Solution:
To perform addition operation, first the numbers are written in such a way that they have the same exponent. The coefficients are then added.
(5.55 × 104) + (6.95 × 103)= (5.55 × 104) + (0.695 × 104)
= (5.55 +0.695) × 104
= 6.245 × 104

Question 28.
Add 1.77 × 102 and 2.23 × 103 and express the result in scientific notation.
Solution:
To perform addition operation, first the numbers are written in such a way that they have the same exponent. The coefficients are then added.
(1.77 × 102) + (2.23 × 103) = (0.177 × 103) + (2.23 × 103)
= (0.177 + 2.23) × 103
= 2.407 × 103

Question 29.
Subtract 5.8 × 10-3 from 3.5 × 10-2 and express result in scientific notation.
Solution:
To perform subtraction operation, first the numbers are written in such a way that they have the same exponent. Then subtraction of coefficients can be done.
(3.5 × 10-2)- (5.8 × 10-3) = (3.5 × 10-2) – (0.58 × 10-2)
= (3.5 – 0.58) × 10-2
= 2.92 × 10-2

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry

Question 30.
Subtract 6.90 × 10-5 from 5.11 × 10-4 and express the result in scientific notation.
Solution:
To perform subtraction operation, first the numbers are written in such a way that they have the same exponent. Then subtraction of coefficients can be done.
(5.11 × 10-4) – (6.90 × 10-5) = (5.11 × 10-4) – (0.690 × 10-4)
= (5.11 – 0.690) × 10-4
= 4.42 × 10-4

Question 31.
Perform following calculations and express results in scientific notations (exponential notations),
i. (1.5 × 10-6) – (5.8 × 10-7)
ii. (9.8 × 10-3) – (8.8 × 10-3)
iii. (6.5 × 10-8) – (5.5 × 10-9)
Solution:
To perform subtraction operation, first the numbers are written in such a way that they have the same exponent. Then subtraction of coefficients can be done.
i. (1.5 × 10-6) – (5.8 × 10-7) = (1.5 × 10-6) – (0.58 × 10-6)
= (1.5 – 0.58) × 10-6
= 0.92 × 10-6
= 9.2 × 10-7

ii. (9.8 × 10-3) – (8.8 × 10-3) = (9.8 – 8.8) × 10-3
= 1.0 × 10-3

iii. (6.5 × 10-8) – (5.0 × 10-9) = (6.5 × 10-8) – (0.50 × 10-8)
= (6.5 – 0.50) × 10-8
= 6.0 × 10-8

Question 32.
Multiply 5.6 × 105 and 6.9 × 108 and express result in scientific notation.
Solution:
(5.6 × 105) × (6.9 × 108) = (5.6 × 6.9) (105+8)
= 38.64 × 1013
= 3.864 × 1014

Question 33.
Multiply 9.8 × 10-2 and 2.5 × 10-6 and express result in scientific notation.
Solution:
(9.8 × 10-2) × (2.5 × 10-6) = (9.8 × 2.5) (10-2+(-6))
= (9.8 × 2.5) × (10-2-6)
= 24.5 × 10-8
= 2.45 × 10-7

Question 34.
Perform following calculations and express results in scientific notations (exponential notations).
i. (2.5 × 10-6) × (1.8 × 10-7)
ii. (4.5 × 10-3) × (1.8 × 103)
iii. (8.5 × 107) × (3.5 × 109)
Solution:
i. (2.5 × 10-6) × (1.8 × 10-7) = (2.5 × 1.8) (10-6+(-7))
= (2.5 × 1.8) × (10-6-7)
= 4.5 × 10-13

ii. (4.5 × 10-3) × (1.8 × 103) = (4.5 × 1.8) (10-3+3)
= (4.5 × 1.8) × (100)
= 8.1

iii. (8.5 × 107) × (3.5 × 109) = (8.5 × 3.5) (107+9)
= (8.5 × 3.5) × 1016
= 29.75 × 1016
= 2.975 × 1017
[Note: To express number in scientific notation, the number has to be greater than or equal to 10 or less than 1. The number, 8.1 is greater than 1, but less than 10 and hence, it cannot be expressed in scientific notation.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry

Question 35.
In laboratory experiment, 10 g potassium chlorate sample on decomposition gives following data: The sample contains 3.8 g of oxygen and the actual mass of oxygen in the quantity of potassium chlorate is 3.92 g. Calculate absolute error and relative error.
Solution:
The observed value is 3.8 g and accepted (true) value is 3.92 g.
i. Absolute error = Observed value – True value
= 3.8 – 3.92
= -0.12 g
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 2
[Note: The negative sign indicates that experimental result is lower than the true value.]
Ans: i. Absolute error = -0.12 g
ii. Relative error = -3.06%

Question 36.
12.15 g of magnesium gives 20.20 g of magnesium oxide on burning. The actual mass of magnesium oxide that should be produced is 20.15 g. Calculate absolute error and relative error.
Solution:
The observed value is 20.20 g and accepted (true) value is 20.15 g.
i. Absolute error = Observed value – True value
= 20.20 – 20.15
= 0.05 g
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 3
Ans: i. Absolute error = 0.05 g
ii. Relative error = 0.25 %

Question 37.
The three identical samples of potassium chlorate are decomposed. The mass of oxygen is determined to be 3.87 g, 3.95 g and 3.89 g for the set. Calculate absolute deviation and relative deviation.
Solution:
Mean = \(\frac{3.87+3.95+3.89}{3}\) = 3.90

Sample Mass of oxygen

Absolute deviation =
| Observed value – Mean |

1 3.87 g 0.03 g
2 3.95 g 0.05 g
3 3.89 g 0.01 g

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 4
Ans: i. Absolute deviation in each observation = 0.03 g, 0.05 g, 0.01 g
Relative deviation = 0.8%

Question 38.
In repeated measurements in volumetric analysis, the end-points were observed as 11.15 mL, 11.17 mL, 11.11 mL and 11.17 mL. Calculate mean absolute deviation and relative deviation.
Solution:
Mean = \(\frac{11.15+11.17+11.11+11.17}{4}\) = 11.15

Measurement End-point

Absolute deviation =
|Observed value – Mean|

1 11.15 mL 0
2 11.17 mL 0.02 mL
3 11.11 mL 0.04 mL
4 11.17 mL 0.02 mL

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 5
Ans: i. Mean absolute deviation = ±0.02 mL
ii. Relative deviation = 0.2%

Question 39.
Calculate the mass percentages of H, P and O in phosphoric acid if atomic masses are H = 1, P = 31 and O = 16.
Solution:
Atomic mass of H = 1, P = 31 and 0=16
The mass percentage of hydrogen, phosphorus, oxygen in H3PO4
Formula:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 6
Calculation: Molecular formula of phosphoric acid: H3PO4
∴ Molar mass of H3PO4 = 3 × (1) + 1 × (31) + 4 × (16)
= 3 + 31 + 64
= 98 g mol-1
Percentage of H = \(\frac {3}{98}\) × 100 = 3.06%
Percentage of P = \(\frac {31}{98}\) × 100 = 31.63%
Percentage of O = \(\frac {64}{98}\) × 100 = 65.31%
Ans: Mass percentage of H, P and O in phosphoric acid are 3.06%, 31.63% and 65.31% respectively.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry

Question 40.
Calculate the percentage composition of the elements in HNO3 (H = 1, N = 14, O = 16).
Solution:
Atomic mass of H = 1, N = 14 and O = 16
The mass percentage of H, N and O in HNO3
Formula:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 7
Calculation: Molecular formula of HNO3
∴ Molar mass = 1 × (1) + 1 × (14) + 3 × (16) = 1 + 14 + 48 = 63 g mol-1
∴ Percentage of H = \(\frac {1}{63}\) × 100 = 1.59%
Percentage of N = \(\frac {14}{63}\) × 100 = 22.22%
Percentage of O = \(\frac {48}{63}\) × 100 = 76.19%
Ans: Mass percentage of H, N and O in HNO3 are 1.59%, 22.22% and 76.19% respectively.

Question 41.
A compound contains 4.07% hydrogen, 24.27% carbon and 71.65% chlorine by mass. Its molar mass is 98.96 g mol-1. What is its empirical formula and molecular formula? Atomic masses of hydrogen, carbon and chlorine are 1.008,12.000 and 35.453 u, respectively
Solution:
Given: Percentage of H, C and Cl = 4.07% , 24.27% and 71.65% by mass respectively.
To find: Empirical formula and molecular formula
Calculation: Step I:
Check whether the sum of all the percentages is 100.
4.07 + 24.27 + 71.65 = 99.99 ≈ 100
Therefore, no need to consider presence of oxygen atom in the molecule.

Step II:
Conversion of mass percent to grams. Since we are having mass percent, it is convenient to use 100 g of the compound as the starting material. Thus, in the 100 g sample of the above compound, 4.07 g hydrogen 24.27 g carbon and 71.65 g chlorine are present.

Step III:
Convert into number of moles of each element. Divide the masses obtained above by respective atomic masses of various elements.
Moles of hydrogen = \(\frac{4.07 \mathrm{~g}}{1.008 \mathrm{~g}}\) = 4.04 mol
Moles of carbon = \(\frac{24.27 \mathrm{~g}}{12.000 \mathrm{~g}}\) = 2.0225 mol
Moles of chlorine = \(\frac{71.65 \mathrm{~g}}{35.453 \mathrm{~g}}\) = 2.021 mol

Steps IV:
Divide the mole values obtained above by the smallest value among them.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 8
Hence, the ratio of number of moles of 2 : 1 : 1 for H : C : Cl.
In case the ratios are not whole numbers, then they may be converted into whole number by multiplying by the suitable coefficient.

Step V:
Write empirical formula by mentioning the numbers after writing the symbols of respective elements. CH2Cl is thus, the empirical formula of the above compound.

Step VI:
Writing molecular formula
a. Determine empirical formula mass: Add the atomic masses of various atoms present in the empirical formula.
For CH2Cl, empirical formula mass = 12.000 + 2 × 1.008 + 35.453 = 49.469 g mol-1
b. Divide molar mass by empirical formula mass
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 9
c. Multiply empirical formula by r obtained above to get the molecular formula:
Molecular formula = r × empirical formula
∴ Molecular formula is 2 × CH2Cl i.e. C2H4Cl2.
Ans: The empirical formula of the compound is CH2Cl and the molecular formula of the compound is C2H4Cl2.
[Note: The question is modified to include the determination of molecular formula of the compound.]

Question 42.
A compound with molar mass 159 was found to contain 39.62% copper and 20.13% sulphur. Suggest molecular formula for the compound (Atomic masses: Cu = 63, S = 32 and O = 16).
Solution:
Given: Atomic mass of Cu = 63, S = 32, and O = 16
Percentage of copper and sulphur = 39.62% and 20.13% respectively.
To find: The molecular formula of the compound
Calculation: % copper + % sulphur = 39.62 + 20.13 = 59.75
This is less than 100 %. Hence, compound contains adequate oxygen so that the total percentage of elements is 100%.
Hence, % of oxygen = 100 – 59.75 = 40.25%
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 10
Hence, empirical formula is CuSO4.
Empirical formula mass = 63 + 32 +16 × 4 = 159 g mol-1
Hence,
Molar mass = Empirical formula mass
∴ Molecular formula = Empirical formula = CuSO4
Ans: Molecular formula of the compound = CuSO4

Question 43.
An inorganic compound contained 24.75% potassium and 34.75% manganese and some other common elements. Give the empirical formula of the compound. (K = 39 u, Mn = 54.9 u, O = 16 u)
Solution:
Given: Atomic mass of K = 39 u, Mn = 59 u, and O = 16 u.
Percentage of potassium and manganese = 24.75 % and 34.75% respectively
To find: The empirical formula of the given inorganic compound
Calculation: Percentage of potassium = 24.75%
Percentage of manganese = 34.75%
Total percentage = 59.50%
∴ Remaining must be that of oxygen
∴ Percentage of oxygen = 100 – 59.50 = 40.50%
Moles of K = \(\frac{\% \text { of } \mathrm{K}}{\text { Atomic mass of } \mathrm{K}}=\frac{24.75}{39}\) = 0.635 mol
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 11
Empirical formula = KMnO4
Ans: The empirical formula of given inorganic compound is KMnO4.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry

Question 44.
An organic compound contains 40.92% carbon by mass, 4.58% hydrogen and 54.50% oxygen. Determine the empirical formula of the compound.
Solution:
Given: Percentage mass of carbon = 40.92%; Percentage mass of hydrogen = 4.58%
Percentage mass of oxygen = 54.50%
To find: The empirical formula of compound
Calculation:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 12
∴ Ratio = 1 : 1.34 : 1
Multiply by 3 to get whole number
∴ Ratio = 3 : 4.02 : 3 ≈ 3 : 4 : 3
∴ The empirical formula of the compound is C3H4O3.
Ans: Empirical formula of the compound is C3H4O3.

Question 45.
Define stoichiometric calculations.
Answer:
Calculations based on a balanced chemical equation are known as stoichiometric calculations.

Question 46.
Give reason: Balanced chemical equation is useful in solving problems based on chemical equations.
Answer:
Balanced chemical equation is symbolic representation of a chemical reaction. It provides the following information, which is useful in solving problems based on chemical equations:

  • It indicates the number of moles of the reactants involved in a chemical reaction and the number of moles of the products formed.
  • It indicates the relative masses of the reactants and products linked with a chemical change, and
  • It indicates the relationship between the volume/s of the gaseous reactants and products, at STP.

Hence, balanced chemical equation is useful in solving problems based on chemical equations.

Question 47.
What are different types of stoichiometric problems? Write steps involved in solving stoichiometric problems.
Answer:
i. Generally, problems based on stoichiometry are of the following types:

  • Problems based on mass-mass relationship
  • Problems based on mass-volume relationship
  • Problems based on volume-volume relationship.

ii. Steps involved in problems based on stoichiometric calculations:

  • Write down the balanced chemical equation representing the chemical reaction.
  • Write the number of moles and the relative masses or volumes of the reactants and products below the respective formulae.
  • Relative masses or volumes should be calculated from the respective formula mass referring to the condition of STP.
  • Apply the unitary method to calculate the unknown factors) as required by the problem.

Question 48.
Calculate the mass of carbon dioxide and water formed on complete combustion of 24 g of methane gas. (Atomic masses, C = 12 u, H = 1 u, O = 16 u)
Solution:
Mass of methane consumed in reaction = 24 g
Atomic mass: C = 12 u, H = 1 u, O = 16 u
To find: Mass of carbon dioxide and water formed
Calculation: The balanced chemical equation is,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 13
Hence, 16 g of CH4 on complete combustion will produce 44 g of CO2.
∴ 24 g of CH4 = \(\frac {24}{16}\) × 44 = 66 g of CO2
Similarly, 16 g of CH4 will produce 36 g of water.
∴ 24 g of CH4 = \(\frac {24}{16}\) × 36 = 54 g of water
Ans: Mass of carbon dioxide and water formed respectively are 66 g and 54 g.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry

Question 49.
How much CaO will be produced by decomposition of 5 g CaCO3?
Solution:
Given: Mass of CaCO3 consumed in reaction = 5 g
To find: Mass of CaO produced
Calculation: Calcium carbonate decomposes according to the balanced equation,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 14
So, 100 g of CaCO3 produce 56 g of CaO.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 15
Ans: Mass of CaO produced = 2.8 g

Question 50.
How many litres of oxygen at STP are required to burn completely 2.2 g of propane, C3H8 ?
Solution:
Given: Mass of propane used up in reaction = 2.2 g
To find: Volume of oxygen required at STP
Calculation:
The balanced chemical equation for the combustion of propane is,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 16
(∵ 1 mol of ideal gas occupies 22.4 L of volume at STP)
Thus, 44 g of propane require 112 litres of oxygen at STP for complete combustion.
∴ 2.2 g of propane will require
\(\frac {112}{44}\) × 2.2 = 5.6 litres of O2 at STP for complete combustion.
Ans: Volume of O2 (at STP) required to bum 2.2 g propane = 5.6 litres

Question 51.
A piece of zinc weighing 0.635 g when treated with excess of dilute H2SO4 liberated 200 cm3 hydrogen at STP. Calculate the percentage purity of the zinc sample.
Solution:
Given: Mass of zinc = 0.635 g, volume of H2 liberated = 200 cm3
To find: % purity of zinc sample
Calculation: The relevant balanced chemical equation is,
Zn + H2SO4 → ZnSO4 + H2
It indicates that 22.4 L of hydrogen at STP = 65 g of Zn.
(where, atomic mass of Zn = 65 u)
∴ 0.200 L of hydrogen at STP
= \(\frac{65 \mathrm{~g}}{22.4 \mathrm{~L}}\) × 200 L
= 0.5803 g of Zn
∴ Percentage purity of Zn = \(\frac{0.5803}{0.635}\) × 100
= 91.37 % (by using log tables)
Ans: Percentage purity of Zn sample = 91.37%

[Calculation using log table:
\(\frac{65 \times 0.200}{22.4}\)
= Antilog10 [log10 (65) + log10 (0.200) – log10 (22.4)]
= Antilog10 [1.8129 + \(\overline{1} .3010\) – 1.3502]
= Antilog10 [latex]\overline{1} .7637[/latex] = 0.5803
\(\frac{0.5803}{0.635} \times 100=\frac{58.03}{0.635}\)
= Antilog10 [log10 (58.03) – log10 (0.635)]
= Antilog10 [1.7636 – \(\overline{1} .8028\)]
= Antilog10 [1.9608] = 91.37]

Question 52.
Explain with the help of a chemical reaction how limiting reagent works.
Answer:

  • Consider the formation of nitrogen dioxide (NO2) from nitric oxide (NO) and oxygen.
    2NO(g) + O2(g) → 2NO2(g)
  • Suppose initially, we take 8 moles of NO and 7 moles of O2.
  • To determine the limiting reagent, calculate the number of moles NO2 produced from the given initial quantities of NO and O2. The limiting reagent will yield the smaller amount of the product.
  • Starting with 8 moles of NO, the number of NO2 produced is,
    8 mol NO × \(\frac{2 \mathrm{~mol} \mathrm{NO}_{2}}{2 \mathrm{~mol} \mathrm{NO}}\) = 8 mol NO2
  • Starting with 7 moles of O2, the number of moles NO2 produced is,
    7 mol O2 × \(\frac{2 \mathrm{~mol} \mathrm{NO}_{2}}{1 \mathrm{~mol} \mathrm{NO}}\) = 14 mol NO2
  • Since, 8 moles NO result in a smaller amount of NO2, NO is the limiting reagent, and O2 is the excess reagent, before reaction has started.

Question 53.
Urea [(NH2)2CO] is prepared by reacting ammonia with carbon dioxide.
2NH3(g) + CO2(g) → (NH2)2CO(aq) + H2O(l)
In one process, 637.2 g of NH3 are treated with 1142 g of CO2.
i. Which of the two reactants is the limiting reagent?
ii. Calculate the mass of (NH2)2CO formed.
iii. How much excess reagent (in grams) is left at the end of the reaction?
Solution:
i. If 637.2 g of NH3 react completely, calculate the number of moles of (NH2)2CO, that could be produced, by the following relation.
Mass of NH3 → Moles of NH3 → Moles of (NH2)2CO
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 17
If 1142 g of CO2 react completely, calculate the number of moles of (NH2)2CO, that could be produced, by the following relation.
Mass of CO2 → Moles of CO2 → Moles of (NH2)2CO
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 18
Since NH3 produces smaller amount of (NH2)2CO, the limiting reagent is NH3.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 19
iii. Starting with 18.71 moles of (NH2)2CO, we can determine the mass of CO2 that reacted using the mole ratio from the balanced equation and the molar mass of CO2 by the following relation.
Moles of (NH2)2CO → Moles of CO2 → Grams of CO2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 20
The amount of CO2 remaining = 1142 g – 823.4 g = 318.6 g ≈ 319 g CO2 remaining
Ans: i. Limiting reagent = NH3
ii. Mass of (NH2)2CO produced = 1124 g
iii. Mass of CO2 remaining = 319 g

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry

Question 54.
6 g of H2 reacts with 32 g of O2 to yield water. Which is the limiting reactant? Find the mass of water produced and the amount of excess reagent left.
Solution:
i. The reaction is: 2H2(g) + O2(g) → 2H2O(l)
If 6 g of H2 react completely, calculate the number of moles of H2O, that could be produced, by the following relation.
Mass of H2 → Moles of H2 → Moles of H2O
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 21
If 32 g of O2 react completely, calculate the number of moles of H2O, that could be produced, by the following relation.
Mass of O2 → Moles of O2 → Moles of H2O
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 22
Since O2 produces smaller amount of H2O, the limiting reagent is O2.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 23
iii. Starting with 2 moles of H2O, we can determine the mass of H2 that reacted using the mole ratio from the balanced equation and the molar mass of H2 by the following relation.
Moles of H2O → Moles of H2 → Grams of H2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 24
The amount of H2 remaining = 6g – 4g = 2g H2 remaining
Ans: i. Limiting reagent = O2
ii. Mass of H2O produced = 36 g
iii. Mass of H2 remaining = 2 g

Question 55.
Name different ways to express the concentration of a solution (or the amount of substance in a given volume of solution).
Answer:

  • Mass percent or weight percent (w/w %)
  • Mole fraction
  • Molarity (M)
  • Molality (m)

Question 56.
State the formula to obtain mass percent.
Answer:
Mass percent (w/w %) = \(\frac{\text { Mass of Solute }}{\text { Massof solution }} \times 100\)

Question 57.
Why is molality NOT affected by temperature?
Answer:

  • Molality is the number of moles of solute present in 1 kg of solvent. Therefore, molality is mass dependent.
  • Mass remains unaffected with temperature.

Hence, molality is not affected by temperature.

Question 58.
State TRUE or FALSE. Correct the statement if false.
i. A majority of reactions in the laboratory are carried out in in gaseous forms.
ii. Molarity is the most widely used to express the concentration of solution.
iii. Molality of a solution changes with temperature.
Answer:
i. False
A majority of reactions in the laboratory are carried out in solution forms.
ii. Tme
iii. False
Molality of a solution does not change with temperature.

Question 59.
A solution is prepared by adding 2 g of a substance A to 18 g of water. Calculate the mass percent of the solute.
Solution:
Given: Mass of substance = 2 g, mass of water = 18 g
To find: Mass % of solute
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 25
Ans: Mass percent of A = 10 % w/w

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry

Question 60.
Calculate the molarity of NaOH in the solution prepared by dissolving its 4 g in enough water to form 250 mL of the solution.
Solution:
Given: Mass of solute (NaOH) = 4 g, volume of solution = 250 mL = 0.250 L
To find: Molarity of the solution
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 26
Ans: Molarity of the NaOH solution = 0.4 M

Question 61.
The density of 3 M solution of NaCl is 1.25 g mL-1. Calculate molality of the solution.
Solution:
Given: Molarity of the solution = 3 M, density of the solution = 1.25 g mL-1
To find: Molality of the solution
Formula:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 27
Calculation: Molarity = 3 mol L-1
∴ Mass of NaCl in 1 L solution = 3 × 58.5 = 175.5 g
Mass of 1 L solution = 1000 × 1.25 = 1250 g (∵ Density = 1.25 g mL-1)
Mass of water in solution = 1250 – 175.5 = 1074.5 g = 1.0745 kg
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 28
Ans: Molality of the NaCl solution = 2.790 m

[Calculation using log table:
\(\frac{3}{1.0745}\)
= Antilog10 [log10 (3) – log10 (1.0745)]
= Antilog10 [0.4771 – 0.0315]
= Antilog10 [0.4456] = 2.790]

Question 62.
Calculate the molarity of 1.8 g HNO3 dissolved in 250 mL aqueous solution.
Solution:
Mass of HNO3 = 1.8 g,
volume of solution = 250 mL = 0.250 L
To find: Molarity
Formulae:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 29
Calculation: Molar mass of HNO3 = 63 g mol-1
Using formula (i),
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 30
Ans: Molarity of the HNO3 solution = 0.114 M

Question 63.
What volume in mL of a 0.1 M H2SO4 solution will contain 0.5 moles of H2SO4?
Solution:
Given: Molarity of H2SO4 solution = 0.1 M
Moles of H2SO4 = 0.5 mol
To find: Volume of H2SO4 solution
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 31
= 5 L
= 5000 L
Ans: Volume of a 0.1 M H2SO4 solution = 5000 mL

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry

Question 64.
A mixture has 18 g water and 414 g ethanol. What are the mole fractions of water and ethanol?
Solution:
Given: Mass of water = 18 g, mass of ethanol = 414 g
To find: Mole fractions of water and ethanol
Formulae:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 32
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 33
Ans: Mole fraction of water = 0.1
Mole fraction of ethanol = 0.9

Question 65.
Explain in brief: Use of graphs in analytical chemistry.
Answer:
i. Analytical chemistry often involves deducing some relation between two or more properties of matter under study.
ii. For example, the relation between temperature and volume of a given amount of gas.
iii. A set of experimentally measured values of volume and temperature of a definite mass of a gas upon plotting on a graph paper appears as in the figure below:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 34
iv. When the points are directly connected, a zig zag pattern results as shown below:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 35
From the above pattern, no meaningful result can be deduced.
v. A smooth curve (or average curve) passing through these points can be drawn as shown below. This straight line is consistent with the V ∝ T .
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 36
vi. While fitting the points into a smooth curve, all the plotted points should be evenly distributed. This can be verified mathematically, by drawing a perpendicular from each point to the curve. The perpendicular represents deviation of each point from the curve. Take sum of all the perpendiculars on side of the line and sum of all the perpendiculars on another side of the line separately. If the two sums are equal (or nearly equal), the curve drawn shows the experimental points in the best possible representation
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 37

Question 66.
1.5 g of an impure sample of sodium sulphate dissolved in water was treated with excess of barium chloride solution when 1.74 g of BaSO4 was obtained as dry precipitate. Calculate the percentage purity of the sample.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 38
The chemical equation representing the reaction is:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 39
To calculate the mass of Na2SO4 from which 1.74 g of BaSO4 is obtained:
233 g of BaSO4 is produced from 142 g of Na2SO4.
∴ Mass of Na2SO4 from which 1.74 g of BaSO4 would be obtained = \(\frac {142}{233}\) × 1.74 = 1.06 g
∴ The mass of pure Na2SO4 present in 1.5 g of impure sample = 1.06 g
To calculate the percentage purity of the impure sample:
1.5 g of impure sample contains 1.06 g of pure Na2SO4
∴ 100 g of the impure sample will contain = \(\frac{1.06}{1.5}\) × 100 = 70.67 g of pure Na2SO4
Ans: Percentage purity of the sample is 70.67 %.

Question 67.
Calculate the amount of lime Ca(OH)2, required to remove hardness of 50,000 L of well water which has been found to contain 1.62 g of calcium bicarbonate per 10 L .
Solution:
Calculation of total Ca(HCO3)2 present:
10 L of water contains 1.62 g of Ca(HCO3)
∴ 50,000 L of water will contain \(\frac{1.62}{10}\) × 50,000 = 8100 g of Ca(HCO3)
Calculation of lime required:
The balanced equation for the reaction:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry 40
∴ 162 g of Ca(HCO3) requires 74 g of lime.
Mass of lime required by 8100 g of Ca(HCO3) = \(\frac {74}{162}\) × 8100 g = 3700 g = 3.7 kg
Ans: The amount of lime required to remove hardness of 50,000 L of well water, with 1.62 g of calcium bicarbonate per 10 L, is 3.7 kg.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry

Multiple Choice Questions

1. The number of significant figures in 0.0110 is …………….
(A) 2
(B) 3
(C) 4
(D) 5
Answer:
(B) 3

2. For the following measurements in which the true value is 4.0 g, find the CORRECT statement.

Student Readings (g)
A 4.01 3.99
B 4.05 3.95

(A) Results of both the students are neither accurate nor precise.
(B) Results of student A are both precise and accurate.
(C) Results of student A are neither precise nor accurate.
(D) Results of student B are both precise and accurate.
Answer:
(B) Results of student A are both precise and accurate.

3. 18.238 is rounded off to four significant figures as ………….
(A) 18.20
(B) 18.23
(C) 18.2360
(D) 18.24
Answer:
(D) 18.24

4. The % of H2O in Fe(CNS)3.3H2O is ……………..
(A) 34
(B) 11
(C) 19
(D) 46
Answer:
(C) 19

5. The molecular mass of an organic compound is 78 g mol-1. Its empirical formula is CH. The molecular formula is ………….
(A) C2H4
(B) C2H2
(C) C6H6
(D) C4H4
Answer:
(C) C6H6

6. The percentage of oxygen in NaOH is ……………
(A) 40%
(B) 60%
(C) 8%
(D) 10%
Answer:
(A) 40%

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to Analytical Chemistry

7. 1.2 g of Mg (At. mass 24) will produce MgO equal to …………….
(A) 0.05 mol
(B) 0.03 mol
(C) 0.01 mol
(D) 0.02 mol
Answer:
(A) 0.05 mol

8. …………. reagent is the reactant that reacts completely but limits further progress of the reaction.
(A) Oxidizing
(B) Reducing
(C) Limiting
(D) Excess
Answer:
(C) Limiting

9. If a solution is made up of 1 mol ethanol and 9 mol water, then mole fraction of water in the solution is ……………
(A) 0.1
(B) 0.5
(C) 0.9
(D) 1.0
Answer:
(C) 0.9

10. 0.9 glucose (C6H12O6) is present in 1 L of solution. Find molarity.
(A) 5 M
(B) 50 M
(C) 0.005 M
(D) 0.5 M
Answer:
(C) 0.005 M

11. Molality of a solution is the ……………
(A) number of moles of solute present in 1 kg of solvent
(B) number of moles of solute present in 1 L of solution
(C) mass of solute present in 1 kg of solvent
(D) number of moles of solute present in 1 kg of solution
Answer:
(A) number of moles of solute present in 1 kg of solvent

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors

Question 1.
What are the factors on which the electrical conductivity of any solid depends?
Answer:
Electrical conduction in a solid depends on its temperature, the number of charge carriers, how easily these carries can move inside a solid (mobility), its crystal structure, types, and the nature of defects present in a solid.

Question 2.
Why are metals good conductors of electricity?
Answer:
Metals are good conductors of electricity due to a large number of free electrons (≈ 1028 per m³) present in them.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors

Question 3.
Give the formula for the electrical conductivity of a solid and give the significance of the terms involved.
Answer:
The electrical conductivity (σ) of a solid is given by a = nqµ,
where n = charge carrier density (number of charge carriers per unit volume)
q = charge on the carriers
µ = mobility of carriers

Question 4.
Explain in brief temperature dependence of electrical conductivity of metals and semiconductors with the help of graph.
Answer:
i. The electrical conductivity of a metal decreases with increase in its temperature.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 1

ii. When the temperature of a semiconductor is increased, its electrical conductivity also increases
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 2

Question 5.
Mention the broad classification of semiconductors along with examples.
Answer:
A broad classification of semiconductors can be:

  1. Elemental semiconductors: Silicon, germanium
  2. Compound Semiconductors: Cadmium sulphide, zinc sulphide, etc.
  3. Organic Semiconductors: Anthracene, doped pthalocyanines, polyaniline etc.

Question 6.
What are some electrical properties of semiconductors?
Answer:

  1. Electrical properties of semiconductors are different from metals and insulators due to their unique conduction mechanism.
  2. The electronic configuration of the elemental semiconductors plays a very important role in their electrical properties.
  3. They are from the fourth group of elements in the periodic table.
  4. They have a valence of four.
  5. Their atoms are bonded by covalent bonds. At absolute zero temperature, all the covalent bonds are completely satisfied in a single crystal of pure semiconductor like silicon or germanium.

Question 7.
Explain in detail the distribution of electron energy levels in an isolated atom with the help of an example.
Answer:

  1. An isolated atom has its nucleus at the centre which is surrounded by a number of revolving electrons. These electrons are arranged in different and discrete energy levels.
  2. Consider the electronic configuration of sodium (atomic number 11) i.e, 1s², 2s², 2p6, 3s1. The outermost level 3s can take one more electron but it is half filled in sodium,
  3. The energy levels in each atom are filled according to Pauli’s exclusion principle which states that no two similar spin electrons can occupy the same energy level.
  4. That means any energy level can accommodate only two electrons (one with spin up state and the other with spin down state)
  5. Thus, there can be two states per energy level.
  6. Figure given below shows the allowed energy levels of a sodium atom by horizontal lines. The curved lines represent the potential energy of an electron near the nucleus due to Coulomb interaction.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 3

Question 8.
Explain formation of energy bands in solid sodium with neat labelled energy band diagrams.
Answer:
i. For an isolated sodium atom (atomic number 11) the electronic configuration is given as 1s², 2s², 2p6, 3s1. The outermost level 3s is half filled in sodium.

ii. The energy levels are filled according to Pauli’s exclusion principle.

iii. Consider two sodium atoms close enough so that outer 3s electrons can be considered equally to be part of any atom.

iv. The 3s electrons from both the sodium atoms need to be accommodated in the same level.

v. This is made possible by splitting the 3 s level into two sub-levels so that the Pauli’s exclusion principle is not violated. Figure given below shows the splitting of the 3 s level into two sub levels.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 4

vi. When solid sodium is formed, the atoms come close to each other such that distance between them remains of the order of 2 – 3 Å. Therefore, the electrons from different atoms interact with each other and also with the neighbouring atomic cores.

vii. The interaction between the outer most electrons is more due to overlap while the inner most electrons remain mostly unaffected. Each of these energy levels is split into a large number of sub levels, of the order of Avogadro’s number due to number of atoms in solid sodium is of the order of this number.

viii. The separation between the sublevels is so small that the energy levels appear almost continuous. This continuum of energy levels is called an energy band. The bands are called 1 s band, 2s band, 2p band and so on. Figure shows these bands in sodium metal.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 5

Question 9.
Explain concept of valence band and conduction band in solid crystal.
Answer:
A. Valence band (V.B):

  1. The topmost occupied energy level in an atom is the valence level. The energy band formed by valence energy levels of atoms in a solid is called the valence band.
  2. In metallic conductors, the valence electrons are loosely attached to the nucleus. At ordinary room temperature, some valence electrons become free. They do not leave the metal surface but can move from atom to atom randomly.
  3. Such free electrons are responsible for electric current through conductors.

B. Conduction band (C.B):

  1. The immediately next energy level that electrons from valence band can occupy is called conduction level. The band formed by conduction levels is called conduction band.
  2. It is the next permitted energy band beyond valence band.
  3. In conduction band, electrons move freely and conduct electric current through the solids.
  4. An insulator has empty conduction band.

Question 10.
Draw neat labelled diagram showing energy bands in sodium. Why broadening of higher bands is different than that of the lower energy bands?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 6
Broadening of valence and higher bands is more since interaction of these electrons is stronger than the inner most electrons.

Question 11.
State the conditions when electrons of a semiconductor can take part in conduction.
Answer:

  1. All the energy levels in a band, including the topmost band, in a semiconductor are completely occupied at absolute zero.
  2. At some finite temperature T, few electrons gain thermal energy of the order of kT, where k is the Boltzmann constant.
  3. Electrons in the bands between the valence band cannot move to higher band since these are already occupied.
  4. Only electrons from the valence band can be excited to the empty conduction band, if the thermal energy gained by these electrons is greater than the band gap.
  5. Electrons can also gain energy when an external electric field is applied to a solid. Energy gained due to electric field is smaller, hence only electrons at the topmost energy level gain such energy and participate in electrical conduction.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors

Question 12.
Define 1 eV.
Answer:
1 eV is the energy gained by an electron while it overcomes a potential difference of one volt. 1 eV= 1.6 × 10-19 J.

Question 13.
C, Si and Ge have same lattice structure. Why is C insulator while Si and Ge intrinsic semiconductors?
Answer:

  1. The 4 valence electrons of C, Si or Ge lie respectively in the second, third and fourth orbit.
  2. Energy required to take out an electron from these atoms (i.e., ionisation energy Eg) will be least for Ge, followed by Si and highest for C.
  3. Hence, number of free electrons for conduction in Ge and Si are significant but negligibly small for

Question 14.
What is intrinsic semiconductor?
Answer:
A pure semiconductor is blown as intrinsic semiconductor.

Question 15.
Explain characteristics and structure of silicon using a neat labelled diagram.
Answer:

  1. Silicon (Si) has atomic number 14 and its electronic configuration is 1s² 2s² 2p6 3s² 3p².
  2. Its valence is 4.
  3. Each atom of Si forms four covalent bonds with its neighbouring atoms. One Si atom is surrounded by four Si atoms at the comers of a regular tetrahedron as shown in the figure.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 7

Question 16.
Describe in detail formation of holes in ii. intrinsic semiconductor.
Answer:
i. In intrinsic semiconductor at absolute zero temperature, all valence electrons are tightly bound to respective atoms and the covalent bonds are complete.

ii. Electrons are not available to conduct electricity through the crystal because they cannot gain enough energy to get into higher energy levels.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 8

iii. At room temperature, however, a few covalent bonds are broken due to heat energy produced by random motion of atoms. Some of the valence electrons can be moved to the conduction band. This creates a vacancy in the valence band as shown in figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 9

iv. These vacancies of electrons in the valence band are called holes. The holes are thus absence of electrons in the valence band and they carry an effective positive charge.

Question 17.
How does electric conduction take place inside a pure silicon?
Answer:

  1. There are two different types of charge carriers in a pure semiconductor. One is the electron and the other is the hole or absence of electron.
  2. Electrical conduction takes place by transportation of both carriers or any one of the two carriers in a semiconductor.
  3. When a semiconductor is connected in a circuit, electrons, being negatively charged, move towards positive terminal of the battery.
  4. Holes have an effective positive charge, and move towards negative terminal of the battery. Thus, the current through a semiconductor is carried by two types of charge carriers moving in opposite directions.
  5. Figure given below represents the current through a pure silicon.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 10

Question 18.
Why do holes not exist in conductor?
Answer:

  1. In case of semiconductors, there is one missing electron from one of the covalent bonds.
  2. The absence of electron leaves an empty space called as hole; each hole carries an effective positive charge.
  3. In case of an conductor, number of free electrons are always available for conduction. There is no absence of electron in it. Hence holes do not exist in conductor.

Question 19.
What is the need for doping an intrinsic semiconductor?
Answer:
The electric conductivity of an intrinsic semiconductor is very low at room temperature; hence no electronic devices can be fabricated using them. Addition of a small amount of a suitable impurity to an intrinsic semiconductor increases its conductivity appreciably. Hence, intrinsic semiconductors are doped with impurities.

Question 20.
Explain what is doping.
Answer:

  1. The process of adding impurities to an intrinsic semiconductor is called doping.
  2. The impurity atoms are called dopants which may be either trivalent or pentavalent. The parent atoms are called hosts.
  3. The dopant material is so selected that it does not disturb the crystal structure of the host.
  4. The size and the electronic configuration of the dopant should be compatible with that of the host.
  5. Doping is expressed in ppm (parts per million), i.e., one impurity atom per one million atoms of the host.
  6. Doping significantly increases the concentration of charge carriers.

Question 21.
What is extrinsic semiconductors?
Answer:
The semiconductor with impurity is called a doped semiconductor or an extrinsic semiconductor.

Question 22.
Draw neat diagrams showing schematic electronic structure of:
i. A pentavalent atom [Antimony (Sb)]
ii. A trivalent atom [Boron (B)]
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 11
[Note: Electronic structure of antimony is drawn as per its electronic configuration in accordance with Modern Periodic Table.]

Question 23.
With the help of neat diagram, explain the structure of n-type semiconductor in detail.
Answer:
i. When silicon or germanium crystal is doped with a pentavalent impurity such as phosphorus, arsenic, or antimony we get n-type semiconductor.

ii. When a dopant atom of 5 valence electrons occupies the position of a Si atom in the crystal lattice, 4 electrons from the dopant form bonds with 4 neighbouring Si atoms and the fifth electron from the dopant remains very weakly bound to its parent atom
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 12

iii. To make this electron free even at room temperature, very small energy is required. It is 0.01 eV for Ge and 0.05 eV for Si.

iv. As this semiconductor has large number of electrons in conduction band and its conductivity is due to negatively charged carriers, it is called n-type semiconductor.

v. The n-type semiconductor also has a few electrons and holes produced due to the thermally broken bonds.

vi. The density of conduction electrons (ne) in a doped semiconductor is the sum total of the electrons contributed by donors and the thermally generated electrons from the host.

vii. The density of holes (nh) is only due to the thermally generated holes of the host Si atoms.

viii. Thus, the number of free electrons exceeds the number of holes (ne >> nh). Thus, in n-type semiconductor electrons are the majority carriers and holes are the minority carriers.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors

Question 24.
What are some features of n-type semiconductor?
Answer:

  1. These are materials doped with pentavalent impurity (donors) atoms.
  2. Electrical conduction in these materials is due to majority charge carriers i.e., electrons.
  3. The donor atom loses electrons and becomes positively charged ions.
  4. Number of free electrons is very large compared to the number of holes, ne >> nh. Electrons are majority charge carriers.
  5. When energy is supplied externally, negatively charged free electrons (majority charges carries) and positively charged holes (minority charges carries) are available for conduction.

Question 25.
With the help of neat diagram, explain the structure of p-type semiconductor in detail.
Answer:
i. When silicon or germanium crystal is doped with a trivalent impurity such as boron, aluminium or indium, we get a p-type semiconductor.

ii. The dopant trivalent atom has one valence electron less than that of a silicon atom. Every trivalent dopant atom shares its three electrons with three neighbouring Si atoms to form covalent bonds. But the fourth bond between silicon atom and its neighbour is not complete.

iii. The incomplete bond can be completed by another electron in the neighbourhood from Si atom.

iv. The shared electron creates a vacancy in its place. This vacancy or the absence of electron is a hole.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 13

v. Thus, a hole is available for conduction from each acceptor impurity atom.

vi. Holes are majority carriers and electrons are minority carriers in such materials. Acceptor atoms are negatively charged ions and majority carriers are holes. Therefore, extrinsic semiconductor doped with trivalent impurity is called a p-type semiconductor.

vii. For a p-type semiconductor, nh >> ne.

Question 26.
What are some features of p-type semiconductors?
Answer:

  1. These are materials doped with trivalent impurity atoms (acceptors).
  2. Electrical conduction in these materials is due to majority charge carriers i.e., holes.
  3. The acceptor atoms acquire electron and become negatively charged-ions.
  4. Number of holes is very large compared to the number of free electrons. nh >> ne. Holes are majority charge carriers.
  5. When energy is supplied externally, positively charged holes (majority charge carriers) and negatively charged free electrons (minority charge carriers) are available for conduction.

Question 27.
What are donor and acceptor impurities?
Answer:

  1. Every pentavalent dopant atom which donates one electron for conduction is called a donor impurity.
  2. Each trivalent atom which can accept an electron is called an acceptor impurity.

Question 28.
Explain the energy levels of both donor and acceptor impurities with a schematic band structure.
Answer:
i. The free electrons donated by the donor impurity atoms occupy energy levels which are in the band gap and are close to the conduction band.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 14

ii. The vacancies of electrons or the extra holes are created in the valence band due to addition of acceptor impurities. The impurity levels are created just above the valence band in the band gap.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 15

Question 29.
Distinguish between p-type and n-type semiconductor.
Answer:

p-type semiconductor n-type semiconductor
1. The impurity of some trivalent element like B, Al, In, etc. is mixed with semiconductor. The impurity of some pentavalent element like P, As, Sb, etc. is mixed
2. The impurity atom accepts one electron hence the impurities The impurity atom donates – one electron, hence the impurities added are known as donor impurities.
3. The holes are majority charge carriers and electrons are minority charge carriers. The electrons are j majority charge carriers and holes are minority charge carriers.
4. The acceptor energy level is close to the valence band and far away from conduction band. Donor energy level is close to the conduction band and far away from valence band.

Question 30.
What is the charge on a p-type and n-type semiconductor?
Answer:
n-type as well as p-type semiconductors are electrically neutral.

Question 31.
Explain the transportation of holes inside a p-type semiconductor.
Answer:
i. Consider a p-type semiconductor connected to terminals of a battery as shown.

ii. When the circuit is switched on, electrons at 1 and 2 are attracted to the positive terminal of the battery and occupy nearby holes at x and y. This creates holes at the positions 1 and 2 previously occupied by electrons.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 16

iii. Next, electrons at 3 and 4 move towards the positive terminal and create holes in their previous positions.

iv. But, the holes are captured at the negative terminal by the electrons supplied by the battery.

v. In this way, holes are transported from one place to other and density of holes is kept constant so long as the battery is working.

Question 32.
A pure Si crystal has 4 × 1028 atoms m-3. It is doped by 1 ppm concentration of antimony. Calculate the number of electrons and holes. Given n1 = 1.2 × 1016/m³.
Answer:
As, the atom is doped with 1 ppm concentration of antimony (Sb).
1 ppm = 1 parts per one million atoms. = 1/106
∴ no. of Si atoms = \(\frac {Total no. of Si atoms}{10^6}\)
= \(\frac {4×10^{28}}{10^6}\) = 4 × 1022 m-3
i.e., total no. of extra free electrons (ne)
= 4 × 1022 m-3
ni2 = ne nh
∴ nh = \(\frac {n_i^2}{n_e}\) = \(\frac {(1.2×10^{16})^2}{4×10^{22}}\)
= \(\frac {144×10^{30}{4×10^{22}}\)
= 36 × 10-8
= 3.6 × 109 m-3.

Question 33.
A pure silicon crystal at temperature of 300 K has electron and hole concentration 1.5 × 1016 m-3 each. (ne = nh). Doping bv indium increases nh to 4.5 × 1022 m-3. Calculate ne for the doped silicon crystal.
Answer:
Given: At 300 K, ni = ne = nh = 1.5 × 1016 m-3
After doping nh = 4.5 × 1022 m-3
To find: Number density of electrons (ne)
Formula: ni² = ne nnh
Calculation From formula:
ne = \(\frac {n_i^2}{n_h}\) = \(\frac {(1.5×10^{16})^2}{4×10^{22}}\)
= \(\frac {255×10^{30}{45×10^{21}}\)
= 5 × 10-9 m-3.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors

Question 34.
A Ge specimen is doped with A/. The concentration of acceptor atoms is ~1021 atoms/m³. Given that the intrinsic concentration of electron-hole pairs is ~10 19/m³, calculate the concentration of electrons in the specimen.
Answer:
Given: At room temperature,
ni = ne = nh = 1019 m-3
After doping nh = 1021 m-3
To find: Number density of electrons (nc)
Formulae: ni2 = nenh
Calculation: From formula,
ne = \(\frac {n_i^2}{n_h}\) = \(\frac {(10^{19})^2}{10^{21}}\)
= \(\frac {255×10^{30}{45×10^{21}}\)
= 1017 m-3.

Question 35.
A semiconductor has equal electron and hole concentration of 2 × 108 m-3. On doping with a certain impurity, the electron concentration increases to 4 × 1010 m-3, then calculate the new hole concentration of the semiconductor.
Answer:
Given: ni = 2 × 108 m-3, n = 4 × 1010 m-3
After doping nh = 1021 m-3
To find: Number density of holes (nh)
Formulae: ni 2= nenh
Calculation: From formula.
nh = \(\frac {n_i^2}{n_e}\) = \(\frac {(2×10^{8})^2}{4×10^{10}}\) = 106 m-3

Question 36.
What is a p-n junction?
Answer:
When n-type and p-type semiconductor materials are fused together, the junction formed is called as p-n junction.

Question 37.
Explain the process of diffusion in p-n junction.
Answer:
i. The transfer of electrons and holes across the p-n junction is called diffusion.

ii. When an n-type and a p-type semiconductor materials are fused together, initially, the number of electrons in the n-side of a junction is very large compared to the number of electrons on the p-side. The same is true for the number of holes on the p-side and on the n-side.

iii. Thus, a large difference in density of carriers exists on both sides of the p-n junction. This difference causes migration of electrons from the n-side to the p-side of the
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 17

iv. They fill up the holes in the p-type material and produce negative ions.

v. When the electrons from the n-side of a junction migrate to the p-side, they leave behind positively charged donor ions on the n- side. Effectively, holes from the p-side migrate into the n-region.

vi. As a result, in the p-type region near the junction there are negatively charged acceptor ions, and in the n-type region near the junction there are positively charged donor ions.

vii. The extent up to which the electrons and the holes can diffuse across the junction depends on the density of the donor and the acceptor ions on the n-side and the p-side respectively, of the junction.

Question 38.
Define potential barrier.
Answer:
The diffusion of carriers across the junction and resultant accumulation of positive and negative charges across the junction builds a potential difference across the junction. This potential difference is called the potential barrier.

Question 39.
Draw neat labelled diagrams for potentials barrier and depletion layer in a p-n junction.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 18

Question 40.
Explain in brief electric field across a p-n junction with a neat labelled diagram.
Answer:

  1. When p-type semiconductor is fused with n-type semiconductor, a depletion region is developed across the junction.
  2. The n-side near the boundary of a p-n junction becomes positive with respect to the p-side because it has lost electrons and the p-side has lost holes.
  3. Thus, the presence of impurity ions on both sides of the junction establishes an electric field across this region such that the n-side is at a positive voltage relative to the p-side.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 19

Question 41.
What is the need of biasing a p-n junction?
Answer:

  1. Due to potential barrier across depletion region, charge carriers require extra energy to overcome the barrier.
  2. A suitable voltage needs to be applied to the junction externally, so that these charge carriers can overcome the potential barrier and move across the junction.

Question 41.
Explain the mechanism of forward biased p-n junction.
Answer:

  1. In forward bias, a p-n junction is connected in an electric circuit such that the p-region is connected to the positive terminal and the n-region is connected to the negative terminal of an external voltage source.
  2. The external voltage effectively opposes the built-in potential of the junction. The width of potential barrier is thus reduced.
  3. Also, negative charge carriers (electrons) from the n-region are pushed towards the junction.
  4. A similar effect is experienced by positive charge carriers (holes) in the p-region and they are pushed towards the junction.
  5. Both the charge carriers thus find it easy to cross over the barrier and contribute towards the electric current.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 20

Question 42.
Explain the mechanism of reverse biased p-n junction.
Answer:
i. In reverse biased, the p-region is connected to the negative terminal and the n-region is connected to the positive terminal of the external voltage source. This external voltage effectively adds to the built-in potential of the junction. The width of potential barrier is thus increased.

ii. Also, the negative charge carriers (electrons) from the n-region are pulled away from the junction.

iii. Similar effect is experienced by the positive charge carriers (holes) in the p-region and they are pulled away from the junction.

iv. Both the charge carriers thus find it very difficult to cross over the barrier and thus do not contribute towards the electric current.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 21

Question 43.
State some important features of the depletion region.
Answer:

  1. It is formed by diffusion of electrons from n-region to the p-region. This leaves positively charged ions in the n-region.
  2. The p-region accumulates electrons (negative charges) and the n-region accumulates the holes (positive charges).
  3. The accumulation of charges on either sides of the junction results in forming a potential barrier and prevents flow of charges.
  4. There are no charges in this region.
  5. The depletion region has higher potential on the n-side and lower potential on the p-side of the junction.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors

Question 44.
What is p-n junction diode? Draw its circuit symbol.
Answer:
A p-n junction, when provided with metallic connectors on each side is called a junction diode
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 22

Question 45.
Explain asymmetrical flow of current in p-n junction diode in detail.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 23
i. The barrier potential is reduced in forward biased mode and it is increased in reverse biased mode.

ii. Carriers find it easy to cross the junction in forward bias and contribute towards current because the barrier width is reduced and they are pushed towards the junction and gain extra energy to cross the junction.

iii. The current through the diode in forward bias is large and of the order of a few milliamperes (10-3 A) for a typical diode.

iv. When connected in reverse bias, width of the potential barrier is increased and the carriers are pushed away from the junction so that very few carriers can cross the junction and contribute towards current.

v. This results in a very small current through a reverse biased diode. The current in reverse biased diode is of the order of a few microamperes (10-6 A).

vi. When the polarity of bias voltage is reversed, the width of the depletion layer changes. This results in asymmetrical current flow through a diode as shown in figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 24

Question 46.
What is knee voltage?
Answer:
In forward bias mode, the voltage for which the current in a p-n junction diode rises sharply is called knee voltage.

Question 47.
What is a forward current in case of zero biased p-n junction diode?
Answer:
When the diode terminals are shorted together, some holes (majority carriers) in the p-side have enough thermal energy to overcome the potential barrier. Such carriers cross the barrier potential and contribute to current. This current is known as the forward current.

Question 48.
Define reverse current in zero biased p-n junction diode.
Answer:
When the diode terminals are shorted together some holes generated in the n-side (minority carriers), move across the junction and contribute to current. This current is known as the reverse current.

Question 49.
Explain the I-V characteristics of a reverse biased junction diode.
Answer:
i. The positive terminal of the external voltage is connected to the cathode (n-side) and negative terminal to the anode (p-side) across the diode.

ii. In case of reverse bias the width of the depletion region increases and the p-n junction behaves like a high resistance.

iii. Practically no current flows through it with an increase in the reverse bias voltage. However, a very small leakage current does flow through the junction which is of the order of a few micro amperes, (µA).

iv. When the reverse bias voltage applied to a diode is increased to sufficiently large value, it causes the p-n junction to overheat. The overheating of the junction results in a sudden rise in the current through the junction. This is because covalent bonds break and a large number of carries are available for conduction. The diode thus no longer behaves like a diode. This effect is called the avalanche breakdown.

v. The reverse biased characteristic of a diode is shown in figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 25

Question 50.
Explain zero biased junction diode.
Answer:
i. When a diode is connected in a zero bias condition, no external potential energy is applied to the p-n junction.

li. The potential barrier that exists in a junction prevents the diffusion of any more majority carriers across it. However, some minority carriers (few free electrons in the p-region and few holes in the n-region) drift across the junction.

iii. An equilibrium is established when the majority carriers are equal in number (ne = nh) and both moving in opposite directions. The net current flowing across the junction is zero. This is a state of‘dynamic equilibrium’.

iv. The minority carriers are continuously generated due to thermal energy.

v. When the temperature of the p-n junction is raised, this state of equilibrium is changed.

vi. This results in generating more minority carriers and an increase in the leakage current. An electric current, however, cannot flow through the diode because it is not connected in any electric circuit
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 26

Question 51.
What is dynamic equilibrium?
Answer:
An equilibrium is established when the majority carriers are equal in number (ne = nh) and both moving in opposite directions. The net current flowing across the junction is zero. This is a state of‘dynamic equilibrium’.

Question 52.
Draw a neat diagram and state I-V characteristics of an ideal diode.
Answer:
An ideal diode offers zero resistance in forward biased mode and infinite resistance in reverse biased mode.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 27

Question 53.
What do you mean by static resistance of a diode?
Answer:
Static (DC) resistance:

  1. When a p-n junction diode is forward biased, it offers a definite resistance in the circuit. This resistance is called the static or DC resistance (Rg) of a diode.
  2. The DC resistance of a diode is the ratio of the DC voltage across the diode to the DC current flowing through it at a particular voltage.
  3. It is given by, Rg = \(\frac {V}{I}\)

Question 54.
Explain dynamic resistance of a diode.
Answer:

  1. The dynamic (AC) resistance of a diode, rg, at a particular applied voltage, is defined as
    rg = \(\frac {∆V}{∆I}\)
  2. The dynamic resistance of a diode depends on the operating voltage.
  3. It is the reciprocal of the slope of the characteristics at that point.

Question 55.
Draw a graph representing static and dynamic resistances of a diode.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 28

Question 56.
Refer to the figure as shown below and find the resistance between point A and B when an ideal diode is (i) forward biased and (ii) reverse biased.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 29
Answer:
We know that for an ideal diode, the resistance is zero when forward biased and infinite when reverse biased.
i. Figure (a) shows the circuit when the diode is forward biased. An ideal diode behaves as a conductor and the circuit is similar to two resistances in parallel.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 30
∴ RAB = (30 × 30)/(30 +30) = 900/60 = 15 Ω

ii. Figure (b) shows the circuit when the diode is reverse biased.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 31
It does not conduct and behaves as an open switch along path ACB. Therefore, RAB = 30 Ω. the only resistance in the circuit along the path ADB.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors

Question 57.
State advantages of semiconductor devices.
Answer:

  1. Electronic properties of semiconductors can be controlled to suit our requirement.
  2. They are smaller in size and light weight.
  3. They can operate at smaller voltages (of the order of few mV) and require less current (of the order of pA or mA), therefore, consume lesser power.
  4. Almost no heating effects occur, therefore these devices are thermally stable.
  5. Faster speed of operation due to smaller size.
  6. Fabrication of ICs is possible.

Question 58.
State disadvantages of semiconductor devices.
Answer:

  1. They are sensitive to electrostatic charges.
  2. Not very useful for controlling high power.
  3. They are sensitive to radiation.
  4. They are sensitive to fluctuations in temperature.
  5. They need controlled conditions for their manufacturing.
  6. Very few materials are semiconductors.

Question 59.
Explain applications of semiconductors.
Answer:
i. Solar cell:

  1. It converts light energy into electric energy.
  2. t is useful to produce electricity in remote areas and also for providing electricity for satellites, space probes and space stations.

ii. Photo resistor: It changes its resistance when light is incident on it.

iii. Bi-polar junction transistor:

  1. These are devices with two junctions and three terminals.
  2. A transistor can be a p-n-p or n-p-n transistor.
  3. Conduction takes place with holes and electrons.
  4. Many other types of transistors are designed and fabricated to suit specific requirements.
  5. They are used in almost all semiconductor devices.

iv. Photodiode: It conducts when illuminated with light.

v. LED (Light Emitting Diode):

  1. It emits light when current passes through it.
  2. House hold LED lamps use similar technology.
  3. They consume less power, are smaller in size and have a longer life and are cost effective.

vi. Solid State Laser: It is a special type of LED. It emits light of specific frequency. It is smaller in size and consumes less power.

vii. Integrated Circuits (ICs): A small device having hundreds of diodes and transistors performs the work of a large number of electronic circuits.

Question 60.
Explain any four application of p-n junction diode.
Answer:
1. Solar cell:

  1. It converts light energy into electric energy.
  2. It is useful to produce electricity in remote areas and also for providing electricity for satellites, space probes and space stations.

ii. Photodiode: It conducts when illuminated with light.

iii. LED (Light Emitting Diode):

  1. It emits light when current passes through it.
  2. House hold LED lamps use similar technology.
  3. They consume less power, are smaller in size and have a longer life and are cost effective.

iv. Solid State Laser: It is a special type of LED. It emits light of specific frequency. It is smaller in size and consumes less power.

Question 61.
What is thermistor?
Answer:
Thermistor is a temperature sensitive resistor. Its resistance changes with change in its temperature.

Question 62.
What are different ty pes of thermistor and what are their applications?
Answer:
There are two types of thermistor:
i. NTC (Negative Thermal Coefficient) thermistor: Resistance of a NTC thermistor decreases with increase in its temperature. Its temperature coefficient is negative. They are commonly used as temperature sensors and also in temperature control circuits.

ii. PTC (Positive Thermal Coefficient) thermistor: Resistance of a PTC thermistor increases with increase in its temperature. They are commonly used in series with a circuit. They are generally used as a reusable fuse to limit current passing through a circuit to protect against over current conditions, as resettable fuses.

Question 63.
How are thermistors fabricated?
Answer:
Thermistors are made from thermally sensitive metal oxide semiconductors. Thermistors are very sensitive to changes in temperature.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors

Question 64.
Enlist any two features of thermistor.
Answer:

  1. A small change in surrounding temperature causes a large change in their resistance.
  2. They can measure temperature variations of a small area due to their small size.

Question 65.
Write a note on:
i. Electric devices
ii. Electronic devices
Answer:
i. Electric devices:

  1. These devices convert electrical energy into some other form.
  2. Examples: Fan, refrigerator, geyser etc. Fan converts electrical energy into mechanical energy. A geyser converts it into heat energy.
  3. They use good conductors (mostly metals) for conduction of electricity.
  4. Common working range of currents for electric circuits is milliampere (mA) to ampere.
  5. Their energy consumption is also moderate to high. A typical geyser consumes about 2.0 to 2.50 kW of power.
  6. They are moderate to large in size and are costly.

ii. Electronic devices:

  1. Electronic circuits work with control or sequential changes in current through a cell.
  2. A calculator, a cell phone, a smart watch or the remote control of a TV set are some of the electronic devices.
  3. Semiconductors are used to fabricate such devices.
  4. Common working range of currents for electronic circuits it is nano-ampere to µA.
  5. They consume very low energy. They are very compact, and cost effective.

Question 66.
Can we take one slab of p-type semiconductor and physically join it to another n-type semiconductor to get p-n junction?
Answer:

  1. No. Any slab, howsoever flat, will have roughness much larger than the inter-atomic crystal spacing (~2 to 3 Å).
  2. Hence, continuous contact at the atomic level will not be possible. The junction will behave as a discontinuity for the flowing charge carriers.

Question 67.
What is Avalanche breakdown and zener breakdown?
Answer:
i. Avalanche breakdown: In high reverse bias, minority carriers acquire sufficient kinetic energy and collide with a valence electron. Due to collisions the covalent bond breaks. The valence electron enters conduction band. A breakdown occurring in such a manner is avalanche breakdown. It occurs with lightly doped p-n junctions.

ii. Zener breakdown: It occurs in specially designed and highly doped p-n junctions, viz., zener diodes. In this case, covalent bonds break directly due to application of high electric field. Avalanche breakdown voltage is higher than zener voltage.

Question 68.
Indicators on platform, digital clocks, calculators make use of seven LEDs to indicate a number. How do you think these LEDs might be arranged?
Answer:
i. The indicators on platforms, digital clocks, calculators are made using seven LEDs arranged in such a way that when provided proper signal they light up displaying desired alphabet or number.

ii. This arrangement of LEDs is called Seven Segment Display.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 32

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
The number of electrons in the valence shell of semiconductor is ……………
(A) less than 4
(B) equal to 4
(C) more than 4
(D) zero
Answer:
(B) equal to 4

Question 2.
If the temperature of semiconductor is increased, the number of electrons in the valence band will ……………….
(A) decrease
(B) remains same
(C) increase
(D) either increase or decrease
Answer:
(A) decrease

Question 3.
When N-type semiconductor is heated, the ……………..
(A) number of electrons and holes remains same.
(B) number of electrons increases while that of holes decreases.
(C) number of electrons decreases while that of holes increases.
(D) number of electrons and holes increases equally.
Answer:
(D) number of electrons and holes increases equally.

Question 4.
In conduction band of solid, there is no electron at room temperature. The solid is ……………
(A) semiconductors
(B) insulator
(C) conductor
(D) metal
Answer:
(B) insulator

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors

Question 5.
In the crystal of pure Ge or Si, each covalent bond consists of …………..
(A) 1 electron
(B) 2 electrons
(C) 3 electrons
(D) 4 electrons
Answer:
(B) 2 electrons

Question 6.
A pure semiconductor is ……………..
(A) an extrinsic semiconductor
(B) an intrinsic semiconductor
(C) p-type semiconductor
(D) n-type semiconductor
Answer:
(B) an intrinsic semiconductor

Question 7.
For an extrinsic semiconductor, the valency of the donor impurity is …………..
(A) 2
(B) 1
(C) 4
(D) 5
Answer:
(D) 5

Question 8.
In a semiconductor, acceptor impurity is
(A) antimony
(B) indium
(C) phosphorous
(D) arsenic
Answer:
(B) indium

Question 9.
What are majority carriers in a semiconductor?
(A) Holes in n-type and electrons in p-type.
(B) Holes in n-type and p-type both.
(C) Electrons in n-type and p-type both.
(D) Holes in p-type and electrons in n-type.
Answer:
(D) Holes in p-type and electrons in n-type.

Question 10.
When a hole is produced in P-type semiconductor, there is ……………….
(A) extra electron in valence band.
(B) extra electron in conduction band.
(C) missing electron in valence band.
(D) missing electron in conduction band.
Answer:
(C) missing electron in valence band.

Question 11.
The number of bonds formed in p-type and n-type semiconductors are respectively
(A) 4,5
(B) 3,4
(C) 4,3
(D) 5,4
Answer:
(B) 3,4

Question 12.
The movement of a hole is brought about by the valency being filled by a ………………..
(A) free electrons
(B) valence electrons
(C) positive ions
(D) negative ions
Answer:
(B) valence electrons

Question 13.
The drift current in a p-n junction is
(A) from the p region to n region.
(B) from the n region to p region.
(C) from n to p region if the junction is forward biased and from p to n region if the junction is reverse biased.
(D) from p to n region if the junction is forward biased and from n to p region if the junction is reverse biased.
Answer:
(B) from the n region to p region.

Question 14.
If a p-n junction diode is not connected to any circuit, then
(A) the potential is same everywhere.
(B) potential is not same and n-type side has lower potential than p-type side.
(C) there is an electric field at junction direction from p-type side to n-type side.
(D) there is an electric field at the junction directed from n-type side to p-type side.
Answer:
(D) there is an electric field at the junction directed from n-type side to p-type side.

Question 15.
In an unbiased p-n junction, holes diffuse from the p-region to n-region because
(A) free electrons in the n-region attract them.
(B) they move across the junction by the potential difference.
(C) hole concentration in p-region is more as compared to n-region.
(D) all the above.
Answer:
(C) hole concentration in p-region is more as compared to n-region.

Question 16.
The width of depletion region ……………
(A) becomes small in forward bias of diode
(B) becomes large in forward bias of diode
(C) is not affected upon by the bias
(D) becomes small in reverse bias of diode
Answer:
(A) becomes small in forward bias of diode

Question 17.
For p-n junction in reverse bias, which of the following is true?
(A) There is no current through P-N junction due to majority carriers from both regions.
(B) Width of potential barriers is small and it offers low resistance.
(C) Current is due to majority carriers.
(D) Both (B) and (C)
Answer:
(A) There is no current through P-N junction due to majority carriers from both regions.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors

Question 18.
In the circuit shown below Di and D2 are two silicon diodes. The current in the circuit is …………….
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 14 Semiconductors 33
(A) 2 A
(B) 2 mA
(C) 0.8 mA
(D) very small (approx 0)
Answer:
(D) very small (approx 0)

Question 19.
For an ideal junction diode,
(A) forward bias resistance is infinity.
(B) forward bias resistance is zero.
(C) reverse bias resistance is infinity.
(D) both (B) and (C).
Answer:
(D) both (B) and (C).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Electromagnetic Waves and Communication System

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Electromagnetic Waves and Communication System Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Electromagnetic Waves and Communication System

Question 1.
Describe Gauss’ law of electrostatics in brief.
Answer:
i. Gauss’ law of electrostatics states that electric flux through any closed surface S is equal to the total electric charge Qin enclosed by the surface divided by so.
\(\int \vec{E} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{dS}}=\frac{\mathrm{Q}_{\text {in }}}{\varepsilon_{0}}\)
where, \(\vec{E}\) is the electric field and e0 is the permittivity of vacuum. The integral is over a closed surface S.

ii. Gauss’ law describes the relationship between an electric charge and the electric field it produces.

Question 2.
Describe Gauss’ law of magnetism in brief.
Answer:
i. Gauss’ law for magnetism states that magnetic monopoles which are thought to be magnetic charges equivalent to the electric charges, do not exist. Magnetic poles always occur in pairs.

ii. This means, magnetic flux through a closed surface is always zero, i.e., the magnetic field lines are continuous closed curves, having neither beginning nor end.
\(\int \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{dS}}\) = 0
where, B is the magnetic field. The integral is over a closed surface S.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Electromagnetic Waves and Communication System

Question 3.
Describe Faraday’s law along with Lenz’s law.
Answer:
i. Faraday’s law states that, time varying magnetic field induces an electromotive force (emf) and an electric field.

ii. Whereas, Lenz’s law states that, the direction of the induced emf is such that the change is opposed.

iii. According to Faraday’s law with Lenz’s law,
\(\int \overrightarrow{\mathrm{E}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{d} l}=-\frac{\mathrm{d} \phi_{\mathrm{m}}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
where, øm is the magnetic flux and the integral is over a closed loop.

Question 4.
What does Ampere’s law describe?
Answer:
Ampere’s law describes the relation between the induced magnetic field associated with a loop and the current flowing through the loop.

Question 5.
Describe Ampere-Maxwell law in brief.
Answer:
According to Ampere-Maxwell law, magnetic field is generated by moving charges and also by varying electric fields.
\(\int \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{d} l}=\mu_{0} \mathrm{I}+\varepsilon_{0} \mu_{0} \frac{\mathrm{d} \phi_{\mathrm{E}}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
where, p0 and e0 are the permeability and permittivity of vacuum respectively and the integral is over a closed loop, I is the current flowing through the loop, E is the electric flux linked with the circuit.

Question 6.
What are Maxwell’s equations for charges and currents in vacuum?
Answer:
\(\int \vec{E} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{dS}}=\frac{\mathrm{Q}_{\text {in }}}{\varepsilon_{0}}\)
\(\int \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{dS}}\) = 0
\(\int \overrightarrow{\mathrm{E}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{d} l}=-\frac{\mathrm{d} \phi_{\mathrm{m}}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
\(\int \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{d} l}=\mu_{0} \mathrm{I}+\varepsilon_{0} \mu_{0} \frac{\mathrm{d} \phi_{\mathrm{E}}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)

Question 7.
Explain the origin of displacement current?
Answer:

  1. Maxwell pointed a major flaw in the Ampere’s law for time dependant fields.
  2. He noticed that the magnetic field can be generated not only by electric current but also by changing electric field.
  3. Therefore, he added one more term to the equation describing Ampere’s law. This term is called the displacement current.

Question 8.
In the following table, every entry on the left column can match with any number of entries on the right side. Pick up all those and write respectively against (i), (ii), and (iii).

Name of the Physicist Work
i. H. Hertz a. Existence of EM waves
ii. J. Maxwell b. Properties of EM waves
iii. G. Marconi c. Wireless communication
d. Displacement current

Answer:
(i – a, b), (ii – d), (iii – c)

Question 9.
Varying electric and magnetic fields regenerate each other. Explain.
Answer:

  1. According to Maxwell’s theory, accelerated charges radiate EM waves.
  2. Consider a charge oscillating with some frequency. This produces an oscillating electric field in space, which produces an oscillating magnetic field which in turn is a source of oscillating electric field.
  3. Thus, varying electric and magnetic fields regenerate each other.

Question 10.
Draw a neat diagram representing electromagnetic wave propagating along Z-axis.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Electromagnetic Waves and Communication System 1

Question 11.
How can energy be transported in the form of EM waves?
Answer:

  1. Maxwell proposed that an oscillating electric charge radiates energy in the form of EM wave.
  2. EM waves are periodic changes in electric and magnetic fields, which propagate through space.
  3. Thus, energy can be transported in the form of EM waves.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Electromagnetic Waves and Communication System

Question 12.
State the main characteristics of EM waves.
Answer:
i. The electric and magnetic fields, \(\vec{E}\) and \(\vec{B}\) are always perpendicular to each other and also to the direction of propagation of the EM wave. Thus, the EM waves are transverse waves.

ii. The cross product (\(\vec{E}\) × \(\vec{B}\)) gives the direction in which the EM wave travels. (\(\vec{E}\) × \(\vec{B}\)) also gives the energy carried by EM wave.

iii. The \(\vec{E}\) and \(\vec{B}\) fields vary sinusoidally and are in phase.

iv. EM waves are produced by accelerated electric charges.

v. EM waves can travel through free space as well as through solids, liquids and gases.

vi. In free space, EM waves travel with velocity c, equal to that of light in free space.
c = \(\frac {1}{\sqrt{µ_0ε_0}}\) = 3 × 108 m/s,
where µ0 is permeability and ε0 is permittivity of free space.

vii. In a given material medium, the velocity (vm) of EM waves is given by vm = \(\frac {1}{\sqrt{µε}}\)
where µ is the permeability and ε is the permittivity of the given medium.

viii. The EM waves obey the principle of superposition.

ix. The ratio of the amplitudes of electric and magnetic fields is constant at any point and is equal to the velocity of the EM wave.
\( \left|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{E}}_{0}\right|=\mathrm{c}\left|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}_{0}\right| \text { or } \frac{\left|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{E}}_{0}\right|}{\left|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}_{0}}\right|}=\mathrm{c}=\frac{1}{\sqrt{\mu_{0} \varepsilon_{0}}}\)
where, |\(\vec{E_0}\)| and |\(\vec{B_0}\)| are the amplitudes of \(\vec{E}\) and \(\vec{B}\) respectively.

x. As the electric field vector (\(\vec{E_0}\)) is more prominent than the magnetic field vector (\(\vec{B_0}\)), it is responsible for optical effects due to EM waves. For this reason, electric vector is called light vector.

xi. The intensity of a wave is proportional to the square of its amplitude and is given by the equations
\(\mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{E}}=\frac{1}{2} \varepsilon_{0} \mathrm{E}_{0}^{2}, \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{B}}=\frac{1}{2} \frac{\mathrm{B}_{0}^{2}}{\mu_{0}}\)

xii. The energy of EM waves is distributed equally between the electric and magnetic fields. IE = IB.

Question 13.
Give reason: Electric vector is called light vector.
Answer:
As the electric field vector (\(\vec{E_0}\)) is more prominent than the magnetic field vector (\(\vec{B_0}\)), it is responsible for optical effects due to EM waves. For this reason, electric vector is called light vector.

Question 14.
Explain the equations describing an EM wave.
Answer:
i. In an EM wave, the magnetic field and electric field both vary sinusoidally with x.

ii. For a wave travelling along X-axis having \(\vec{E}\) along Y-axis and \(\vec{B}\) along the Z-axis,
Ey = E0 sin (kx – ωt)
Bz = B0 sin (kx – ωt)
where, E0 is the amplitude of the electric field (Ey) and B0 is the amplitude of the magnetic field (Bz).

iii. The propagation constant is given by k = \(\frac {2π}{λ}\) and λ is the wavelength of the wave. The angular frequency of oscillations is given by ω = 2πv, v being the frequency of the wave.
Hence, Ey = E0 sin (\(\frac {2πx}{λ}\) – 2πvt)
Bz = B0 sin (\(\frac {2πx}{λ}\) – 2πvt)

iv. Both the electric and magnetic fields attain their maximum or minimum values at the same time and at the same point in space, i.e., \(\vec{E}\) and \(\vec{B}\) oscillate in phase with the same frequency.

Question 15.
A radio wave of frequency of 1.0 × 107 Hz propagates with speed 3 × 108 m/s. Calculate its wavelength.
Answer:
Given: v= 1.0 × 107 Hz, c = 3 × 108 m/s
To find: Wavelength (λ)
Formula: vλ
Calculation: From formula,
λ = \(\frac {c}{v}\) = \(\frac {3×10^8}{1.0×10^7}\) = 30 m

Question 16.
A radio can tune in to any station in the 7.5 MHz to 12 MHz band. What is the corresponding wavelength band?
Answer:
Given: V1 = 7.5 MHz = 7.5 × 106 Hz,
V1 = 12 MHz = 12 × 106 Hz.
To find: Wavelength band
Formula: λ = \(\frac {c}{v}\)
Calculation: From formula,
V1 = \(\frac {3×10^8}{7.5×10^6}\) = 40 m
V1 = \(\frac {3×10^8}{12×10^6}\) = 25 m
∴ Wavelength band = 40 m to 25 m

Question 17.
Calculate the ratio of the intensities of the two waves, if amplitude of first beam of light is 1.5 times the amplitude of second beam of light.
Answer:
a1 = 1.5 a2
To find: \(\frac {I_1}{I-2}\)
Formula: I ∝ a²
Calculation: From formula,
\(\frac{I_{1}}{I_{2}}=\left(\frac{a_{1}}{a_{2}}\right)^{2}=\left(\frac{1.5 a_{2}}{a_{2}}\right)^{2}\) = (1.5)² = 2.25

Question 18.
A beam of red light has an amplitude 2.5 times the amplitude of second beam of the same colour. Calculate the ratio of the intensities of the two waves.
Answer:
a1 = 2.5 a2
To find: \(\frac {I_1}{I-2}\)
Formula: I ∝ a²
Calculation: From formula,
\(\frac{I_{1}}{I_{2}}=\left(\frac{a_{1}}{a_{2}}\right)^{2}=\left(\frac{2.5 a_{2}}{a_{2}}\right)^{2}\) = (2.5)² = 6.25

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Electromagnetic Waves and Communication System

Question 19.
Calculate the velocity of EM waves in vacuum.
Answer:
Given: ε0 = 8.85 × 10-12 C²/Nm²
µ0 = 4π × 10-7 Tm/A
To find: Velocity of EM waves (c)
Formula: c = \(\frac {1}{\sqrt{µ_0ε_0}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Electromagnetic Waves and Communication System 2
………… (Taking square roots using log table)
= 0.2998 × 109 ≈ 3 × 108 m/s

Question 20.
In free space, an EM wave of frequency 28 MHz travels along the X-direction. The amplitude of the electric field is E = 9.6 V/m and its direction is along the Y-axis. What is amplitude and direction of magnetic field B?
Answer:
Given: v = 28 MHz, E = 9.6 V/m,
c = 3 × 108 m/s
To find:
i. Amplitude of magnetic field (B)
ii. Direction of B
Formula:
|B| = \(\frac {|E|}{c}\)
Calculation: From formula,
|B| = \(\frac {9.6}{3×10^8}\) = 3.2 × 10-8 T
Since that E is along Y-direction and the wave propagates along X-axis. The magnetic induction, B should be in a direction perpendicular to both X and Y axes, i.e., along the Z-direction.

Question 21.
An EM wave of frequency 50 MHz travels in vacuum along the positive X-axis and \(\vec{E}\) at a particular point, x and at a particular instant of time t is 9.6 j V/m. Find the magnitude and direction of \(\vec{B}\) at this point x and at instant of time t.
Answer:
Given: \(\vec{E}\) = 9.6 j V/m
i. e., Electric field E is directed along +Y axis Magnitude of \(\vec{B}\).
|B| = \(\frac {|E|}{c}\) = \(\frac {9.6}{3×10^8}\) = 3.2 × 10-8 T
As the wave propagates along +X axis and E is along +Y axis, direction of B will be along +Z-axis i.e. B = 3.2 × 10-8 \(\hat{k}\)T.

Question 22.
A plane electromagnetic wave travels in vacuum along Z-direction. What can you say about the directions of its electric and magnetic field vectors? If the frequency of the wave is 30 MHz, what is its wavelength?
Answer:
Since the electromagnetic waves are transverse in nature, the electric and magnetic field vectors are mutually perpendicular to each other as well as perpendicular to the direction of propagation of wave.
As the wave is travelling along Z-direction,

\(\vec{E}\) and \(\vec{B}\) are in XY plane.
For v = 30 MHz = 30 × 106 Hz
Wavelength, λ = \(\frac {c}{v}\) = \(\frac {3×10^8}{30×10^6}\) = 10 m

Question 23.
For an EM wave propagating along X direction, the magnetic field oscillates along the Z-direction at a frequency of 3 × 1010 Hz and has amplitude of 10-9 T.
i. What is the wavelength of the wave?
ii. Write the expression representing the corresponding electric field.
Answer:
Given: v = 3 × 1010 Hz, B = 10-9 T
i. For wavelength of the wave:
λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{c}}{\mathrm{v}}=\frac{3 \times 10^{8}}{3 \times 10^{10}}\) = 10-2 m

ii. Since B acts along Z-axis, E acts along Y-axis. Expression representing the oscillating electric field is
Ey = E0 sin (kx – ωt)
Ey = E0 sin [(\(\frac {2π}{λ}\))x – (2πv)t]
Ey = E0 sin 2π [\(\frac {x}{λ}\) – vt]
Ey = E0 sin 2π [\(\frac {x}{10^{-2}}\) – 3 × 1010 t]
Ey = E0 sin 2π [100x – 3 × 1010 t] V/m

Question 24.
The magnetic field of an EM wave travelling along X-axis is
\(\vec{B}\) = \(\hat{k}\) [4 × 10-4 sin (ωt – kx)]. Here B is in tesla, t is in second and x is in m. Calculate the peak value of electric force acting on a particle of charge 5 µC travelling with a velocity of 5 × 105 m/s along the Y-axis.
Answer:
Expression for EM wave travelling along
X-axis, \(\vec{B}\) = \(\hat{k}\) [4 × 10-4 sin (ωt – kx)]
Here, B0 = 4 × 10-4
Given: q = 5 µC = 5 × 10-6 C
v = 5 × 105 m/s along Y-axis
∴ E0 = cB0 = 3 × 108 × 4 × 10-4
= 12 × 104 N/C
Maximum electric force = qE0
= 5 × 10-6 × 12 × 104
= 0.6 N

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Electromagnetic Waves and Communication System

Question 25.
The amplitude of the magnetic field part of harmonic electromagnetic wave in vaccum is B0 = 510 nT. What is the amplitude of the electric field part of the wave?
Answer:
Given: B0 = 510 nT = 510 × 10-9 T
To find: Amplitude of electric field (E0)
Formula: E0 = B0C
Calculation: From formula,
E0 = 510 × 10-9 × 3 × 108
= 153V/m

Question 26.
Suppose that the electric field amplitude of an electromagnetic wave is E0 = 120 N/C and that its frequency is v = 50.0 MHz. (i) Determine, B0, ω, k, and λ. (ii) Find expressions for \(\vec{E}\) and \(\vec{B}\).
Solution:
For E0 = 120 N/C, v = 50 MHz = 50 × 106 Hz
i. λ = \(\frac {c}{v}\) = \(\frac {3×10^8}{50×10^6}\) = 6 m
B0 = \(\frac {E_0}{v}\) = \(\frac {120}{3×10^8}\) = 4 × 10-7 T = 400 nT
k = \(\frac {2π}{λ}\) = \(\frac {2π}{6}\) = 1.0472 rad/m
ω = 2πv = 2π × 50 × 106
= 3.14 × 108 rad/s.

ii. Assuming motion of em wave along X-axis, expression for electric field vector may lie along Y-axis,
∴ \(\vec{E}\) = E0 sin (kx – ωt)
= 120 sin (1.0472 × – 3.14 × 108 t) \(\hat{j}\) N/C
Also, magnetic field vector will lie along Z-axis, expression for magnetic field vector,
∴ \(\vec{E}\) = B0 sin (kx – ωt)
= 4 × 10-7 sin (1.0472 × – 3.14 × 108 t) \(\hat{k}\) T.

Question 27.
What is electromagnetic spectrum?
Answer:
The orderly distribution (sequential arrangement) of EM waves according to their wavelengths (or frequencies) in the form of distinct groups having different properties is called the EM spectrum.

Question 28.
State various units used for frequency of electromagnetic waves.
Answer:

  1. SI unit of frequency of electromagnetic waves is hertz (Hz).
  2. Higher frequencies are represented by kHz, MHz, GHz etc.
    [Note: 1 kHz = 10³ Hz, 1 MHz =106 Hz. 1 GHz = 109 Hz]

Question 29.
State different units used for wavelength of electromagnetic waves.
Answer:

  1. The SI unit of wavelength of electromagnetic waves is metre (m).
  2. Small wavelengths are represented by micrometre (µm), angstrom (Å), nanometre (nm) etc.
    [Note:l A = 10-10 m = 10-8 cm, 1 µm = 10-6 m, 1 nm = 10-9 m.]

Question 30.
How are radio waves produced? State their properties and uses.
Answer:
Production:

  1. Radio waves are produced by accelerated motion of charges in a conducting wire. The frequency of waves produced by the circuit depends upon the magnitudes of the inductance and the capacitance.
  2. Thus, by choosing suitable values of the inductance and the capacitance, radio waves of desired frequency can be produced.

Properties:

  1. They have very long wavelengths ranging from a few centimetres to a few hundreds of kilometres.
  2. The frequency range of AM band is 530 kHz to 1710 kHz. Frequency of the waves used for TV-transmission range from 54 MHz to 890 MHz, while those for FM radio band range from 88 MHz to 108 MHz.

Uses:

  1. Radio waves are used for wireless communication purpose.
  2. They are used for radio broadcasting and transmission of TV signals.
  3. Cellular phones use radio waves to transmit voice communication in the ultra high frequency (UHF) band.

Question 31.
How are microwaves produced? State their properties and uses.
Answer:
Production:

  1. Microwaves are produced by oscillator electric circuits containing a capacitor and an inductor.
  2. They can be produced by special vacuum tubes.

Properties:

  1. They heat certain substances on which they are incident.
  2. They can be detected by crystal detectors.

Uses:

  1. Used for the transmission of TV signals.
  2. Used for long distance telephone communication.
  3. Microwave ovens are used for cooking.
  4. Used in radar systems for the location of distant objects like ships, aeroplanes etc,
  5. They are used in the study of atomic and molecular structure.

Question 32.
How are infrared waves produced? State their properties and uses.
Answer:
Production:

  1. All hot bodies are sources of infrared rays. About 60% of the solar radiations are infrared in nature.
  2. Thermocouples, thermopile and bolometers are used to detect infrared rays.

Properties:

  1. When infrared rays are incident on any object, the object gets heated.
  2. These rays are strongly absorbed by glass.
  3. They can penetrate through thick columns of fog, mist and cloud cover.

Uses:

  1. Used in remote sensing.
  2. Used in diagnosis of superficial tumours and varicose veins.
  3. Used to cure infantile paralysis and to treat sprains, dislocations and fractures.
  4. They are used in solar water heaters and solar cookers.
  5. Special infrared photographs of the body called thermograms, can reveal diseased organs because these parts radiate less heat than the healthy organs.
  6. Infrared binoculars and thermal imaging cameras are used in military applications for night vision.
  7. Used to keep green house warm.
  8. Used in remote controls of TV, VCR, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Electromagnetic Waves and Communication System

Question 33.
Write short note on visible light.
Answer:

  1. It is the most familiar form of EM waves.
  2. These waves are detected by human eye. Therefore this wavelength range is called the visible light.
  3. The visible light is emitted due to atomic excitations.
  4. Visible light emitted or reflected from objects around us provides us information about those objects and hence about the surroundings.
  5. Different wavelengths give rise to different colours as shown in the table given below.
    Colour Wavelength
    Violet 380-450 nm
    Blue 450-495 nm
    Green 495-570 nm
    Yellow 570-590 nm
    Orange 590-620 nm
    Red 620-750 nm

Question 34.
How are ultraviolet rays produced? State their properties and uses.
Answer:
Production:

  1. Ultraviolet rays can be produced by the mercury vapour lamp, electric spark and carbon arc lamp.
  2. They can also be obtained by striking electrical discharge in hydrogen and xenon gas tubes.
  3. The Sun is the most important natural source of ultraviolet rays, most of which are absorbed by the ozone layer in the Earth’s atmosphere.

Properties:

  1. They produce fluorescence in certain materials, such as ‘phosphors’.
  2. They cause photoelectric effect.
  3. They cannot pass through glass but pass through quartz, fluorite, rock salt etc.
  4. They possess the property of synthesizing vitamin D, when skin is exposed to them.

Uses:

  1. Ultraviolet rays destroy germs and bacteria and hence they are used for sterilizing surgical instruments and for purification of water.
  2. Used in burglar alarms and security systems.
  3. Used to distinguish real and fake gems.
  4. Used in analysis of chemical compounds.
  5. Used to detect forgery.

Question 35.
How are X-rays produced? State their properties and uses.
Answer:
Production:

  1. German physicist W. C. Rontgen discovered X-rays while studying cathode rays. Hence, X-rays are also called Rontgen rays.
  2. Cathode ray is a stream of electrons emitted by the cathode in a vacuum tube.
  3. X-rays are produced when cathode rays are suddenly stopped by an obstacle.

Properties:

  1. They are high energy EM waves.
  2. They are not deflected by electric and magnetic fields.
  3. X-rays ionize the gases through which they pass.
  4. They have high penetrating power.
  5. Their over dose can kill living plant and animal tissues and hence are harmful.

Uses:

  1. Useful in the study of the structure of crystals.
  2. X-ray photographs are useful to detect bone fracture. X-rays have many other medical uses such as CT scan.
  3. X-rays are used to detect flaws or cracks in metals.
  4. These are used for detection of explosives, opium etc.

Question 36.
X-rays are used in medicine and industry. Explain.
Answer:
X-rays have many practical applications in medicine and industry. Because X-ray photons are of such high energy, they can penetrate several centimetres of solid matter and can be used to visualize the interiors of materials that are opaque to ordinary light.

Question 37.
How are Gamma rays produced? State their properties and uses.
Answer:
Production:
Gamma rays are emitted from the nuclei of some radioactive elements such as uranium, radium etc.

Properties:

  1. They are highest energy (energy range keV – GeV) EM waves.
  2. They are highly penetrating.
  3. They have a small ionising power.
  4. They kill living cells.

Uses:

  1. Used as insecticide and disinfectant for wheat and flour.
  2. Used for food preservation.
  3. Used in radiotherapy for the treatment of cancer and tumour.
  4. They are used to produce nuclear reactions.

Question 38.
Identify the name and part of electromagnetic spectrum and arrange these wavelengths in ascending order of magnitude:
Electromagnetic waves with wavelength
i. λ1 are used by a FM radio station for broad casting.
ii. λ2 are used to detect bone fracture.
iii. λ3 are absorbed by the ozone layer of atmosphere.
iv. λ4 are used to treat muscular strain.
Answer:
i. λ1 belongs to radiowaves.
ii. λ2 belongs to X-rays.
iii. λ3 belongs to ultraviolet rays.
iv. λ4 belongs to infrared radiations.
Ascending order of magnitude of wavelengths:
λ3 < λ3 < λ4 < λ1

Question 39.
Explain how different types of waves emitted by stars and galaxies are observed?
Answer:
i. Stars and galaxies emit different types of waves. Radio waves and visible light can pass through the Earth’s atmosphere and reach the ground without getting absorbed significantly. Thus, the radio telescopes and optical telescopes can be placed on the ground.

ii. All other type of waves get absorbed by the atmospheric gases and dust particles. Hence, the y-ray, X-ray, ultraviolet, infrared, and microwave telescopes are kept aboard artificial satellites and are operated remotely from the Earth.

iii. Even though the visible radiation reaches the surface of the Earth, its intensity decreases to some extent due to absorption and scattering by atmospheric gases and dust particles. Optical telescopes are therefore located at higher altitudes.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Electromagnetic Waves and Communication System

Question 40.
In communication using radiowaves, how are EM waves propagated?
Answer:
In communication using radio waves, an antenna in the transmitter radiates the EM waves, which travel through space and reach the receiving antenna at the other end.

Question 41.
Draw a schematic structure of earth’s atmosphere describing different atmospheric layers.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Electromagnetic Waves and Communication System 3

Question 42.
Draw a diagram showing different types of EM waves.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Electromagnetic Waves and Communication System 4

Question 43.
Explain ground wave propagation.
Answer:

  1. When a radio wave from a transmitting antenna propagates near surface of the Earth so as to reach the receiving antenna, the wave propagation is called ground wave or surface wave propagation.
  2. In this mode, radio waves travel close to the surface of the Earth and move along its curved surface from transmitter to receiver.
  3. The radio waves induce currents in the ground and lose their energy by absorption. Therefore, the signal cannot be transmitted over large distances.
  4. Radio waves having frequency less than 2 MHz (in the medium frequency band) are transmitted by ground wave propagation.
  5. This is suitable for local broadcasting only. For TV or FM signals (very high frequency), ground wave propagation cannot be used.

Question 44.
Explain space wave propagation.
Answer:
i. When the radio waves from the transmitting antenna reach the receiving antenna either directly along a straight line (line of sight) or after reflection from the ground or satellite or after reflection from troposphere, the wave propagation is called space wave propagation.

ii. The radio waves reflected from troposphere are called tropospheric waves.

iii. Radio waves with frequency greater than 30 MHz can pass through the ionosphere (60 km – 1000 km) after suffering a small deviation. Hence, these waves cannot be transmitted by space wave propagation except by using a satellite.

iv. Also, for TV signals which have high frequency, transmission over long distance is not possible by means of space wave propagation.

Question 45.
Explain the concept of range of the signal.
Answer:
i. The maximum distance over which a signal can reach is called its range.

ii. For larger TV coverage, the height of the transmitting antenna should be as large as possible. This is the reason why the transmitting and receiving antennas are mounted on top of high rise buildings.

iii. Range is the straight line distance from the point of transmission (the top of the antenna) to the point on Earth where the wave will hit while travelling along a straight line.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Electromagnetic Waves and Communication System 5

iv. Let the height of the transmitting antenna (AA’) situated at A be h. B represents the point on the surface of the Earth at which the space wave hits the Earth.

v. The triangle OA’B is a right angled triangle. From ∆OA’ B,
(OA’)² = A’B² + OB²
(R + h)² = d² + R²
or R² + h² + 2Rh = d² + R² As
h << R, neglecting h²
d ≈ \(\sqrt{2Rh}\)

vi. The range can be increased by mounting the receiver at a height h’ say at a point C on the surface of the Earth. The range increases to d + d’ where d’ is 2Rh’. Thus
Total range = d + d’ = \(\sqrt{2Rh}\) + \(\sqrt{2Rh’}\)

Question 46.
Explain sky wave propagation.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Electromagnetic Waves and Communication System 6

  1. When radio waves from a transmitting antenna reach the receiving antenna after reflection in the ionosphere, the wave propagation is called sky wave propagation.
  2. The sky waves include waves of frequency between 3 MHz and 30 MHz.
  3. These waves can suffer multiple reflections between the ionosphere and the Earth. Therefore, they can be transmitted over large distances.

Question 47.
What is critical frequency?
Answer:
Critical frequency is the maximum value of the frequency of radio wave which can be reflected back to the Earth from the ionosphere when the waves are directed normally to ionosphere.

Question 48.
What is skip distance (zone)?
Answer:
Skip distance is the shortest distance from a transmitter measured along the surface of the Earth at which a sky wave of fixed frequency (if greater than critical frequency) will be returned to the Earth so that no sky waves can be received within the skip distance.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Electromagnetic Waves and Communication System

Question 49.
A radar has a power of 10 kW and is operating at a frequency of 20 GHz. It is located on the top of a hill of height 500 m. Calculate the maximum distance upto which it can detect object located on the surface of the Earth.
(Radius of Earth = 6.4 × 106 m)
Answer:
Given: h = 500 m, R = 6.4 × 106 m
To find: Maximum distance or range (d)
Formula: d = \(\sqrt{2Rh}\)
Calculation: From formula,
d = \(\sqrt{2Rh}\) = \(\sqrt{2×64×10^6×500}\)
= 8 × 104
= 80 km

Question 50.
If the height of a TV transmitting antenna is 128 m, how much square area can be covered by the transmitted signal if the receiving antenna is at the ground level? (Radius of the Earth = 6400 km)
Answer:
Given: h = 128 m, R = 6400 km – 6400 × 10³ m
To find: Area covered (A)
Formulae: i. d = \(\sqrt{2Rh}\) ii. A = πd²
Calculation:
From formula (i),
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Electromagnetic Waves and Communication System 7
= 4.048 × 104
= 40.48 km
From formula (ii).
Area covered = 3.142 × (40.48)²
= antilog [log 3.142 + 2log 40.48]
= antilog [0.4972 + 2(1.6073)]
= antilog [3.7118]
= 5.150 × 10³
= 5150 km²

Question 51.
The height of a transmitting antenna is 68 m and the receiving antenna is at the top of a tower of height 34 m. Calculate the maximum distance between them for satisfactory transmission in line of sight mode. (Radius of Earth = 6400 km)
Answer:
Given: ht = 68 m, hr = 34 m,
R = 6400 km = 6.4 × 106 m
To find: Maximum distance or range (d)
Formula: d = \(\sqrt{2Rh}\)
Calculation:
From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Electromagnetic Waves and Communication System 8
= 2.086 × 104
= 20.86 km
d = dt + dr = 29.51 + 20.86 = 50.37 km

Question 52.
Explain block diagram of communication system.
Answer:
i. There are three basic (essential) elements of every communication system:

  1. Transmitter
  2. Communication channel
  3. Receiver

ii. In a communication system, the transmitter is located at one place and the receiver at another place.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Electromagnetic Waves and Communication System 9

iii. The communication channel is a passage through which signals transfer in between a transmitter and a receiver.

iv. This channel may be in the form of wires or cables, or may also be wireless, depending on the types of communication system.

Question 53.
What are the two different modes of communication?
Answer:
i. There are two basic modes of communication:
a. point to point communication
b. broadcast communication

ii. In point to point communication mode, communication takes place over a link between a single transmitter and a receiver e.g. telephony.

iii. In the broadcast mode, there are large number of receivers corresponding to the single transmitter e.g., Radio and Television transmission.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Electromagnetic Waves and Communication System

Question 54.
Explain the following terms:
i. Signal
ii. Analog signal
iii. Digital signal
iv. Transmitter
v. Transducer
vi. Receiver
vii. Attenuation
viii. Amplification
ix. Range
x. Repeater
Answer:
i. Signal: The information converted into electrical form that is suitable for transmission is called a signal. In a radio station, music and speech are converted into electrical form by a microphone for transmission into space. This electrical form of sound is the signal. A signal can be analog or digital.

ii. Analog signal: A continuously varying signal (voltage or current) is called an analog signal. Since a wave is a fundamental analog signal, sound and picture signals in TV are analog in nature.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Electromagnetic Waves and Communication System 10

iii. Digital signal: A signal (voltage or current) that can have only two discrete values is called a digital signal. For example, a square wave is a digital signal. It has two values viz, +5 V and 0 V.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Electromagnetic Waves and Communication System 11

iv. Transmitter: A transmitter converts the signal produced by a source of information into a form suitable for transmission through a channel and subsequent reception.

v. Transducer: A device that converts one form of energy into another form of energy is called a transducer. For example, a microphone converts sound energy into electrical energy. Therefore, a microphone is a transducer. Similarly, a loudspeaker is a transducer which converts electrical energy into sound energy.

vi. Receiver: The receiver receives the message signal at the channel output, reconstructs it in recognizable form of the original message for delivering it to the user of information.

vii. Attenuation: The loss of strength of the signal while propagating through the channel is known as attenuation. It occurs because the channel distorts, reflects and refracts the signals as it passes through it.

viii. Amplification: Amplification is the process of raising the strength of a signal, using an electronic circuit called amplifier.

ix. Range: The maximum (largest) distance between a source and a destination up to which the signal can be received with sufficient strength is termed as range.

x. Repeater: It is a combination of a transmitter and a receiver. The receiver receives the signal from the transmitter, amplifies it and transmits it to the next repeater. Repeaters are used to increase the range of a communication system.

Question 55.
Explain the role of modulation.
Answer:

  1. Low frequency signals cannot be transmitted over large distances. Because of this, a high frequency wave, called a carrier wave, is used.
  2. Some characteristic (e.g. amplitude, frequency or phase) of this wave is changed in accordance with the amplitude of the signal. This process is known as modulation.
  3. Modulation also helps avoid mixing up of signals from different transmitters as different carrier wave frequencies can be allotted to different transmitters.
  4. Without the use of these waves, the audio signals, if transmitted directly by different transmitters, would have got mixed up.

Question 56.
Explain the different types of modulation.
Answer:

  1. Modulation can be done by modifying the amplitude (amplitude modulation), frequency (frequency modulation), and phase (phase modulation) of the carrier wave in proportion to the intensity of the signal wave keeping the other two properties same.
  2. The carrier wave is a high frequency wave while the signal is a low frequency wave.
  3. Waveform (a) in the figure shows a carrier wave and waveform (b) shows the signal.
  4. Amplitude modulation, frequency modulation and phase modulation of carrier waves are shown in waveforms (c), (d) and (e) respectively.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Electromagnetic Waves and Communication System 12

Question 57.
State advantages and disadvantages of amplitude modulation.
Answer:
Advantages:

  1. It is simple to implement.
  2. It has large range.
  3. It is cheaper.

Disadvantages:

  1. It is not very efficient as far as power usage is concerned.
  2. It is prone to noise.
  3. The reproduced signal may not exactly match the original signal.

In spite of this, these are used for commercial broadcasting in the long, medium and short wave bands.

Question 58.
State uses and limitations of frequency modulation.
Answer:

  1. Frequency modulation (FM) is more complex as compared to amplitude modulation and, therefore is more difficult to implement.
  2. However, its main advantage is that it reproduces the original signal closely and is less susceptible to noise.
  3. This modulation is used for high quality broadcast transmission.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Electromagnetic Waves and Communication System

Question 59.
State benefits of phase modulation.
Answer:

  1. Phase modulation (PM) is easier than frequency modulation.
  2. It is used in determining the velocity of a moving target which cannot be done using frequency modulation.

Question 60.
Given below are some famous numbers associated with electromagnetic radiations in different contexts in physics. State the part of the electromagnetic spectrum to which each belongs.
i. 21 cm (wavelength emitted by atomic hydrogen in interstellar space).
ii. 1057 MHz (frequency of radiation arising from two close energy levels in hydrogen known as Lamb Shift).
iii. 5890 A – 5896 A [double lines of sodium]
Answer:
i. Radio waves (short wavelength or high frequency end)
ii. Radio waves (short wavelength or high frequency end)
iii. Visible region (yellow light)

Question 61.
Vidhya and Vijay were studying the effect of certain radiations on flower plants. Vidhya exposed her plants to UV rays and Vijay exposed his plants to infrared rays. After few days, Vidhya’s plants got damaged and Vijay’s plants had beautiful bloom. Why did this happen?
Answer:
Frequency of UV rays is greater than infrared rays, hence UV rays are much more energetic than infrared rays. Plants cannot tolerate the exposure of high energy rays. As a result, Vidhya’s plants got damaged and Vijay’s plants had a beautiful bloom.

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
Which of the following type of radiations are radiated by an oscillating electric charge?
(A) Electric
(B) Magnetic
(C) Thermoelectric
(D) Electromagnetic
Answer:
(D) Electromagnetic

Question 2.
If \(\vec{E}\) and \(\vec{B}\) are the electric and magnetic field vectors of e.m. waves, then the direction of propagation of e.m. direction of wave is along the
(A) \(\vec{E}\)
(B) \(\vec{B}\)
(C) \(\vec{E}\) × \(\vec{B}\)
(D) \(\vec{E}\) • \(\vec{B}\)
Answer:
(C) \(\vec{E}\) × \(\vec{B}\)

Question 3.
The unit of expression µ0o ε0 is
(A) m / s
(B) m² / s²
(C) s² / m²
(D) s / m
Answer:
(C) s² / m²

Question 4.
According to Maxwell’s equation the velocity of light in any medium is expressed as
(A) \(\frac {1}{\sqrt{µ_0ε_0}}\)
(B) \(\frac {22}{\sqrt{µε}}\)
(C) \(\sqrt{\frac {µ}{ε}}\)
(D) \(\sqrt{\frac {µ_0}{ε}}\)
Answer:
(B) \(\frac {22}{\sqrt{µε}}\)

Question 5.
The electromagnetic waves do not transport.
(A) energy
(B) charge
(C) momentum
(D) pressure
Answer:
(B) charge

Question 6.
In an electromagnetic wave, the direction of the magnetic induction \(\vec{B}\) is
(A) parallel to the electric field \(\vec{E}\).
(B) perpendicular to the electric field \(\vec{E}\).
(C) antiparallel to the pointing vector \(\vec{S}\).
(D) random.
Answer:
(B) perpendicular to the electric field \(\vec{E}\).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Electromagnetic Waves and Communication System

Question 7.
Which of the following electromagnetic waves have the longest wavelength?
(A) heat waves
(B) light waves
(C) radio waves
(D) microwaves.
Answer:
(C) radio waves

Question 8.
Radio waves do not penetrate in the band of
(A) ionosphere
(B) mesosphere
(C) troposphere
(D) stratosphere
Answer:
(A) ionosphere

Question 9.
Which of the following electromagnetic wave has least wavelength?
(A) Gamma rays
(B) X- rays
(C) Radio waves
(D) microwaves
Answer:
(A) Gamma rays

Question 10.
If E is an electric field and \(\vec{B}\) is the magnetic induction, then the energy flow per unit area per unit time in an electromagnetic field is given by
(A) \(\frac {1}{µ_0}\) \(\vec{E}\) × \(\vec{B}\)
(B) \(\vec{E}\).\(\vec{B}\)
(C) E² + B²
(D) \(\frac {E}{B}\)
Answer:
(A) \(\frac {1}{µ_0}\) \(\vec{E}\) × \(\vec{B}\)

Question 11.
Out of the X-rays, microwaves, ultra-violet rays, the shortest frequency wave is ……………
(A) X-rays
(B) microwaves
(C) ultra-violet rays
(D) γ-rays
Answer:
(B) microwaves

Question 12.
The part of electromagnetic spectrum used in operating radar is ……………
(A) y-rays
(B) visible rays
(C) infra-red rays
(D) microwaves
Answer:
(D) microwaves

Question 13.
The correct sequence of descending order of wavelength values of the given radiation source is …………..
(A) radio waves, microwaves, infra-red, γ- rays
(B) γ-rays, infra-red, radio waves, microwaves
(C) Infra-red, radio waves, microwaves, γ- rays
(D) microwaves, γ-rays, infra-red, radio waves
Answer:
(A) radio waves, microwaves, infra-red, γ- rays

Question 14.
The nuclei of atoms of radioactive elements produce ……………
(A) X-rays
(B) γ-rays
(C) microwaves
(D) ultra-violet rays
Answer:
(B) γ-rays

Question 15.
The electronic transition in atom produces
(A) ultra violet light
(B) visible light
(C) infra-red rays
(D) microwaves
Answer:
(B) visible light

Question 16.
When radio waves from transmitting antenna reach the receiving antenna directly or after reflection in the ionosphere, the wave propagation is called ………………
(A) ground wave propagation
(B) space wave propagation
(C) sky wave propagation
(D) satellite propagation
Answer:
(C) sky wave propagation

Question 17.
The basic components of a transmitter are ……………..
(A) message signal generator and antenna
(B) modulator and antenna
(C) signal generator and modulator
(D) message signal generator, modulator, and antenna
Answer:
(D) message signal generator, modulator, and antenna

Question 18.
The process of changing some characteristics of a carrier wave in accordance with the incoming signal is called …………..
(A) amplification
(B) modulation
(C) rectification
(D) demodulation
Answer:
(B) modulation

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Electromagnetic Waves and Communication System

Question 19.
The process of superimposing a low-frequency signal on a high-frequency wave is …………….
(A) detection
(B) mixing
(C) modulation
(D) attenuation
Answer:
(C) modulation

Question 20.
A device that converts one form of energy into another form is termed as ……………
(A) transducer
(B) transmitter
(C) amplifier
(D) receiver
Answer:
(A) transducer

Question 21.
A microphone that converts sound into an electrical signals is an example of.
(A) a thermistor
(B) a rectifier
(C) a modulator
(D) an electrical transducer
Answer:
(D) an electrical transducer

Question 22.
The process of regaining information from carries wave at the receiver is called
(A) modulation
(B) transmission
(C) propagation
(D) demodulation
Answer:
(D) demodulation

Question 23.
The range of communication can be increased by
(A) increasing the heights of transmitting and receiving antennas.
(B) decreasing the heights of transmitting and receiving antennas.
(C) increasing the height of the transmitting antenna and decreasing the height of receiving antenna.
(D) increasing height of receiving antenna only.
Answer:
(A) increasing the heights of transmitting and receiving antennas.

Question 24
The ionosphere mainly consists of
(A) positive ions and electrons
(B) water vapour and smoke
(C) ozone layer
(D) dust particles
Answer:
(A) positive ions and electrons

Question 25.
The reflected waves from the ionosphere are
(A) ground waves.
(B) sky waves.
(C) space waves.
(D) very high-frequency waves.
Answer:
(B) sky waves.

Question 26.
Communication is the process of
(A) Keep in touch.
(B) exchanging information.
(C) broadcasting.
(D) entertainment.
Answer:
(B) exchanging information.

Question 27.
The message fed to the transmitter is generally
(A) radio signals
(B) audio signals
(C) both (A) and (B)
(D) optical signals
Answer:
(B) audio signals

Question 28.
Line of sight propagation is also called……………. propagation.
(A) skywave
(B) ground wave
(C) sound wave
(D) space wave
Answer:
(D) space wave

Question 29.
The ozone layer in the atmosphere absorbs
(A) only the radio waves.
(B) only the visible light.
(C) only the γ rays.
(D) X-rays and ultraviolet rays.
Answer:
(D) X-rays and ultraviolet rays.

Question 30.
Modem communication systems consist of
(A) electronic systems
(B) electrical system
(C) optical system
(D) all of these
Answer:
(D) all of these

Question 31.
What determines the absorption of radio waves by the atmosphere?
(A) Frequency
(B) Polarisation
(C) Interference
(D) Distance of receiver
Answer:
(A) Frequency

Question 32.
The portion of the atmosphere closest to the earth’s surface is ……………
(A) troposphere
(B) stratosphere
(C) mesosphere
(D) ionosphere
Answer:
(A) troposphere

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 13 Electromagnetic Waves and Communication System

Question 33.
An antenna behaves as resonant circuit only when its length is ………………
(A) λ/2
(B) λ/4
(C) λ
(D) n λ/2
Answer:
(D) n λ/2

Question 34.
Space wave travels through …………………
(A) ionosphere
(B) mesosphere
(C) troposphere
(D) stratosphere
Answer:
(C) troposphere

Question 35.
Transmission lines start radiating
(A) at low frequencies
(B) at high frequencies.
(C) at both high and low frequencies.
(D) none of the above.
Answer:
(B) at high frequencies.

Question 36.
If ‘ht‘ and ‘hr’ are height of transmitting and receiving antennae and ‘R’ is radius of the earth, the range of space wave is
(A) \(\sqrt {2R}\) (ht + hr)
(B) 2R \(\sqrt {(ht + hr)}\)
(C) \(\sqrt {2R(ht + hr)}\)
(D) \(\sqrt {2R}\) (√ht + √hr)
Answer:
(D) \(\sqrt {2R}\) (√ht + √hr)

Question 37.
In a communication system, noise is most likely to affect the signal ………..
(A) at the transmitter
(B) in the transmission medium
(C) in the information source
(D) at the destination
Answer:
(B) in the transmission medium

Question 38.
The power radiated by linear antenna of length 7’ is proportional to (A = wavelength)
(A) \(\frac {λ}{l}\)
(B) (\(\frac {λ}{l}\))²
(C) \(\frac {l}{λ}\)
(D) (\(\frac {l}{λ}\))²
Answer:
(D) (\(\frac {l}{λ}\))²

Question 39.
For efficient radiation and reception of a signal with wavelength λ, the transmitting antennas would have length comparable to ……………….
(A) λ of frequency used
(B) λ/2 of frequency used
(C) λ/3 of frequency used
(D) λ/4 of frequency used
Answer:
(A) λ of frequency used

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Magnetism

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Magnetism Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Magnetism

Question 1.
What are some commonly known facts about magnetism?
Answer:
Some commonly known facts about magnetism:

  1. Every magnet regardless of its size and shape has two poles called the north pole and the south pole.
  2. Isolated magnetic monopoles do not exist. If a magnet is broken into two or more pieces then each piece behaves like an independent magnet with a somewhat weaker magnetic field.
  3. Like magnetic poles repel each other, whereas unlike poles attract each other.
  4. When a bar magnet/ magnetic needle is suspended freely or is pivoted, it aligns itself in the geographically north-south direction.

Question 2.
What are some properties of magnetic lines of force?
Answer:

  1. Magnetic lines of force originate from the north pole and end at the south pole.
  2. The magnetic lines of force of a magnet or a solenoid form closed loops. This is in contrast to the case of an electric dipole, where the electric lines of force originate from the positive charge and end on the negative charge.
  3. The direction of the net magnetic field \(\vec{B}\) at a point is given by the tangent to the magnetic line of force at that point.
  4. The number of lines of force crossing per unit area decides the magnitude of a magnetic field \(\vec{B}\).
  5. The magnetic lines of force do not intersect. This is because had they intersected, the direction of the magnetic field would not be unique at that point.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Magnetism

Question 3.
What is magnetic flux? What is unit of magnetic flux in SI system?
Answer:

  1. The number of lines of force per unit area is called magnetic flux (ø).
  2. SI unit of magnetic flux (ø) is weber (Wb).

Question 4.
How do we determine strength of magnetic field at a given point due to a magnet? Write down units of magnetic field in SI and CGS system and their interconversion.
Answer:
i. Density of lines of force i.e., the number of lines of force per unit area around a particular point determines the strength of the magnetic field at that point.

ii. The magnitude of magnetic field strength B at a point in a magnetic field is given by,
Magnetic Field = \(\frac {magnetic flux}{area}\)
i.e., B = \(\frac {ø}{A}\)

iii. SI unit of magnetic field (B) is expressed as weber/m² or Tesla.

iv. 1 Tesla = 10⁴ Gauss

Question 5.
What is the unit of magnetic intensity?
Answer:
SI unit: weber/m² or Tesla.

Question 6.
Explain the pole strength and magnetic dipole moment of a bar magnet.
Answer:
i. The bar magnet said to have pole strength +qm and -qm near the north and south poles respectively.

ii. As bar magnet has two poles with equal and opposite pole strength, it is called as a magnetic dipole.

iii. The two poles are separated by a distance equal to 2l.

iv. The product of pole strength and the magnetic length is called as magnetic dipole moment.
∴ \(\vec{m}\) = qm (2\(\vec{l}\))
where, 2\(\vec{l}\) is a vector from south pole to north pole.

Question 7.
State the SI units of pole strength and magnetic dipole moment.
Answer:

  1. SI unit of pole strength (qm) is Am.
  2. SI unit of magnetic dipole moment (m) is Am².

Question 8.
Draw neat labelled diagram for a bar magnet.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Magnetism 1

Question 9.
Define and explain the following terms in case of a bar magnet:
i. Axis
ii. Equator
iii. Magnetic length
Answer:
i. Axis: It is the line passing through both the poles of a bar magnet. There is only one axis for a given bar magnet.

ii. Equator:

  • A line passing through the centre of a magnet and perpendicular to its axis is called magnetic equator.
  • The plane containing all equators is called the equatorial plane.
  • The locus of points, on the equatorial plane, which are equidistant from the centre of the magnet is called the equatorial circle.
  • The popularly known ‘equator’ of the planet is actually an ‘equatorial circle’. Such a circle with any diameter is an equator.

iii. Magnetic length (2l)
It is the distance between the two poles of a magnet.
Magnetic length (2l) = \(\frac {5}{6}\) × Geometric length.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Magnetism

Question 10.
State the expression for magnetic induction at a point due to a very short bar magnet along its axis.
Answer:
For very short bar magnet, the magnetic induction at point on the axis is given as,
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}_{\mathrm{axis}}=\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \frac{2 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{m}}}{\mathrm{r}^{3}}\)

Question 11.
State the expression for the magnetic induction at any point along the equator of a very short bar magnet.
Answer:
For very short bar magnet, the magnetic induction at point on the equator is given as,
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}_{\text {equator }}=-\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \frac{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{m}}}{\mathrm{r}^{3}}\)

Question 12.
Show that the magnitude of magnetic induction at a point on the axis of a short bar magnet is twice the magnitude of magnetic induction at a point on the equator at the same distance.
Answer:
i. Magnitude of magnetic induction at a point along the axis of a short magnet is given by,
\(\mathrm{B}_{\mathrm{axis}}=\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \frac{2 \mathrm{~m}}{\mathrm{r}^{3}}\) ………….. (1)

ii. Magnitude of magnetic induction at a point on equatorial line is given by
\(\mathrm{B}_{\text {equator }}=\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{r}^{3}}\) …………… (2)

iii. Dividing equation (1) by (2), we get,
\(\frac{\mathrm{B}_{\mathrm{axis}}}{\mathrm{B}_{\mathrm{eq}}}=\frac{\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \frac{2 \mathrm{~m}}{\mathrm{r}^{3}}}{\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{r}^{3}}}\)
∴ \(\frac{B_{\text {axis }}}{B_{e q}}\) = 2
∴ Baxis = 2Beq

Question 13.
Derive an expression for the magnetic field due to a bar magnet at an arbitrary point.
Answer:
i. Consider a bar magnet of magnetic moment \(\vec{m}\) with centre at O as shown in figure and let P be any point in its magnetic field.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Magnetism 2

ii. Magnetic moment \(\vec{m}\) is resolved into components along \(\vec{r}\) and perpendicular to \(\vec{r}\).

iii. For the component m cos θ along \(\vec{r}\), the point P is an axial point.

iv. For the component m sinθ perpendicular to \(\vec{r}\), the point P is an equatorial point at the same distance \(\vec{r}\).

v. For a point on the axis, Ba = \(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \frac{2 m}{\mathrm{r}^{3}}\)
Here
Ba = \(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \frac{2 m \cos \theta}{r^{3}}\) ………….. (1)
directed along m cosθ.

vi. For point on equator,
Ba = \(\frac{\mu_{o}}{4 \pi} \frac{m \sin \theta}{r^{3}}\) …………. (2)
directed opposite to m sin θ

vii. Thus, the magnitude of the resultant magnetic field B, at point P is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Magnetism 3

viii. Let a be the angle made by the direction of \(\vec{B}\) with \(\vec{r}\). Then, by using equation (1) and equation (2),
tan α = \(\frac {B_{eq}}{B_a}\) = \(\frac {1}{2}\) (tan θ)
The angle between directions of \(\vec{B}\) and \(\vec{m}\) is then (θ + a).

Question 14.
A bar magnet of magnetic moment 5.0 Am² has the poles 20 cm apart. Calculate the pole strength.
Solution:
Given: m = 5.0 Am², 2l = 20 cm = 0.20 m
To find: Pole strength (qm)
Formula: qm = \(\frac {m}{2l}\)
Calculation:
From formula.
qm = \(\frac {5.0}{0.20}\) = 25 Am

Question 15.
A bar magnet has magnetic moment 3.6 Am² and pole strength 10.8 Am. Determine its magnetic length and geometric length.
Answer:
Given: m = 3.6 Am², qm = 10.8 Am
To find:
i. Magnetic length
ii. Geometric length
Formulae:
i. Magnetic length = \(\frac {m}{q_m}\)
ii. Geometric length = \(\frac {6}{5}\) × magnetic length.
Calculation: From formula (i),
Magnetic length = \(\frac {3.6}{10.8}\) = 0.33 m
From formula (ii),
Geometric length = \(\frac {6}{5}\) × 0.33
= 0.396 m ≈ 0.4 m

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Magnetism

Question 16.
A short magnetic dipole has magnetic moment 0.5 A m². Calculate its magnetic field at a distance of 20 cm from the centre of magnetic dipole on (i) the axis (ii) the equatorial line (Given µ0 = 4π × 10-7 SI units)
Answer:
Given: m = 0.5 Am², r = 20 cm = 20 × 10-2 m
To Find: i. Magnetic field on the axial point (Ba)
ii. Magnetic field on the equatorial point (Beq)
Formulae:
i. Ba = \(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \frac{2 m}{r^{3}}\)
ii. Ba = 2Beq
Calculation: From formula (i),
Ba = 10-7 × \(\frac{2 \times 0.5}{(0.2)^{3}}\)
= \(\frac{10^{-7}}{8 \times 10^{-3}}\)
= 0.125 × 10-4
∴ Ba = 1.25 × 10-5 Wb/m²
From formula (ii),
Beq = \(\frac {B_a}{2}\) = \(\frac {1.25×10^{-5}}{2}\)
= 0.625 × 10-5 Wb/m²

Question 17.
A short bar magnet has a magnetic moment of 0.48 JT-1. Give the direction and magnitude of the magnetic field produced by the magnet at a distance of 10 cm from the centre of the magnet on (i) the axis (ii) the equatorial lines (normal bisector) of the magnet.
Answer:
Given: m = 0.48 JT-1, r = 10 cm = 0.1 m
To find:
i. Magnetic induction along axis (Ba)
ii. Magnetic induction along equator (Beq)
Formulae:
i. Ba = \(\frac {µ_0}{4π}\) \(\frac {2m}{r^3}\)
ii. Ba = 2 Beq
Calculation: From formula (i),
Ba = 10-7 × \(\frac {2×0.48}{10^{-3}}\)
∴ Ba = 0.96 × 10-4 T along S-N direction
From formula (ii),
Beq = \(\frac {0.96×106{-4}}{2}\)
∴ Beq = 0.48 × 10-4 T along N-S direction

Question 18.
Define the following magnetic parameters.
i. Magnetic axis
ii. Magnetic equator
iii. Magnetic Meridian
Answer:
i. Magnetic axis: The Earth is considered to be a huge magnetic dipole. The straight line joining the two poles is called the magnetic axis.

ii. Magnetic equator: A great circle in the plane perpendicular to magnetic axis is magnetic equatorial circle.

iii. Magnetic Meridian: A plane perpendicular to surface of the Earth (Vertical plane) and passing through the magnetic axis is magnetic meridian. Direction of resultant magnetic field of the Earth is always along or parallel to magnetic meridian.

Question 19.
Draw neat labelled diagram representing the Earth as a magnet.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Magnetism 4

Question 20.
Define magnetic declination.
Answer:
Angle between the geographic and the magnetic meridian at a place is called magnetic declination (α).

Question 21.
Draw a neat labelled diagram showing the magnetic declination at a place.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Magnetism 5

Question 22.
Draw a neat labelled diagram for angle of dip.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Magnetism 6

Write a short note on Earth’s magnetic field. Mention the extreme values of magnetic field at magnetic poles and magnetic equator.
Ans:
i. Magnetic force experienced per unit pole strength is magnetic field \(\vec{B}\) at that place.

ii. This field can be resolved in components along the horizontal (\(\vec{B}_H\)) and along vertical (\(\vec{B}_v\)).

iii. The two components are related with the angle of dip (ø) as, BH = B cos ø, Bv = B sin ø
\(\frac {B_v}{B_H}\) = tan ø
B² = B\(_v^2\) + B\(_H^2\)
∴ B = \( \sqrt{\mathrm{B}_{\mathrm{V}}^{2}+\mathrm{B}_{\mathrm{H}}^{2}}\)

iv. At the magnetic North pole: \(\vec{B}\) = \(\vec{B}\)v, directed upward, \(\vec{B}\)H = 0 and ø = 90°.

v. At the magnetic south pole: \(\vec{B}\) = \(\vec{B}\)v, directed downward, \(\vec{B}\)H = 0 and ø = 270°.

vi. Anywhere on the magnetic equator (magnetic great circle): B = BH along South to North, \(\vec{B}\)v = 0 and ø = 0

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Magnetism

Question 23.
What are magnetic maps?
Answer:
Magnetic elements of the Earth (BH, α and ø) vary from place to place and also with time. The maps providing these values at different locations are called magnetic maps.

Question 24.
Define following terms in case of magnetic maps:
i. Isomagnetic charts
ii. Isodynamic lines
iii. Isogonic lines
iv. Aclinic lines
Answer:
i. Isomagnetic charts: Magnetic maps drawn by joining places with the same value of a particular element are called isomagnetic charts.
ii. Isodynamic lines: Lines joining the places of equal horizontal components (BH) on magnetic maps are known as isodynamic lines.
iii. Isogonic lines: Lines joining the places of equal declination (α) on magnetic maps are called isogonic lines.
iv. Aclinic lines: Lines joining the places of equal inclination or dip (ø) on magnetic maps are called aclinic lines.

Question 25.
Magnetic equator and geographical equator of the earth are same. Is this true or false?
Answer:
False. Magnetic equator and geographical equator of the earth are not same. By definition, they are different. Magnetic declination is the angle between magnetic equator and geographical equator of the earth.

Question 26.
Earth’s magnetic field at the equator is approximately 4 × 10-5 T. Calculate Earth’s dipole moment. (Radius of Earth = 6.4 × 106 m, µ0 = 4π × 10-7 SI units)
Answer:
Consider earth’s magnetic field as due to a bar magnet at the centre of earth, held along the polar axis of earth.
∴ Beq = \(\frac {µ_0}{4π}\) \(\frac {m}{r^3}\) ……….. (where, R = radius of earth)
∴ m = \(\frac{\mathrm{B}_{\mathrm{eq}} \times \mathrm{R}^{3}}{\mu_{0} / 4 \pi}\) = \(\frac{4 \times 10^{-5} \times\left(6.4 \times 10^{6}\right)^{3}}{10^{-7}}\)
= 4 × (6.4)³ × 1020
= 1048 × 1020
∴ M = 1.048 × 1023 Am²

Question 27.
At a given place on the Earth, a bar magnet of magnetic moment \(\vec{m}\) is kept horizontal in the East-West direction. P and Q are the two neutral points due to magnetic field of this magnet and \(\vec{B}\)H is the horizontal component of the Earth’s magnetic field.
i. Calculate the angles between position vectors of P and Q with the direction of \(\vec{m}\).
ii. Points P and Q are 1 m from the centre of the bar magnet and BH = 3.5 × 10-5 T. Calculate magnetic dipole moment of the bar magnet.
Neutral point is that point where the resultant magnetic field is zero.
Answer:
i. The direction of magnetic field \(\vec{B}\) due to the bar magnet is opposite to \(\vec{B}\)H at the neutral points P and Q such that (θ + α) = 90° at P and (θ + α) = 270° at Question
∴ tan α = \(\frac {1}{2}\) tan θ
∴ tan θ = 2 tan α
= 2 tan (90 – θ) and 2 tan (270 – θ)
∴ tan θ = ± 2 cot θ
∴ tan²θ = 2 …….. (1)
∴ tanθ = ±√2
∴ θ = tan-1 (±√2)
∴ θ = 54°44′ and 180° – 54° 44° = 125°16′

ii. For magnetic dipole moment of the bar magnet:
From equation (2), tan² θ = 2
∴ sec² θ = 1 + tan² θ = 1 + 2 = 3
∴ cos² θ = \(\frac {1}{3}\)
r = 1 m and B = BH = 3.5 × 10-5 T ……. (Given)
we have,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Magnetism 7

Question 28.
A bar magnet is cut into two equal parts vertically and half part of a bar magnet is kept on the other such that opposite poles align each other. Calculate the magnetic moment of the combination, if m is the magnetic moment of the original magnet.
Answer:
When bar magnet is cut into two equal parts, then magnetic moment of each part becomes half of the original directed from S to N pole.
∴ Magnetic moment of the combination = \(\frac {m}{2}\) – \(\frac {m}{2}\) = 0
∴ The net magnetic moment of the combination is zero.

Question 29.
Answer the following questions regarding earth’s magnetism:
i. Which direction would a compass needlepoint to, if located right on the geomagnetic north or south pole?
ii. Geologists claim that besides the main magnetic N-S poles, there are several local poles on the earth’s surface oriented in different directions. How is such a thing possible at all?
Answer:
i. At the poles, earth’s magnetic field is exactly vertical. As the compass needle is free to rotate in a horizontal plane only, it may point out in any direction.
ii. The earth’s magnetic field is only approximately a dipole field. Hence the local N-S poles may lie oriented in different directions. This is possible due to deposits of magnetised minerals in the earth’s crust.

Choose the correct option.

Question 1.
The ratio of magnetic induction along the axis to magnetic induction along the equator of a magnet is
(A) 1 : 1
(B) 1 : 2
(C) 2 : 1
(D) 4 : 1
Answer:
(C) 2 : 1

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Magnetism

Question 2.
Magnetic field lines
(A) do not intersect each other.
(B) intersect each other at 45°.
(C) intersect each other at 90°.
(D) intersect each other at 60°.
Answer:
(A) do not intersect each other.

Question 3.
The points A and B are situated perpendicular to the axis of 2 cm long bar magnet at large distances x and 3 x from the centre on opposite sides. The ratio of magnetic fields at A and B will be approximately equal to
(A) 27 : 1
(B) 1 : 27
(C) 9 : 1
(D) 1 : 9
Answer:
(A) 27 : 1

Question 4.
A compass needle is placed at the magnetic pole. It
(A) points N – S.
(B) points E – W.
(C) becomes vertical.
(D) may stay in any direction.
Answer:
(D) may stay in any direction.

Question 5.
Magnetic lines of force originate from …………… pole and end at …………….. pole outside the magnet.
(A) north, north
(B) north, south
(C) south, north
(D) south, south
Answer:
(B) north, south

Question 6.
Two isolated point poles of strength 30 A-m and 60 A-m are placed at a distance of 0.3 m. The force of repulsion between them is
(A) 2 × 10-3 N
(B) 2 × 10-4 N
(C) 2 × 105 N
(D) 2 × 10-5 N
Answer:
(A) 2 × 10-3 N

Question 7.
The magnetic dipole moment has dimensions of
(A) current × length.
(B) charge × time × length.
(C) current × area.
(D) \(\frac {current}{area}\)
Answer:
(C) current × area.

Question 8.
A large magnet is broken into two pieces so that their lengths are in the ratio 2:1. The pole strengths of the two pieces will have the ratio
(A) 2 : 1
(B) 1 :2
(C) 4 : 1
(D) 1 : 1
Answer:
(A) 2 : 1

Question 9.
The magnetic induction B and the force F on a pole of strength m are related by
(A) B = m F
(B) F = nIABm
(C) F = m B
(D) F = \(\frac {m}{B}\)
Answer:
(C) F = m B

Question 10.
A magnetic dipole has magnetic length 10 cm and pole strength 100 Am. Its magnetic dipole moment is ………………. Am².
(A) 1000
(B) 500
(C) 10
(D) 5
Answer:
(C) 10

Question 11.
The geometric length of a bar magnet having half magnetic length 5 cm is …………… cm.
(A) 12
(B) 10
(C) 6
(D) 4.2
Answer:
(A) 12

Question 12.
The angle of dip at the equator is
(A) 90°
(B) 45°
(C) 30°
(D) 0°
Answer:
(D) 0°

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 12 Magnetism

Question 13.
The angle of dip at the magnetic poles of the earth is
(A) 90°
(B) 45°
(C) 30°
(D) 0°
Answer:
(A) 90°

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors

Question 1.
Define current. State its formula and SI unit.
Answer:

  1. Current is defined as the rate of flow of electric charge.
  2. Formula: I = \(\frac {q}{t}\)
  3. SI unit: ampere (A)

Question 2.
Derive an expression for a current generated due to the flow of charged particles
Answer:
i. Consider an imaginary gas of both negatively and positively charged particles moving randomly in various directions across a plane P.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 1

ii. In a time interval t, let the amount of positive charge flowing in the forward direction be q+ and the amount of negative charge flowing in the forward direction be q. Thus, the net charge flowing in the forward direction is q = q+ – q

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors

iii. Let I be the current varying with time. Let ∆q be the amount of net charge flowing across the plane P from time t to t + At, i.e. during the time interval ∆t.

iv. Then the current is given by
I(t) = \(\lim _{\Delta t \rightarrow 0} \frac{\Delta \mathrm{q}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}\)
Flere, the current is expressed as the limit of the ratio (∆q/∆t) as ∆t tends to zero.

Question 3.
Match the amount of current generated A given in column – II with the sources given in column -I.

Column I Column II
1. Lightening a. Few amperes
2. House hold circuits b. 10000 A
c. Order of µA

Answer:

Column I Column II
1. Lightening b. 10000 A
2. House hold circuits a. Few amperes

Question 4.
Which are the most common units of current used in semiconductor devices?
Answer:

  1. milliampere (mA)
  2. microampere (µA)
  3. nanoampere (nA)

Question 5.
Six ampere current flows through a bulb. Find the number of electrons that should flow through the bulb in a time of 4 hrs.
Answer:
Given: I = 6 A, t = 4 hrs = 4 × 60 × 60 s
To find: Number of electrons (N)
Formula: I = \(\frac {q}{t}\) = \(\frac {Ne}{t}\)
Calculation: As we know, e = 1.6 × 10-19 C
From formula,
N = \(\frac {It}{e}\) = \(\frac {6×4×60×60}{1.6×10^{-19}}\) 6x4x60x60 = 5.4 × 1023

Question 6.
Explain flow of current in different conductor.
Answer:

  1. A current can be generated by positively or negatively charged particles.
  2. In an electrolyte, both positively and negatively charged particles take part in the conduction.
  3.  In a metal, the free electrons are responsible for conduction. These electrons flow and generate a net current under the action of an applied electric field.
  4. As long as a steady field exists, the electrons continue to flow in the form of a steady current.
  5. Such steady electric fields are generated by cells and batteries.

Question 7.
State the sign convention used to show the flow of electric current in a circuit.
Answer:
The direction of the current in a circuit is drawn in the direction in which positively charged particles would move, even if the current is constituted by the negatively charged particles, (electrons), which move in the direction opposite to that the electric field.

Question 8.
Explain the concept of drift velocity with neat diagrams.
Answer:
i. When no current flows through a copper rod, the free electrons move in random motion. Therefore, there is no net motion of these electrons in any direction.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 2

ii. If an electric field is applied along the length of the copper rod, a current is set up in the rod. The electrons inside rod still move randomly, but tend to ‘drift’ in a particular direction.

iii. Their direction is opposite to that of the applied electric field.

iv. The electrons under the action of the applied electric field drift with a drift speed vd.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 3

Question 9.
What is current density? State its SI unit.
Answer:
i. Current density at a point in a conductor is the amount of current flowing per unit area of the conductor.
Current density, J = \(\frac {I}{A}\)
where, I = Current
A = Area of cross-section

ii. SI unit: A/m²

Question 10.
A metallic wire of diameter 0.02 m contains 10 free electrons per cubic metre. Find the drift velocity for free electrons, having an electric current of 100 amperes flowing through the wire.
(Given: charge on electron = 1.6 × 10-19C)
Answer:
Given: e = 1.6 × 10-19 C, n = 1028 electrons/m³,
D = 0.02 m, r = D/2 = 0.01 m,
I = 100 A
To find: Drift velocity (vd)
Formula: vd = \(\frac {I}{nAe}\)
Calculation: From formula,
vd = \(\frac {I}{nπr^2e}\)
∴ vd = \(\frac {100}{10^{28}×3.142×10^{-4}×1.6×10^{-19}}\)
= \(\frac {10^{-3}}{3.142×1.6}\)
= 1.989 × 10-4 m/s

Question 11.
A copper wire of radius 0.6 mm carries a current of 1 A. Assuming the current to be uniformly distributed over a cross sectional area, find the magnitude of current density. Answer:
Given: r = 0.6 mm = 0.6 × 10-3 m, I = 1 A
To find: Current density (J)
Formula: J = \(\frac {I}{A}\)
Calculation: From formula,
J = \(\frac {1}{3.142×(0.6)^2×10^{-6}}\)
= 0.884 × 106 A/m²

Question 12.
A metal wire of radius 0.4 mm carries a current of 2 A. Find the magnitude of current density if the current is assumed to be uniformly distributed over a cross sectional area.
Answer:
Given: r = 0.4 mm = 0.4 × 10-3 m, I = 2 A
To find: Current density (J)
Formula: J = \(\frac {I}{A}\)
Calculation: From formula,
J = \(\frac {2}{3.142×(0.4)^2×10^{-6}}\)
= 3.978 × 106 A/m²

Question 13.
State and explain ohm’s law.
Answer:
Statement: The current I through a conductor is directly proportional to the potential difference V applied across its two ends provided the physical state of the conductor is unchanged.
Explanation:
According to ohm’s law,
I ∝ V
∴ V = IR or R = \(\frac {V}{I}\)
where, R is proportionality constant and is called the resistance of the conductor.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors

Question 14.
Draw a graph showing the I-V curve for a good conductor and ideal conductor.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 4

Question 15.
Define one ohm.
Answer:
If potential difference of 1 volt across a conductor produces a current of 1 ampere through it, then the resistance of the conductor is one ohm.

Question 16.
Define conductance. State its SI unit.
Answer:

  1. Reciprocal of resistance is called conductance.
    C = \(\frac {I}{R}\)
  2. S.I unit statement or Ω-1

Question 17.
Explain the concept of electrical conduction in a conductor.
Answer:

  1. Electrical conduction in a conductor is due to mobile charge carriers (electrons).
  2. These conduction electrons are free to move inside the volume of the conductor.
  3. During their random motion, electrons collide with the ion cores within the conductor. Assuming that electrons do not collide with each other these random motions average out to zero.
  4. On application of an electric field E, the motion of the electron is a combination of the random motion of electrons due to collisions and that due to the electric field \(\vec{E}\).
  5. The electrons drift under the action of the field \(\vec{E}\) and move in a direction opposite to the direction of the field \(\vec{E}\). In this way electrons in a conductor conduct electricity.

Question 18.
Derive expression for electric field when an electron of mass m is subjected to an electric field (E).
Answer:
i. Consider an electron of mass m subjected to an electric field E. The force experienced by the electron will be \(\vec{F}\) = e\(\vec{E}\).

ii. The acceleration experienced by the electron will then be
\(\vec{a}\) = \(\frac {e\vec{E}}{m}\) …………. (1)

iii. The drift velocities attained by electrons before and after collisions are not related to each other.

iv. After the collision, the electron will move in random direction, but will still drift in the direction opposite to \(\vec{E}\).

v. Let τ be the average time between two successive collisions.

vi. Thus, at any given instant of time, the average drift speed of the electron will be,
vd = a τ = \(\frac {eEτ}{m}\) ………………(From 1)
vd = \(\frac {eEτ}{m}\) = \(\frac {J}{ne}\) ……………(2) [∵ vd = \(\frac {J}{ne}\)]

vii. Electric field is given by,
E = (\(\frac {m}{e^2nτ}\))J ………… (from 2)
= ρJ = [∵ ρ = \(\frac {m}{ne^2τ}\)]
where, ρ is resistivity of the material.

Question 19.
A Flashlight uses two 1.5 V batteries to provide a steady current of 0.5 A in the filament. Determine the resistance of the glowing filament.
Answer:
Given: For each battery, V1 = V2 = 1.5 volt,
I = 0.5 A
To find: Resistance (R)
Formula: V = IR
Calculation: Total voltage, V = V1 + V2 = 3 volt
From formula,
R = \(\frac {V}{I}\) = \(\frac {3}{0.5}\) = 6.0 Ω

Question 20.
State an expression for resistance of non-ohmic devices and draw I-V curve for such devices.
Answer:
i. Resistance (R) of a non-ohmic device at a particular value of the potential difference V is given by,
R = \(\lim _{\Delta I \rightarrow 0} \frac{\Delta V}{\Delta I}=\frac{d V}{d I}\)
where, ∆V = potential difference between the
two values of potential V – \(\frac {∆V}{2}\) to V + \(\frac {∆V}{2}\),
and ∆I = corresponding change in the current.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 5

Question 21.
Derive an expression for decrease in potential energy when a charge flows through an external resistance in a circuit.
Answer:
i. Consider a resistor AB connected to a cell in a circuit with current flowing from A to B.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 6

ii. The cell maintains a potential difference V between the two terminals of the resistor, higher potential at A and lower at B.

iii. Let Q be the charge flowing in time ∆t through the resistor from A to B.

iv. The potential difference V between the two points A and B, is equal to the amount of work (W) done to carry a unit positive charge from A to B.
∴ V = \(\frac {W}{Q}\)

v. The cell provides this energy through the charge Q, to the resistor AB where the work is performed.

vi. When the charge Q flows from the higher potential point A to the lower potential point B, there is decrease in its potential energy by an amount
∆U = QV = I∆tV
where I is current due to the charge Q flowing in time ∆t.

Question 22.
Prove that power dissipated across a resistor is responsible for heating up the resistor. Give an example for it.
OR
Derive an expression for the power dissipated across a resistor in terms of its resistance R.
Answer:
i. When a charge Q flows from the higher potential point to the lower potential point, its potential energy decreases by an amount,
∆U = QV = I∆tV
where I is current due to the charge Q flowing in time ∆t.

ii. By the principle of conservation of energy, this energy is converted into some other form of energy.

iii. In the limit as ∆t → 0, \(\frac {dU}{dt}\) = IV
Here, \(\frac {dU}{dt}\) is power, the rate of transfer of energy ans is given by p = \(\frac {dU}{dt}\) = IV
Hence, power is transferred by the cell to the resistor or any other device in place of the resistor, such as a motor, a rechargeable battery etc.

iv. Due to the presence of an electric field, the free electrons move across a resistor and their kinetic energy increases as they move.

v. When these electrons collide with the ion cores, the energy gained by them is shared among the ion cores. Consequently, vibrations of the ions increase, resulting in heating up of the resistor.

vi. Thus, some amount of energy is dissipated in the form of heat in a resistor.

vii. The energy dissipated per unit time is actually the power dissipated which is given by,
P = \(\frac {V^2}{R}\) = I²R
Hence, it is the power dissipation across a resistor which is responsible for heating it up.

viii. For example, the filament of an electric bulb heats upto incandescence, radiating out heat and light.

Question 23.
Calculate the current flowing through a heater rated at 2 kW when connected to a 300 V d. c. supply.
Answer:
Given: P = 2 kW = 2000 W, V = 300 V
To find: Current (I)
Formula: P = IV
Calculation: From formula,
I = \(\frac {P}{V}\) = \(\frac {2000}{300}\) = 6.67 A

Question 24.
An electric heater takes 6 A current from a 230 V supply line, calculate the power of the heater and electric energy consumed by it in 5 hours.
Answer:
Given: I = 6 A, V = 230 V, t = 5 hours
To find: Power (P), Energy consumed
Formulae: i. P = IV
ii. Energy consumed = power × time
Calculation: From formula (i),
P = 6 × 230
= 1380 W = 1.38 kW
From formula (ii),
Energy consumed = 1.38 × 5 = 6.9 kWh
= 6.9 units

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors

Question 25.
When supplied a voltage of 220 V, an electric heater takes 6 A current. Calculate the power of heater and electric energy consumed by its in 2 hours?
Answer:
Given: I = 6 A, V = 220 volt, t = 2 hour
To find: i. Power of heater (P)
ii. Electric energy consumed (E)
Formulae: i. P = IV
ii. Electric energy consumed
= Power × time
Calculation: From formula (i),
P = 6 × 220 = 1320 W = 1.32 kW
From formula (ii),
Electric energy consumed
= 1.32 × 2 = 2.64 kWh = 2.64 units

Question 26.
Explain the colour code system for resistors with an example.
Answer:
i. In colour code system, resistors has 4 bands on it.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 7

ii. In the four band resistor, the colour code of the first two bands indicate two numbers and third band often called decimal multiplier.

iii. The fourth band separated by a space from the three value bands, indicates tolerance of the resistor.

iv. Following table represents the colour code of carbon resistor.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 8

v. Example:
Let the colours of the rings of a resistor starting from one end be brown, red and orange and gold at the other end. To determine resistance of resistor we have,
x = 1, y = 2, z = 3 (From colour code table)
∴ Resistance = xy × 10z Ω ± tolerance
= 12 × 10³ Ω ± 5%
= 12 kΩ ± 5%
[Note: To remember the colours in order learn the Mnemonics: B.B. ROY of Great Britain had Very Good Wife]

Question 27.
Explain the concept of rheostat.
Answer:

  1. A rheostat is an adjustable resistor used in applications that require adjustment of current or resistance in an electric circuit.
  2. The rheostat can be used to adjust potential difference between two points in a circuit, change the intensity of lights and control the speed of motors, etc.
  3. Its resistive element can be a metal wire or a ribbon, carbon films or a conducting liquid, depending upon the application.
  4. In hi-fi equipment, rheostats are used for volume control.

Question 28.
Explain series combination of resistors.
Answer:
i. In series combination, resistors are connected in single electrical path. Hence, the same electric current flows through each resistor in a series combination.

ii. Whereas, in series combination, the supply voltage between two resistors R1 and R2 is divided into V1 and V2 respectively.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 9

iii. According to Ohm’s law,
R1 = \(\frac {V_1}{I}\), R2 = \(\frac {v_2}{I}\)
Total Voltage, V = V1 + V2
= I(R1 + R2)
∴ V = I Rs
Thus, the equivalent resistance of the series circuit is, Rs = R1 + R2

iv. When a number of resistors are connected in series, the equivalent resistance is equal to the sum of individual resistances.
For ‘n’ number of resistors,
Rs = R1 + R2 + R2 + ………….. + Rn = \(\sum_{i=1}^{i=n} R_{i}\)

Question 29.
Explain parallel combination of resistors.
Answer:
i. In parallel combination, the resistors are connected in such a way that the same voltage is applied across each resistor.

ii. A number of resistors are said to be connected in parallel if all of them are connected between the same two electrical points each having individual path.

iii. In parallel combination, the total current I is divided into I, and I2 as shown in the circuit diagram.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 10

iv. Since voltage V across them remains the same,
I = I1 + I2
where I1 is current flowing through R1 and I2 is current flowing through R2.

v. When Ohm’s law is applied to R1,
V = I1R1
i.e. I1 = \(\frac {V}{R_1}\) ………(1)
When Ohm’s law applied to R2,
V = I2R2
i.e., I2 = \(\frac {V}{R_2}\) …………(2)

vi. Total current is given by,
I = I1 + I2
∴ I = \(\frac {V}{R_1}\) + \(\frac {V}{R_2}\) ………[From (1) and (2)]
Since, I = \(\frac {V}{R_p}\)
∴ \(\frac {V}{R_p}\) = \(\frac {V}{R_1}\) + \(\frac {V}{R_2}\)
∴ \(\frac {1}{R_p}\) = \(\frac {1}{R_1}\) + \(\frac {1}{R_2}\)
Where, Rp is the equivalent resistance in parallel combination.

vii. If ‘n’ number of resistors R1, R2, R3, ………….. Rn are connected in parallel, the equivalent resistance of the combination is given by
\(\frac {1}{R_p}\) = \(\frac {1}{R_1}\) + \(\frac {1}{R_2}\) + \(\frac {1}{R_3}\) ……….. + \(\frac {1}{R_n}\) = \(\sum_{i=1}^{\mathrm{i}=\mathrm{n}} \frac{1}{\mathrm{R}}\)
Thus, when a number of resistors are connected in parallel, the reciprocal of the equivalent resistance is equal to the sum of the reciprocals of individual resistances.

Question 30.
Colour code of resistor is Yellow-Violet- Orange-Gold. Find its value.
Answer:

Yellow (x) Violet (y) Orange (z) Gold (T%)
Value 4 7 3 ± 5

Value of resistance: xy × 10z Ω ± tolerance
∴ Value of resistance = 47 × 10³ Ω ± 5%
= 47 kΩ ± 5%

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors

Question 31.
From the given value of resistor, find the colour bands of this resistor.
Value of resistor: 330 Ω
Answer:
Value = 330 Ω = 33 × 101 Ω = xy × 10z Ω

Value 3 3 1
Colour Orange (x) Orange (y) Broen(z)

ii. Given: Green – Blue – Red – Gold

Question 32.
Evaluate resistance for the following colour-coded resistors:
i. Yellow – Violet – Black – Silver
ii. Green – Blue – Red – Gold
ill. Brown – Black – Orange – Gold
Answer:
i. Given: Yellow – Violet – Black – Silver
To find: Value of resistance
Formula: Value of resistance
= (xy × 10z ± T%)Ω

Colour Yellow (x) Violet (y) Black (z) Sliver (T%)
Code 4 7 0 ±10

Hence x = 4, y = 7, z = 0, T = 10%
Value of resistance = (xy ×10z ± T%) Ω
= (47 × 10° ± 10%) Ω
Value of resistance = 47 Ω ± 10%

To find: Value of resistance
Formula: Value of resistance
= (xy × 10z ± T%) Ω
Calculation:

Colour Green (x) Blue (y) Red (z) Gold (T%)
Code 5 6 2 ±5

Hence x = 5, y = 6, z = 2, T = 5%
Value of resistance = (xy × 10z ± T%) Q
= 56 × 102 Ω ± 5%
= 5.6 k Ω ± 5%

iii. Given: Brown – Black – Orange – Gold
To find: Value of the resistance
Formula: Value of the resistance
= (xy × 10z ± T%) Ω
Calculation:

Colour Brown (x) Black (y) Orange (z) Gold (T%)
Code 1 0 3 ±5

Hence x = 1, y = 0, z = 3, T = 5%
Value of resistance = (xy × 10z ± T%) Ω
= 10 × 10³ Ω ± 5%
= 10 kΩ ± 5%

Question 33.
Calculate
i. total resistance and
ii. total current in the following circuit.
R1 = 3 Ω, R2 = 6 Ω, R3 = 5 Ω, V = 14 V
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 11
Answer:
i. R1 and R2 are connected in parallel. This combination (Rp) is connected in series with R3.
∴ Total resistance, RT = Rp + R3
Rp = \(\frac {R_1R_2}{R_1+R_2}\) = \(\frac {3×6}{3+6}\) = 2 Ω
∴ RT = 2+ 5 = 7 Ω

ii. Total current: I = \(\frac {V}{R_T}\) = \(\frac {14}{7}\) = 2 A

Question 34.
State the factors affecting resistance of a conductor.
Answer:
Factors affecting resistance of a conductor:

  1. Length of conductor
  2. Area of cross-section
  3. Nature of material

Question 35.
Derive expression for specific resistance of a material.
Answer:
At a particular temperature, the resistance (R) of a conductor of uniform cross section is
i. directly proportional to its length (l),
i.e., R ∝ l ……….. (1)

ii. inversely proportional to its area of cross section (A),
R ∝ \(\frac {1}{A}\) ……….. (1)
From equations (1) and (2),
R = ρ\(\frac {l}{A}\)
where ρ is a constant of proportionality and it is called specific resistance or resistivity of the material of the conductor at a given temperature.

iii. Thus, resistivity is given by,
ρ = \(\frac {RA}{l}\)

Question 36.
State SI unit of resistivity.
Answer:
SI unit of resistivity is ohm-metre (Ω m).

Question 37.
What is conductivity? State its SI unit.
Answer:
i. Reciprocal of resistivity is called as conductivity of a material.
Formula: σ = \(\frac {1}{ρ}\)
ii. SI unit: (\(\frac {1}{ohm m}\)) or siemens/metre

Question 38.
Explain the similarities between R = \(\frac {V}{I}\) and ρ = \(\frac {E}{J}\)
Answer:

  1. Resistivity (ρ) is a property of a material, while the resistance (R) refers to a particular object.
  2. The electric field \(\vec{E}\) at a point is specified in a material with the potential difference across the resistance and the current density \(\vec{J}\) in a material is specified instead of current I in the resistor.
  3. For an isotropic material, resistivity is given by ρ = \(\frac {E}{J}\)
    For a particular resistor, the resistance R given by, R = \(\frac {V}{I}\)

Question 39.
State expression for current density in terms of conductivity.
Answer:
Current density, \(\vec{J}\) = \(\frac {1}{ρ}\) \(\vec{E}\) = σ \(\vec{E}\)
where, ρ = resistivity of the material
E = electric field intensity
σ = conductivity of the material

Question 40.
Calculate the resistance per metre, at room temperature, of a constantan (alloy) wire of diameter 1.25 mm. The resistivity of constantan at room temperature is 5.0 × 10-7 Ωm.
Answer:
Given: ρ = 5.0 × 10-7 Ω m, d = 1.25 × 10-3 m,
∴ r = 0.625 × 10-3 m
To find: Resistance per metre (\(\frac {R}{l}\))
Formula: ρ = \(\frac {RA}{l}\)
Calculation:
From formula,
\(\frac{\mathrm{R}}{l}=\frac{\rho}{\mathrm{A}}=\frac{\rho}{\pi \mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
= \(\frac{5 \times 10^{-7}}{3.142 \times\left(0.625 \times 10^{-3}\right)^{2}}\)
= \(\frac{5}{3.142 \times 0.625^{2}} \times 10^{-1}\)
= { antilog [log 5 – log 3.142 -2 log 0.625]} × 10-1
= {antilog [ 0.6990 – 0.4972 -2(1.7959)]} × 10-1
= {antilog [0.2018- 1.5918]} × 10-1
= {antilog [0.6100]} × 10-1
= 4.074 × 10-1
∴ \(\frac {R}{l}\) ≈ 0.41 Ω m-1

Question 41.
A negligibly small current is passed through a wire of length 15 m and uniform cross-section 6 × 10-7 m², and its resistance is measured to be 5 Ω. What is the resistivity of the material at the temperature of the experiment?
Answer:
Given: l = 15 m, A = 6.0 × 10-7 m², R = 5 Ω
To find: Resistivity (ρ)
Formula: ρ = \(\frac {RA}{l}\)
Calculation: From formula,
ρ = \(\frac {5×6×10^{-7}}{15}\)
∴ ρ = 2 × 10-7 Ω m

Question 42.
A constantan wire of length 50 cm and 0.4 mm diameter is used in making a resistor. If the resistivity of constantan is 5 × 10-7m, calculate the value of the resistor.
Answer:
Given: l = 50 cm = 0.5 m,
d = 0.4 mm = 0.4 × 10-3 m,
r = 0.2 × 10-3 m, p = 5 × 10-7 Ωm
To Find: Value of resistor (R)
Formula: ρ = \(\frac {RA}{l}\)
Calculation: from formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 12

Question 43.
The resistivity of nichrome is 10-6 Ωm. What length of a uniform wire of this material and of 0.2 mm diameter will have a resistance of 200 ohm?
Answer:
Given: ρ = 10-6 Ω m, d = 0.2 mm,
∴ r = 0.1 mm = 0.1 × 10-3 m, R = 200 Ω
To find: Length (l)
Formula: R = \(\frac {ρl}{A}\) = \(\frac {ρl}{πr^2}\)
Calculation: From formula,
l = \(\frac {πr^2}{ρ}\)
∴ l = \(\frac{200 \times 3.142 \times\left(0.1 \times 10^{-3}\right)^{2}}{10^{-6}}\) = 6 284 m

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors

Question 44.
A wire of circular cross-section and 30 ohm resistance is uniformly stretched until its new length is three times its original length. Find its resistance.
Answer:
Given: R1 = 30 ohm,
l1 = original length, A1 = original area,
l2 = new length, A2 = new area
l2= 3l1
To find: Resistance (R2)
Formula: R= ρ\(\frac {l}{A}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 13
The volume of wire remains the same in two cases, we have
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 14

Question 45.
Define temperature coefficient of resistivity. State its SI unit.
Answer:
i. The temperature coefficient of resistivity is defined as the increase in resistance per unit original resistance at the chosen reference temperature, per degree rise in temperature.
α = \(\frac{\rho-\rho_{0}}{\rho_{0}\left(T-T_{0}\right)}\)
= \(\frac{\mathrm{R}-\mathrm{R}_{0}}{\mathrm{R}_{0}\left(\mathrm{~T}-\mathrm{T}_{0}\right)}\)
For small difference in temperatures,
α = \(\frac {1}{R_0}\) \(\frac {dR}{dT}\)

ii. SI unit: °C-1 (per degree Celsius) or K-1 (per kelvin).

Question 46.
Give expressions for variation of resistivity and resistance with temperature. Represent graphically the temperature dependence of resistivity of copper.
Answer:
i. Resistivity is given by,
ρ = ρ0 [1 + α (T – T0)] where,
T0 = chosen reference temperature
ρ0 = resistivity at the chosen temperature
α = temperature coefficient of resistivity
T = final temperature

ii. Resistance is given by,
R = R0 [1+ α (T – T0)]
Where,
T0 = chosen reference temperature
R0 = resistance at the chosen temperature
α = temperature coefficient of resistance
T = final temperature

iii. For example, for copper, the temperature dependence of resistivity can be plotted as shown:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 15

Question 47.
What is super conductivity?
Answer:

  1. The resistivity of a metal decreases as the temperature decreases.
  2. In case of some metals and metal alloys, the resistivity suddenly drops to zero at a particular temperature (Tc), this temperature is called critical temperature.
  3. Super conductivity is the phenomenon where resistivity of a material becomes zero at particular temperature.
  4. For example, mercury loses its resistance completely to zero at 4.2 K.

Question 48.
A piece of platinum wire has resistance of 2.5 Ω at 0 °C. If its temperature coefficient of resistance is 4 × 10-3/°C. Find the resistance of the wire at 80 °C.
Answer:
Given: R0 = 2.5 Ω
α = 4 × 10-3/°C = 0.004/°C
T = 80 °C
To find: Resistance at 80 °C (RT)
Formula: RT = R0(l + α T)
Calculation: From formula,
RT = 2.5 [1+ (0.004 × 80)]
= 2.5(1 + 0.32)
RT = 2.5 × 1.32
RT = 3.3 Ω

Question 49.
The resistance of a tungsten filament at 150 °C is 133 ohm. What will be its resistance at 500 °C? The temperature coefficient of resistance of tungsten is 0.0045 per °C.
Answer:
Given: Let resistance at 150 °C be R1 and resistance at 500 °C be R2
Thus,
R1= 133 Ω, α = 0.0045 °C-1
To find: Resistance (R2)
Formula: RT = R0 (1 + α∆T)
Calculation:
From formula,
R1 = R0 (1 + α × 150)
∴ 133 = R0(1 + 0.0045 × 150) ……….(i)
R2 = R0 (1 + α × 500)
∴ R2 = R0(1 + 0.0045 × 500) ………(ii)
Dividing equation (ii) by (i), we get
\(\frac{\mathrm{R}_{2}}{133}=\frac{1+(0.0045 \times 500)}{1+(0.0045 \times 150)}=\frac{3.25}{1.675}\)
∴ R2 = \(\frac {3.25}{1.675}\) × 133 = 258 Ω

Question 50.
A silver wire has resistance of 2.1 Ω at 27.5 °C. If temperature coefficient of silver is 3.94 × 10-3/°C, find the silver wire resistance at 100 °C.
Answer:
Given: R1 = 2.1 Ω, T1 = 27.5 °C,
α = 3.94 × 10-3/°C, T2 = 100 °C
To find: Resistance (R2)
Formula: RT = Ro (1 + αT)
Calculation:
From the formula,
R1 = R0(1 + α × 27.5) ……….. (i)
R2 = R0(l + α × 100) ………….. (ii)
Dividing equation (i) by (ii), we get,
\(\frac{\mathrm{R}_{1}}{\mathrm{R}_{2}}=\frac{1+\left(3.94 \times 10^{-3} \times 27.5\right)}{1+\left(3.94 \times 10^{-3} \times 100\right)}\)
\(\frac{\mathrm{R}_{1}}{\mathrm{R}_{2}}=\frac{1.10835}{1.394}\) = 0.795
∴ R2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{R}_{1}}{0.795}=\frac{2.1}{0.795}\) = 2.641 Ω

Question 51.
At what temperature would the resistance of a copper conductor be double its resistance at 0 °C?
(a for copper = 3.9 × 10-3/°C)
Answer:
Given: Let the resistance of the conductor at 0°C be R0
R1 = R0 at T1 = 0°C
R2 = 2R0 at T2 = T
To find: Final temperature (T)
Formula: α = \(\frac {R_2-R_1}{R_1(T_2-T_1)}\)
Calculation: From formula,
α = \(\frac {2R_0-R_0}{R_1(T_2-T_1)}\) = \(\frac {1}{T}\)
∴ T = \(\frac {1}{α}\) = \(\frac {1}{3.9×10^{-3}}\) ≈ 256 °C

Question 52.
A conductor has resistance of 15 Ω at 10 °C and 18 Ω at 400 °C. Find the temperature coefficient of resistance of the material.
Answer:
Given: R1 = 15 Ω, T1 = 10 °C, R2 = 18 Ω,
T2 = 400 °C
To find: Temperature coefficient of resistance (α)
Formula: RT = R0 (1 + αT)
Calculation:
From formula,
R1 = R0 (1 + α × 10) ……..(i)
R2 = R0 (1 + α × 400) …….(ii)
Dividing equation (i) by (ii), we get,
\(\frac{\mathrm{R}_{1}}{\mathrm{R}_{2}}=\frac{1+(\alpha \times 10)}{1+(\alpha \times 400)}\)
∴ \(\frac{15}{18}=\frac{1+10 \alpha}{1+400 \alpha}\)
∴ 18 + 180 α = 15 + 6000 α
∴ 5820 α = 3
∴ α = \(\frac {3}{5820}\) = 5.155 × 10-4/°C

Question 53.
Write short note on e.m.f. devices.
Answer:

  1. When charges flow through a conductor, a potential difference get established between the two ends of the conductor.
  2. For a steady flow of charges, this potential difference is required to be maintained across the two ends of the conductor.
  3. There is a device that does so by doing work on the charges, thereby maintaining the potential difference. Such a device is called an emf device and it provides the emf E.
  4. The charges move in the conductor due to the energy provided by the emf device. This energy is supplied by the e.m.f. device on account of its work done.
  5. Power cells, batteries, Solar cells, fuel cells, and even generators, are some examples of emf devices.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors

Question 54.
Explain working of a circuit when connected to emf device.
Answer:
i. A circuit is formed with connecting an emf device and a resistor R. Flere, the emf device keeps the positive terminal (+) at a higher electric potential than the negative terminal (-)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 16
ii. The emf is represented by an arrow from the negative terminal to the positive terminal.

iii. When the circuit is open, there is no net flow of charge carriers within the device.

iv. When connected in a circuit, the positive charge carriers move towards the positive terminal which acts as cathode inside the emf device.

v. Thus, the positive charge carriers move from the region of lower potential energy, to the region of higher potential energy.

vi. Consider a charge dq flowing through the cross section of the circuit in time dt.

vii. Since, same amount of charge dq flows throughout the circuit, including the emf device. Hence, the device must do work dW on the charge dq, so that the charge enters the negative terminal (low potential terminal) and leaves the positive terminal (higher potential terminal).

viii. Therefore, e.m.f. of the emf device is,
E = \(\frac {dW}{dq}\)
The SI unit of emf is joule/coulomb (J/C).

Question 55.
What is an ideal e.m.f. device?
Answer:

  1. In an ideal e.m.f. device, there is no internal resistance to the motion of charge carriers.
  2. The emf of the device is then equal to the potential difference across the two terminals of the device.

Question 56.
What is a real e.m.f. device?
Answer:

  1. In a real emf device, there is an internal resistance to the motion of charge carriers.
  2. If such a device is not connected in a circuit, there is no current through it.

Question 57.
Derive an expression for current flowing through a circuit when an external resistance is connected to a real e.m.f. device.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 17
i. If a current (I) flows through an emf device, there is an internal resistance (r) and the emf (E) differs from the potential difference across its two terminals (V).
V = E – Ir ……… (1)

ii. The negative sign is due to the fact that the current I flows through the emf device from the negative terminal to the positive terminal.

iii. By the application of Ohm’s law,
V = IR …….(2)
From equations (1) and (2),
IR = E – Ir
∴ \(\frac {E}{R+r}\)

Question 58.
Explain the conditions for maximum current.
Answer:

  1. Current in a circuit is given by, I = \(\frac {E}{R+r}\)
  2. Maximum current can be drawn from the emf device, only when R = 0, i.e.
    Imax = \(\frac {E}{R}\)
  3. Imax is the maximum allowed current from an emf device (or a cell) which decides the maximum current rating of a cell or a battery.

Question 59.
A network of resistors is connected to a 14 V battery with internal resistance 1 Q as shown in the circuit diagram.
i. Calculate the equivalent resistance,
ii. Current in each resistor,
iii. Voltage drops VAB, VBC and VDC.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 18
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 19
For equivalent resistance (Req):
RAB is given as,
\(\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{AB}}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_{1}}+\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_{2}}=\frac{1}{4}+\frac{1}{4}=\frac{2}{4}\)
∴ RAB = 2 Ω
RBC = R3 = 1 Ω
Also, RCD is given as,
\(\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{CD}}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_{4}}+\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_{5}}=\frac{1}{6}+\frac{1}{6}=\frac{2}{6}\)
∴ RCD = 3 Ω
∴ Req = RAB + RBC + RCD
= 2 + 1 + 3 = 6Ω

ii. Current through each resistor:
Total current, I = \(\frac{\mathrm{E}}{\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{eq}}+\mathrm{r}}\) = \(\frac {14}{6+1}\) = 2 A
Across AB, as, R1 = R2
V1 = V2
∴I1 × 4 = I2 × 4
∴ I1 = I2
But, I1 + I2 = I
∴ 2I1 = I
∴ I1 = I2 =1 A ….(∵I = 2 A)
Similarly, as R4 = R5
I3 = I4 = 1 A
Current through resistor BC is same as I.
∴ IBC = 2 A

iii. Voltage drops across AB, BC and CD:
VAB = IRAB = 2 × 2 = 4 V
VBC = IRBC = 2 × 1 = 2 V
VCD = IRCD = 2 × 3 = 6 V

Question 60.
i. Three resistors 2 Ω, 4 Ω and 5 Ω are combined in parallel. What is the total resistance of the combination?
ii. If the combination is connected to a battery of e.m.f. 20 V and negligible internal resistance, determine the current through each resistor and the total current drawn from the battery.
Answer:
Given: R1 = 2Ω, R2 = 4 Ω, R3 = 5 Ω,
V = 20 V
To Find: i. Total resistance (R)
ii. Current through each resistor (I1, I2, I3 respectively)
iii. Total current (I)
Formulae:
i. \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_{1}}+\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_{2}}+\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_{3}}\)
ii. V = IR
iii. Total current, I = I1 +I2 + I3
Calculation
From formula (i):
\(\frac{1}{R}=\frac{1}{2}+\frac{1}{4}+\frac{1}{5}=\frac{19}{20}\)
∴ R = \(\frac {20}{19}\) Ω
From formula (ii):
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 20
From formula (iii):
I = 10 + 5 + 4
∴ I = 19 A

Question 61.
i. Three resistors 1 Ω, 2 Ω and 3 Ω are combined in series. What is the total resistance of the combination?
ii. If the combination is connected to a battery of e.m.f. 12 V and negligible internal resistance, obtain the potential drop across each resistor.
Answer:
Given: R1 = 1Ω, R2 = 2 Ω, R3 = 3 Ω,
V = 12 V
To Find: i. Total resistance (R)
ii. P.D Across R1, R2, R3 (V1, V2, V3 respectively)
Formulae:
i. Rs = R1 + R2 + R3
ii. V = IR
Calculation
From formula (i):
Rs = l + 2 + 3 = 6 Ω
From formula (ii),
1 = \(\frac {V}{R}\) = \(\frac {12}{6}\) = 2A
∴ V1 = IR1 = 2 × 1 = 2 V
∴ V2 = IR2 = 2 × 2 = 4 V
∴ V3 = IR3 = 2 × 3 = 6 V

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors

Question 62.
A voltmeter is connected across a battery of emf 12 V and internal resistance of 10 Ω. If the voltmeter resistance is 230 Ω, what reading will be shown by the voltmeter? Answer:
Given: E = 12 volt, r = 10 Ω, R = 230 Ω
To find: Reading shown by voltmeter (V)
Formula: i. I = \(\frac {E}{R+r}\)
ii. V = E – Ir
Calculation
From formula (i),
I = \(\frac{12}{230+10}=\frac{12}{240}=\frac{1}{20} \mathrm{~A}\)
From formula (ii),
V= 12 – \(\frac {1}{20}\) × 10 = 12 – 0.5
= 11.5 volt

Question 63.
A battery of e.m.f. 10 V and internal resistance 3 Ω is connected to a resistor. If the current in the circuit is 0.5 A, what is the resistance of the resistor? What is the terminal voltage of the battery when the circuit is closed?
Answer:
Given: E = 10 V, r = 3 Ω, I = 0.5 A
To find: i. Resistance of resistor (R)
ii. Terminal voltage of battery (V)
Formula: I = \(\frac {E}{R+r}\)
Calculation: From formula, R = \(\frac {E}{I}\) – r
∴ R = \(\frac {10}{0.5}\)– 3 = 17 Ω
∴ V = IR = 0.5 × 17 = 8.5 volt

Question 64.
How many cells each of 1.5 V/500 mA rating would be required in series-parallel combination to provide 1500 mA at 3 V?
Answer:
21 = ………… = 1.5 V (given)
I1 = I2 = …………… = 500 mA (given)
1500 mA at 3 V is required.
To determine required number of cells:
For series V = V1 + V2 + ………….., and current remains same.
For parallel I = I1 + I2 + ………, and voltage remains same.
To achieve battery output of 3V, the cells should be connected in series.
If n are the number of cells connected in series, then
V = V1 + V2 + …………. + Vn
∴ V = nV1
∴ 3 = n × 1.5
∴ n = 2 cells in series
The series combination of two cells in series will give a current 500 mA.
To achieve output of 1500 mA, the number of batteries (n) connected in parallel, each one having output 3V is,
I = I1 + I2 + ………. + In
∴ I = nI1
∴ 1500 = n × 500
∴ n = 3 batteries each of two cells
∴ No of cells required are 2 × 3 = 6 .
∴ Number of cells = 6
The six cells must be connected as shown
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 21

Question 65.
Explain the concept of series combination of cells.
Answer:
i. In a series combination, cells are connected in single electrical path, such that the positive terminal of one cell is connected to the negative terminal of the next cell, and so on.

ii. The terminal voltage of batteiy/cell is equal to the sum of voltages of individual cells in series. Example: Given figure shows two 1.5 V cells connected in series. This combination provides total voltage,
V = 1.5 V + 1.5 V = 3 V.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 22

iii. The equivalent emf of n number of cells in series combination is the algebraic sum of their individual emf.
\(\sum_{i} \mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{i}}\) = E1 + E2 + E2+ …….. + En

iv. The equivalent internal resistance of n cells in a series combination is the sum of their individual internal resistance.
\(\sum_{i} \mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{i}}\) = r1 + r2 + r3 + ……… + rn

Question 66.
State advantages of cells in series.
Answer:

  1. The cells connected in series produce a larger resultant voltage.
  2. Cells which are damaged can be easily identified, hence can be easily replaced.

Question 67.
Explain combination of cells in parallel. Ans:
Answer:
i. Consider two cells which are connected in parallel. Here, positive terminals of all the cells are connected together and the negative terminals of all the cells are connected together.

ii. In parallel connection, the current is divided among the branches i.e. I1 and I2 as shown in figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 23

iii. Consider points A and B having potentials VA and VB, respectively.

iv. For the first cell the potential difference across its terminals is, V = VA – VB = E1 – I1 r1
∴ I1 = \(\frac {E_1V}{r_1}\) ………. (1)

v. Point A and B are connected exactly similarly to the second cell.
Hence, considering the second cell,
V = VA – VB = E2 – I2r2
∴ I2 = \(\frac {E_2V}{r_2}\) ………. (2)

vi. Since, I = I1 + I2 ………….. (3)
Combining equations (1), (2) and (3),
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 24

viii. If we replace the cells by a single cell connected between points A and B with the emf Eeq and the internal resistance req then,
V = Eeq– Ireq
From equations (4) and (5),
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 25

ix. For n number of cells connected in parallel with emf E1, E2, E3, ………….., En and internal resistance r1, r2, r3, …………, rn
\(\frac{1}{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{rq}}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{r}_{1}}+\frac{1}{\mathrm{r}_{2}}+\frac{1}{\mathrm{r}_{3}}+\ldots \ldots \ldots+\frac{1}{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{n}}}\)
and \(\frac{\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{eq}}}{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{rq}}}=\frac{\mathrm{E}_{1}}{\mathrm{r}_{1}}+\frac{\mathrm{E}_{2}}{\mathrm{r}_{2}}+\ldots \ldots \ldots+\frac{\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{n}}}{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{n}}}\)

Question 68.
State advantages and disadvantages of cells in parallel.
Answer:
Advantages:
For cells connected in parallel in a circuit, the circuit will not break open even if a cell gets damaged or open.

Disadvantages:
The voltage developed by the cells in parallel connection cannot be increased by increasing number of cells present in circuit.

Question 69.
State the basic categories of electrical cells.
Answer:
Electrical cells can be divided into several categories like primary cell, secondary cell, fuel cell, etc.

Question 70.
Write short note on primary cell.
Answer:

  1. A primary cell cannot be charged again. It can be used only once.
  2. Dry cells, alkaline cells are different examples of primary cells.
  3. Primary cells are low cost and can be used easily. But these are not suitable for heavy loads.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors

Question 71.
Write short note on secondary cell.
Answer:

  1. The secondary cells are rechargeable and can be reused.
  2. The chemical reaction in a secondary cell is reversible.
  3. Lead acid cell and fuel cell are some examples of secondary cells.
  4. Lead acid battery is used widely in vehicles and other applications which require high load currents.
  5. Solar cells are secondary cells that convert solar energy into electrical energy.

Question 72.
Write short note on fuel cells vehicles.
Answer:

  1. Fuel cells vehicles (FCVs) are electric vehicles that use fuel cells instead of lead acid batteries to power the vehicles.
  2. Hydrogen is used as a fuel in fuel cells. The by product after its burning is water.
  3. This is important in terms of reducing emission of greenhouse gases produced by traditional gasoline fuelled vehicles.
  4. The hydrogen fuel cell vehicles are thus more environment friendly.

Question 73.
What can be concluded from the following observations on a resistor made up of certain material? Calculate the power drawn in each case.

Case Current (A) Voltage (V)
A 0.2 1.6
B 0.4 3.2
C 0.6 4.8
d 0.8 6.4

Answer:
i. As the ratio of voltage and current different readings are same, hence ohm’s is valid i.e., V = IR.

ii. Electric power is given by, P = IV
∴ (a) P1 = 0.2 × 1.6 = 0.32 watt
(b) P2 = 0.4 × 3.2 = 1.28 watt
(c) P3 = 0.6 × 4.8 = 2.88 watt
(d) P4 = 0.8 × 6.4 = 5.12 watt

Question 74.
Answer the following questions from the circuit given below. [S1, S2, S3, S4, S5 ⇒ Switches]. Calculate the current (I) flowing in the following cases:
i. S1, S4 → open; S2, S3, S5 → closed.
ii. S2, S5 → open; S1, S3, S4 → closed.
iii. S3 → open; S1, S2, S4, S5 → closed.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 26
Answer:
i. Here, the circuit can be represented as,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 27

ii. Here, the circuit can be represented as,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 28

iii. Here, the circuit can be represented as,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 29
∴ As switch S3 is open, no current will flow in the circuit.

Question 75.
An electric circuit with a carton resistor and an electric bulb (60 watt, 300 Ω) are connected in series with a 230 V source.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 30
i. Calculate the current flowing through the circuit.
ii. If the electric bulb of 60 watt is replaced by an electric bulb (80 watt, 300 Ω), will it glow? Justify your answer.
Answer:
Resistance of carbon resistor (R1)
= 16 × 10 Ω = 160 Ω ….(using colour code)
Resistance of bulb (R2) = 300 Ω
∴ Current through the circuit = \(\frac{V}{R_{1}+R_{2}}\)
∴ I = \(\frac{230}{(160+300)}=\frac{230}{460}\) = 0.5 A

ii. Power drawn through electric bulb
= I²R2 = (0.5)² × 300 = 75 watt
Hence, if the bulb is replaced by 80 watt bulb, it will not glow.

Question 76.
From the graph given below, which of the two temperatures is higher for a metallic wire? Justify your answer.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 31
Answer:
As R = \(\frac {V}{I}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 32
For constant V,
I2 > I1
∴ R1 > R2
Now, for metallic wire,
R ∝ T
∴ T1 > T2
T1 is greater than T2.

Question 77.
If n identical cells, each of emf E and internal resistance r, are connected in series, write an expression for the terminal p.d. of the combination and hence show that this is nearly n times that of a single cell.
Answer:
i. Let n identical cells, each of emf E and internal resistance r, be connected in series. Let the current supplied by this combination to an external resistance R be I.

ii. The equivalent emf of the combination,
Eeq = E + E + …….. (n times) = nE

iii. The equivalent internal resistance of the combination,
req= r + r + … (n times)
= nr

iv. The terminal p.d. of the combination is
V = Eeq – Ireq = nE – Inr = n (E – Ir)
∴ V = n × terminal p.d. of a single cell
Thus, the terminal p.d. of the series combination is n times that of a single cell.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors

Question 78.
If n identical cells, each of emf E and internal resistance r, are connected in parallel, derive an expression for the current supplied by this combination to external resistance R. Prove that the combination supplies current almost n times the current supplied by a single cell, when the external resistance R is much smaller than the internal resistance of the parallel combination of the cells.
Answer:
i. Consider n identical cells, each of emf E and internal resistance r, connected in parallel.

ii. Let the current supplied by the combination to the external resistance R be I.
In this case, the equivalent emf of the combination is E.

iii. The equivalent internal resistance r’ of the combination is,
\(\frac{1}{\mathrm{r}^{\prime}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{r}}+\frac{1}{\mathrm{r}}\) + …………. (n terms)
∴ \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{r}^{\prime}}=\frac{\mathrm{n}}{\mathrm{r}} \Rightarrow \mathrm{r}^{\prime} \frac{\mathrm{n}}{\mathrm{r}}\)

iv. But V = IR is the terminal p.d. across each cell.

v. Hence, the current supplied by each cell,
I = \(\frac {E-V}{r}\)

vi. This gives the current supplied by the combination to the external resistance as
I = \(\frac {E-V}{r}\) + \(\frac {E-V}{r}\) + …….. (n terms) = n(\(\frac {E-V}{r}\))
Thus, current I = n × current supplied by a single cell
This proves that, the current supplied by the combination is n times the current supplied by a single cell.

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
The drift velocity of the free electrons in a conductor is independent of
(A) length of the conductor.
(B) cross-sectional area of conductor.
(C) current.
(D) electric charge.
Answer:
(A) length of the conductor.

Question 2.
The direction of drift velocity in a conductor is
(A) opposite to that of applied electric field.
(B) opposite to the flow of positive charge.
(C) in the direction of the flow of electrons,
(D) all of these.
Answer:
(D) all of these.

Question 3.
The drift velocity of free electrons in a conductor is vd, when the current is flowing in it. If both the radius and current are doubled, the drift velocity will be
(A) \(\frac {v_d}{8}\)
(B) \(\frac {v_d}{4}\)
(C) \(\frac {v_d}{2}\)
(D) vd
Answer:
(C) \(\frac {v_d}{2}\)

Question 4.
The drift velocity vd of electrons varies with electric field strength E as
(A) vd ∝ E
(B) vd ∝ \(\frac {1}{E}\)
(C) vd ∝ E1/2
(D) vd × E\(\frac {1}{1/2}\)
Answer:
(A) vd ∝ E

Question 5.
When a current I is set up in a wire of radius r, the drift speed is vd. If the same current is set up through a wire of radius 2r, then the drift speed will be
(A) vd/4
(B) vd/2
(C) 2vd
(D) 4vd
Answer:
(A) vd/4

Question 6.
When potential difference is applied across an electrolyte, then Ohm’s law is obeyed at
(A) zero potential
(B) very low potential
(C) negative potential
(D) high potential.
Answer:
(D) high potential.

Question 7.
A current of 1.6 A is passed through an electric lamp for half a minute. If the charge on the electron is 1.6 × 10-19 C, the number of electrons passing through it is
(A) 1 × 1019
(B) 1.5 × 1020
(C) 3 × 1019
(D) 3 × 1020
Answer:
(D) 3 × 1020

Question 8.
The SI unit of the emf of a cell is
(A) V/m
(B) V/C
(C) J/C
(D) C/J
Answer:
(C) J/C

Question 9.
The unit of specific resistance is
(A) Ω m-1
(B) Ω-1 m-1
(C) Ω m
(D) Ω m-2
Answer:
(C) Ω m

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors

Question 10.
If the length of a conductor is halved, then its conductivity will be
(A) doubled
(B) halved
(C) quadrupled
(D) unchanged
Answer:
(D) unchanged

Question 11.
The resistance of a metal conductor increases with temperature due to
(A) change in current carriers.
(B) change in the dimensions of the conductor.
(C) increase in the number of collisions among the current carriers.
(D) increase in the rate of collisions between the current carriers and the vibrating atoms of the conductor.
Answer:
(D) increase in the rate of collisions between the current carriers and the vibrating atoms of the conductor.

Question 12.
The resistivity of Nichrome is 10-6 Ω-m. The wire of this material has radius of 0.1 mm with resistance 100 Ω, then the length will be
(A) 3.142 m
(B) 0.3142 m
(C) 3.142 cm
(D) 31.42 m
Answer:
(A) 3.142 m

Question 13.
Given a current carrying wire of non-uniform cross-section. Which of the following is constant throughout the length of the wire?
(A) Current, electric field and drift speed
(B) Drift speed only
(C) Current and drift speed
(D) Current only
Answer:
(D) Current only

Question 14.
A cell of emf E and internal resistance r is connected across an external resistance R (R >> r). The p.d. across R is A 1
(A) \(\frac {E}{R+r}\)
(B) E(I – \(\frac {r}{R}\))
(C) E(I + \(\frac {r}{R}\))
(D) E (R + r)
Answer:
(B) E(I – \(\frac {r}{R}\))

Question 15.
The e.m.f. of a cell of negligible internal resistance is 2 V. It is connected to the series combination of 2 Ω, 3 Ω and 5 Ω resistances. The potential difference across 3 Ω resistance will be
(A) 0.6 V
(B) 10 V
(C) 3 V
(D) 6 V
Answer:
(A) 0.6 V

Question 16.
A P.D. of 20 V is applied across a conductance of 8 mho. The current in the conductor is
(A) 2.5 A
(B) 28 A
(C) 160 A
(D) 45 A
Answer:
(C) 160 A

Question 17.
If an increase in length of copper wire is 0.5% due to stretching, the percentage increase in its resistance will be
(A) 0.1%
(B) 0.2%
(C) 1 %
(D) 2 %
Answer:
(C) 1 %

Question 18.
If a certain piece of copper is to be shaped into a conductor of minimum resistance, its length (L) and cross-sectional area A shall be respectively
(A) L/3 and 4 A
(B) L/2 and 2 A
(C) 2L and A2
(D) L and A
Answer:
(A) L/3 and 4 A

Question 19.
A given resistor has the following colour scheme of the various strips on it: Brown, black, green and silver. Its value in ohm is
(A) 1.0 × 104 ± 10%
(B) 1.0 × 105 ± 10%
(C) 1.0 × 106 + 10%
(D) 1.0 × 107 ± 10%
Answer:
(C) 1.0 × 106 + 10%

Question 20.
A given carbon resistor has the following colour code of the various strips: Orange, red, yellow and gold. The value of resistance in ohm is
(A) 32 × 104 ± 5%
(B) 32 × 104 ± 10%
(C) 23 × 105 ± 5%
(D) 23 × 105 ± 10%
Answer:
(A) 32 × 104 ± 5%

Question 21.
A typical thermistor can easily measure a change in temperature of the order of
(A) 10-3 °C
(B) 10-2 °C
(C) 10² °C
(D) 10³ °C
Answer:
(A) 10-3 °C

Question 22.
Thermistors are usually prepared from
(A) non-metals
(B) metals
(C) oxides of non-metals
(D) oxides of metals
Answer:
(D) oxides of metals

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors

Question 23.
On increasing the temperature of a conductor, its resistance increases because
(A) relaxation time decreases.
(B) mass of the electron increases.
(C) electron density decreases.
(D) all of the above.
Answer:
(A) relaxation time decreases.

Question 24.
Which of the following is used for the formation of thermistor?
(A) copper oxide
(B) nickel oxide
(C) iron oxide
(D) all of the above
Answer:
(D) all of the above

Question 25.
Emf of a cell is 2.2 volt. When resistance R = 5 Ω is connected in series, potential drop across the cell becomes 1.8 volt. Value of internal resistance of the cell is
(A) 10/9 Ω
(B) 7/12 Ω
(C) 9/10 Ω
(D) 12/7 Ω
Answer:
(A) 10/9 Ω

Question 26.
A strip of copper, another of germanium are cooled from room temperature to 80 K. The resistance of
(A) copper strip decreases germanium decreases. and that of
(B) copper strip decreases germanium increases. and that of
(C) Both the strip increases.
(D) copper strip increases germanium decreases. and that of
Answer:
(B) copper strip decreases germanium increases. and that of

Question 27.
The terminal voltage of a cell of emf E on short circuiting will be
(A) E
(B) \(\frac {E}{2}\)
(C) 2E
(D) zero
Answer:
(D) zero

Question 28.
If a battery of emf 2 V with internal resistance one ohm is connected to an external circuit of resistance R across it, then the terminal p.d. becomes 1.5 V. The value of R is
(A) 1 Ω
(B) 1.5 Ω
(C) 2 Ω
(D) 3 Ω
Answer:
(D) 3 Ω

Question 29.
A hall is used 5 hours a day for 25 days in a month. It has 6 lamps of 100 W each and 4 fans of 150 W. The total energy consumed for the month is
(A) 1500 kWh
(B) 150 kWh
(C) 15 kWh
(D) 1.5 kWh
Answer:
(B) 150 kWh

Question 30.
The internal resistance of a cell of emf 2 V is 0.1 Ω. It is connected to a resistance of 3.9 Ω. The voltage across the cell will be
(A) 0.5 V
(B) 1.5 V
(C) 1.95 V
(D) 2 V
Answer:
(C) 1.95 V

Question 31.
The emf of a cell is 12 V. When it sends a current of 1 A through an external resistance, the p.d. across the terminals reduces to 10 V. The internal resistance of the cell is
(A) 0.1 Ω
(B) 0.5 Ω
(C) 1 Ω
(D) 2 Ω
Answer:
(D) 2 Ω

Question 32.
Three resistors, 8 Ω, 4 Ω and 10 Ω connected in parallel as shown in figure, the equivalent resistance is
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 33
(A) \(\frac {19}{40}\) Ω
(B) \(\frac {40}{19}\) Ω
(C) \(\frac {80}{19}\) Ω
(D) \(\frac {34}{23}\) Ω
Answer:
(B) \(\frac {40}{19}\) Ω

Question 33.
A potential difference of 20 V is applied across the ends of a coil. The amount of heat generated in it is 800 cal/s. The value of resistance of the coil will be
(A) 12 Ω
(B) 1.2 Ω
(C) 0.12 Ω
(D) 0.012 Ω
Answer:
(C) 0.12 Ω

Question 34.
In a series combination of cells, the effective internal resistance will
(A) remain the same.
(B) decrease.
(C) increase.
(D) be half that of the 1st cell.
Answer:
(C) increase.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors

Question 35.
The terminal voltage across a cell is more than its e.m.f., if another cell of
(A) higher e.m.f. is connected parallel to it.
(B) less e.m.f. is connected parallel to it.
(C) less e.m.f. is connected in series with it.
(D) higher e.m.f. is connected in series with it.
Answer:
(A) higher e.m.f. is connected parallel to it.

Question 36.
A 100 W, 200 V bulb is connected to a 160 volt supply. The actual power consumption would be
(A) 64 W
(B) 125 W
(C) 100 W
(D) 80 W
Answer:
(A) 64 W

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics

Question 1.
Explain: Atoms are electrically neutral.
Answer:

  1. The matter is made up of atoms which in turn consists of elementary particles proton, neutron, and electron.
  2. A proton is considered to be positively charged and an electron to be negatively charged.
  3. Neutron is electrically neutral i.e., it has no charge.
  4. An atomic nucleus is made up of protons and neutrons and hence is positively charged.
  5. Negatively charged electrons surround the nucleus so as to make an atom electrically neutral.

Question 2.
What do the below diagrams show?
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 1
Answer:

  1. Figure (a) shows insulated conductor.
  2. Figure (b) shows that positive charge is neutralized by electron from Earth.
  3. Figure (c) shows that earthing is removed, negative charge still stays in conductor due to positive charged rod.
  4. Figure (d) shows that when rod is removed, negative charge is distributed over the surface of the conductor.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics

Question 3.
Explain concept of charging by conduction.
Answer:

  1. When certain dissimilar substances, like fur and amber or comb and dry hair, are rubbed against each other, electrons get transferred to the other substance making them charged.
  2. The substance receiving electrons develops a negative charge while the other is left with an equal amount of positive charge.
  3. This can be called charging by conduction as charges are transferred from one body to another.

Question 4.
Explain concept of charging by induction.
Answer:

  1. If an uncharged conductor is brought near a charged body, (not in physical contact) the nearer side of the conductor develops opposite charge to that on the charged body and the far side of the conductor develops charge similar to that on the charged body. This is called induction.
  2. This happens because the electrons in a conductor are free and can move easily in presence of charged body.
  3. A charged body attracts or repels electrons in a conductor depending on whether the charge on the body is positive or negative respectively.
  4. Positive and negative charges are redistributed and are accumulated at the ends of the conductor near and away from the charged body.
  5. In induction, there is no transfer of charges between the charged body and the conductor. So when the charged body is moved away from the conductor, the charges in the conductor are free again.

Question 5.
Explain the concept of additive nature of charge.
Answer:

  1. Electric charge is additive, similar to mass. The total electric charge on an object is equal to the algebraic sum of all the electric charges distributed on different parts of the object.
  2. It may be pointed out that while taking the algebraic sum, the sign (positive or negative) of the electric charges must be taken into account.
  3. Thus, if two bodies have equal and opposite charges, the net charge on the system of the two bodies is zero.
  4. This is similar to that in case of atoms where the nucleus is positively charged and this charge is equal to the negative charge of the electrons making the atoms electrically neutral.

Question 6.
State the analogy between the additive property of charge with that of mass.
Answer:

  1. The masses of the particles constituting an object are always positive, whereas the charges distributed on different parts of the object may be positive or negative.
  2. The total mass of an object is always positive whereas, the total charge on the object may be positive, zero or negative.

Question 7.
What is quantization of charge?
Answer:

  1. Protons (+ve) and electrons (-ve) are the charged particles constituting matter, hence the charge on an object must be an integral multiple of ± e i.e., q = ± ne, where n is an integer.
  2. Charge on an object can be increased or decreased in multiples of e.
  3. It is because, during the charging process an integral number of electrons can be transferred from one body to the other body. This is known as quantization of charge or discrete nature of charge.

Question 8.
Explain with an example why quantization of charge is not observed practically.
Answer:
i. The magnitude of the elementary electric charge (e), is extremely small. Due to this, the number of elementary charges involved in charging an object becomes extremely large.

ii. For example, when a glass rod is rubbed with silk, a charge of the order of one µC (10-6 C) appears on the glass rod or silk. Since elementary charge e = 1.6 × 10-19 C. the number of elementary charges on the glass rod (or silk) is given by
n = \(\frac {10^{-6}C}{1.6×10^{-19}C}\) = 6.25 × 1012
Since, it is tremendously large number, the quantization of charge is not observed and one usually observes a continuous variation of charge.

Question 9.
The total charge of an isolated system is always conserved. Explain with an example.
Answer:

  1. When a glass rod is rubbed with silk, it becomes positively charged and silk becomes negatively charged.
  2. The amount of positive charge on glass rod is found to be exactly the same as negative charge on silk.
  3. Thus, the systems of glass rod and silk together possesses zero net charge after rubbing.
    Hence, the total charge of an isolated system is always conserved.

Question 10.
Explain the conclusion when charges are brought close to each other.
Answer:

  1. Unlike charges attract each other.
  2. Like charges repel each other.

Question 11.
How much positive and negative charge is present in 1 g of water? How many electrons are present in it?
(Given: molecular mass of water is 18.0 g)
Answer:
Molecular mass of water is 18 gram, that means the number of molecules in 18 gram of water is 6.02 × 1023
∴ Number of molecules in lgm of water = \(\frac {6.02×10^{23}}{18}\)
One molecule of water (H2O) contains two hydrogen atoms and one oxygen atom. Thus, the number of electrons in ILO is sum of the number of electrons in H2 and oxygen. There are 2 electrons in H2 and 8 electrons in oxygen.
∴ Number of electrons in H2O = 2 + 8 = 10
Total number of protons / electrons in one gram of water
= \(\frac {6.02×10^{23}}{18}\) × 10 = 3.344 × 1023
Total positive charge
= 3.344 × 1023 × charge on a proton
= 3.344 × 1023 × 1.6 × 10-19C
= 5.35 × 104 C
This positive charge is balanced by equal amount of negative charge so that the water molecule is electrically neutral.
∴ Total negative charge = 5.35 × 104C

Question 12.
Define point charge. Which law explains the interaction between charges at rest?
Answer:

  1. A point charge is a charge whose dimensions are negligibly small compared to its distance from another bodies.
  2. Coulomb’s law explains the interaction between charges at rest.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics

Question 13.
State and explain Coulomb’s law of electric charge in scalar form.
Answer:
Coulomb’s law:
The force of attraction or repulsion between two point charges at rest is directly proportional to the product of the magnitude of the charges and inversely proportional to the square of the distance between them. This force acts along the line joining the two charges.
Explanation:
i. Let q1 and q2 be the two point charges at rest with each other and separated by a distance r. F is the magnitude of electrostatic force of attraction or repulsion between them.

ii. According to Coulomb’s law.
F ∝ \(\frac {q_1q_2}{r^2}\)
∴ F = K\(\frac {q_1q_2}{r^2}\)
where, K is the constant of proportionality which depends upon the units of F, q1, q2, r and medium in which charges are placed.

Question 14.
State conditions for electrostatic force to be attractive or repulsive.
Answer:

  1. The force between the two charges will be attractive, if the charges are unlike (one positive and one negative).
  2. The force between the two charges will be repulsive, if the charges are similar (both positive or both negative).

Question 15.
Prove that relative permittivity is the ratio of the force between two point charges placed a certain distance apart in free space or vacuum to the force between the same two point charges when placed at the same distance in the given medium.
Answer:
i. The force between the two charges placed in a medium is given by,
Fmed = \(\frac {1}{4πε}\) (\(\frac {q_1q_2}{r^2}\)) …………. (1)
where, ε is called the absolute permittivity of the medium.

ii. The force between the same two charges placed in free space or vacuum at distance r is given by,
Fvac = \(\frac {1}{4πε_0}\) (\(\frac {q_1q_2}{r^2}\)) …………. (1)
Dividing equation (2) by equation (1),
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 2
Hence, relative permittivity is the ratio of the force between two point charges placed a certain distance apart in free space or vacuum to the force between the same two point charges when placed at the same distance in the given medium.

Question 16.
If relative permittivity of water is 80 then derive the relation between Fwater and Fvacuum. What can be concluded from it?
Answer:
i. The force between two point charges q1 and q2 placed at a distance r in a medium of relative permittivity εr, is given by
Fmed = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0} \varepsilon_{r}} \frac{\mathrm{q}_{1} \mathrm{q}_{2}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\) …………. (1)
If the medium is vacuum,
Fvac = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{\mathrm{q}_{1} \mathrm{q}_{2}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\) …………. (2)

ii. Dividing equation (2) by equation (1),
\(\frac{\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{vac}}}{\mathrm{F}_{\text {med }}}\) = εr
For water, εr = 80 ……….. (given)
∴ Fwater = \(\frac {F_{vac}}{80}\)

iii. This means that when two point charges are placed some distance apart in water, the force between them is reduced to (\(\frac {1}{80}\))th of the force between the same two charges placed at the same distance in vacuum.

iv. Thus, it is concluded that a material medium reduces the force between charges by a factor of er, its relative permittivity.

Question 17.
Give conversions of micro-coulomb, nano-coulomb and pico-coulomb to coulomb.
Answer:
1 microcoulomb (µC) = 10-6 C
1 nanocoulomb (nC) = 10-9 C
1 picocoulomb (pC) = 10-12 C

Question 18.
Explain Coulomb’s law in vector form.
Answer:
i. Let q1 and q2 be the two similar point charges situated at points A and B and let \(\vec{r}\)12 be the distance of separation between them.

ii. The force \(\vec{F}\)21 exerted on q2 by q1 is given by,
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{21}=\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{\mathrm{q}_{1} \mathrm{q}_{2}}{\left|\mathrm{r}_{12}\right|^{2}} \times \hat{\mathrm{r}}_{12}\)
where, \(\hat{r}\)12 is the unit vector from A to B.
\(\vec{F}\)21 acts on q2 at B and is directed along BA, away from B.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 3

iii. Similarly, the force \(\vec{F}\)12 exerted on q1 by q2 is given by, \(\vec{F}\)12 = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{\mathrm{q}_{1} \mathrm{q}_{2}}{\left|\mathrm{r}_{12}\right|^{2}} \times \hat{\mathrm{r}_{21}}\)
where, \(\hat{r}\)21 is the unit vector from B to A. \(\vec{F}\)12 acts on q1 at A and is directed along BA, away from A.

iv. The unit vectors \(\hat{r}\)12 and \(\hat{r}\)21 are oppositely directed i.e., \(\hat{r}\)12 = –\(\hat{r}\)21
Hence, \(\vec{F}\)21 = –\(\vec{F}\)12
Thus, the two charges experience force of equal magnitude and opposite in direction.

v. These two forces form an action-reaction pair.

vi. As \(\vec{F}\)21 and \(\vec{F}\)12 act along the line joining the two charges, the electrostatic force is a central force.

Question 19.
State similarities and differences of gravitational and electrostatic forces.
Answer:
i. Similarities:
a. Both forces obey inverse square law:
F ∝ \(\frac{1}{r^2}\)
b. Both are central forces and they act along the line joining the two objects.

ii. Differences:
a. Gravitational force between two objects is always attractive while electrostatic force between two charges can be either attractive or repulsive depending on the nature of charges.
b. Gravitational force is about 36 orders of magnitude weaker than the electrostatic force.

Question 20.
Charge on an electron is 1.6 × 10-19 C. How many electrons are required to accumulate a charge of one coulomb?
Answer:
1 electron = 1.6 × 10-19 C
∴ 1 C = \(\frac{1}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\) electrons
= 0.625 × 1019 electrons
……. (Taking reciprocal from log table)
= 6.25 × 1018 electrons
Hence, 6.25 × 1018 electrons are required to accumulate a charge of one coulomb.

Question 21.
What is the force between two small charge spheres having charges of 2 × 10-7 C and 3 × 10-7 C placed 30 cm apart in air?
Answer:
Given: q1 = 2 × 10-7 C, q2 = 3 × 10-7 C
r = 30 cm = \(\frac {30}{100}\) m = 0.3 m
To find: Force (F)
Formula: F = \(\frac {1}{4πε_0}\) \(\frac {q_1q_2}{r^2}\)
Calculation: From formula,
F = \(\frac{9 \times 10^{9} \times 2 \times 10^{-7} \times 3 \times 10^{-7}}{(0.3)^{2}}\)
∴ F = 6 × 10-3 N

Question 22.
The electrostatic force on a small sphere of charge 0.4 µC due to another small sphere of charge -0.8 µC in air is 0.2 N. (i) What is the distance between the two spheres? (ii) What is the force on the second sphere due to the first?
Answer:
i. Given: q1 = 0.4 µC = 0.4 × 10-6 C,
q2 = -0.8 µC = -0.8 × 10-6 C, F = 0.2 N
To find: i. Distance (r)
ii. Force on second sphere (F)
Formula: F = \(\frac {1}{4πε_0}\) \(\frac {q_1q_2}{r^2}\)
Calculation:
i. From formula,
r² = \(\frac {1}{4πε_0}\) \(\frac {q_1q_2}{F}\)
r² = \(\frac{9 \times 10^{9} \times 0.4 \times 10^{-6} \times 0.8 \times 10^{-6}}{0.2}\)
= 0.0144
∴ r = \(\sqrt{0.0144}\) = 0.12 m
∴ r = 12 cm

ii. The force on the second sphere due to the first is also 0.2 N and is attractive in nature.

Question 23.
i. Two insulated charged copper spheres A and B have their centres separated by a distance of 50 cm. What is the mutual force of electrostatic repulsion, if the charge on each is 6.5 × 10-7 C? The radii of A and B are negligible compared to the distance of separation,
ii. What is the force of repulsion if each sphere is charged double the above amount and the distance between them is halved?
Answer:
Given: q1 = 6.5 × 10-7 C q2 = 6.5 × 10-7 C
r = 50 cm = 0.50 m
To find: Force of repulsion (F)
Formula: F = \(\frac {1}{4πε_0}\) \(\frac {q_1q_2}{r^2}\)
Calculation:
From formula,
F = \(\frac{9 \times 10^{9} \times 6.5 \times 10^{-7} \times 6.5 \times 10^{-7}}{(0.50)^{2}}\)
F = 1.52 × 10-2 N

ii. When each charge is doubled and the distance between them is reduced to half, then
F = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{\left(2 q_{1}\right)\left(2 q_{2}\right)}{(r / 2)^{2}}\)
= 16 × \(\frac {1}{4πε_0}\) \(\frac {q_1q_2}{r^2}\) = 16 × 1.52 × 10-2
∴ F = 0.24 N

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics

Question 24.
Calculate and compare the electrostatic and gravitational forces between two protons which are 10-15 m apart. Value of G = 6.674 × 10-11 m³ kg-1 s-2 and mass of the porton is 1.67 × 10-27 kg.
Answer:
Given: G = 6.674 × 10-11 m³ kg-1 s-2
mp = 1.67 × 10-27 kg.
qp = 1.67 × 10-19 C, r = 10-15
To find:
i. Electrostatic Force (FE)
ii. Gravitational Force (FG)
Formula: i. FE = \(\frac {1}{4πε_0}\) \(\frac {q_1q_2}{r^2}\)
ii. FE = \(\frac {Gm_1m_2}{r^2}\)
Calculation:
From formula (i),
\(\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{E}}=9 \times 10^{9} \times \frac{1.6 \times 10^{-19} \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}{\left(10^{-15}\right)^{2}}\)
= 9 × 1.6 × 1.6 × 10
= 90 × 1.6 × 1.6
= antilog [log 90 + log 1.6 + log 1.6]
= antilog [1.9542 + 0.2041 + 0.2041]
= antilog [2.3624]
= 2.303 × 10² N
From formula (ii),
\(\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{G}}=6.674 \times 10^{-11} \times \frac{1.67 \times 10^{-27} \times 1.67 \times 10^{-27}}{\left(10^{-15}\right)^{2}}\)
= 6.674 × 1.67 × 1.67 × 10-35
= {antilog [log 6.674 + log 1.67 + log 1.67]} × 10-35
= {antilog [0.8244 + 0.2227 + 0.2227]} × 10-35
= {antilog [1.2698]} × 10-35
= 1.861 × 101 × 10-35
= 1.861 × 10-34 N
Now,
\(\frac{\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{E}}}{\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{G}}}=\frac{2.303 \times 10^{2}}{1.861 \times 10^{-34}}\)
= {antilog [log 2.303 – log 1.861]} × 1036
= {antilog [0.3623 – 0.2697]} × 1036
= {antilog [0.0926]}
= 1.238 × 1036
∴ FE ≈ 1036 × FG

Question 25.
State and explain principle of superposition.
Answer:
Statement: When a number of charges are interacting, the resultant force on a particular charge is given by the vector sum of the forces exerted by individual charges.
Explanation:
i. Consider a number of point charges q1, q2, q3 ……………… kept at points A1, A2, A3 ………….. as shown in figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 4

ii. The force exerted on the charge q1 by q2 is \(\vec{F}\)12 The value of \(\vec{F}\)12 is calculated by ignoring the presence of other charges. Similarly, force \(\vec{F}\)13, \(\vec{F}\)14 can be found, using the Coulomb’s law.

iii. Total force \(\vec{F}\)1 on charge qi is the vector sum of all such forces.
\(\vec{F}\)1 = \(\vec{F}\)12 + \(\vec{F}\)13 + \(\vec{F}\)14 + …………..
\( =\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}}\left[\frac{\mathrm{q}_{1} \mathrm{q}_{2}}{\left|\mathrm{r}_{21}\right|^{2}} \times \hat{\mathrm{r}}_{21}+\frac{\mathrm{q}_{1} \mathrm{q}_{3}}{\left|\mathrm{r}_{31}\right|^{2}} \times \hat{\mathrm{r}}_{31}+\ldots .\right]\)

where \(\hat{r}\)21, \(\hat{r}\)31 are unit vectors directed to q1 from q2, q3 respectively and r21, r31, r41 are the distances from q1 to q2, q3 respectively.

iv. If q1, q2, q3 ……., qn are the point charges then the force \(\vec{F}\) exerted by these charges on a test charge q0 is given by,
\(\vec{F}\)test = \(\vec{F}\)1 = \(\vec{F}\)2 + \(\vec{F}\)3 + …. + \(\vec{F}\)n
= \(\sum_{\mathrm{n}=1}^{\mathrm{n}} \mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{n}}=\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \sum_{\mathrm{n}=1}^{\mathrm{n}} \frac{\mathrm{q}_{0} \mathrm{q}_{\mathrm{n}}}{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{n}}^{2}} \hat{\mathrm{r}}_{\mathrm{n}}\)
Where, \(\hat{r}\)n, is a unit vector directed from the nth charge to the test charge q0 and r2 is the
separation between them, \(\vec{r}\)n = rn \(\hat{r}\)n

Question 26.
Three charges of 2 µC, 3 µC and 4 µC are placed at points A, B and C respectively, as shown in the figure. Determine the force on A due to other charges.
(Given: AB = 4 cm, BC = 3 cm)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 5
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 6
Using pythagoras theorem
AC = \(\sqrt {AB^2+BC^2}\)
= \(\sqrt {4^2+3^2}\)
AC = 5 cm
Magnitude of force \(\vec{F}\)AB on A due to B is,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 7
In ∆ABC 4
cos θ = \(\frac {4}{5}\)
θ = cos-1 (\(\frac {4}{5}\)) = 36.87°
Forces acting points A are
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 8
= 59.36 N
Direction of resultant force is 36.87° (north of west)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 9
[Note: The question given above is modified considering minimum requirement of data needed to solve the problem.]

Question 27.
There are three charges of magnitude 3 pC, 2 pC and 3 pC located at three corners A, B and C of a square ABCD of each side measuring 2 m. Determine the net force on 2 pC charge.
Answer:
Given: q1 = 3 µC, q2 = 2 µC, q3 = 3 µC, r = 2 m
To find: Net force on q2 (R)
Formula: F = \(\frac {1}{4πε_0}\) \(\frac {q_1q_2}{r^2}\)
Calculation:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 10
From the formula,
Force on q2 because of q1
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 11
Net force on q2 is the resultant force of \(\vec{F}\)21 and \(\vec{F}\)23 which is given by,
R = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{F}_{21}^{2}+\mathrm{F}_{23}^{2}}\)
= \(\sqrt{\left(1.35 \times 10^{-2}\right)^{2}+\left(1.35 \times 10^{-2}\right)^{2}}\)
∴ R = 1.91 × 10-2 N

Question 28.
Explain the concept of electric field.
Answer:

  1. The space around a charge gets modified when a test charge is brought in that region, it experiences a coulomb force. The region around a charged object in which coulomb force is experienced by another charge is called electric field.
  2. Mathematically, electric field is defined as the force experienced per unit charge.
  3. The coulomb force acts across an empty space (vacuum) and does not need any intervening medium for its transmission.
  4. The electric field exists around a charge irrespective of the presence of other charges.
  5. Since the coulomb force is a vector, the electric field of a charge is also a vector and is directed along the direction of the coulomb force, experienced by a test charge.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics

Question 29.
Define electric field. State its SI unit and dimensions.
Answer:

  1. Electric field is the force experienced by a test charge in presence of the given charge at the given distance from it.
    \(\vec{E}\) = \(\lim _{q \rightarrow 0} \frac{\vec{F}}{q}\)
  2. SI unit: newton per coulomb (N/C) or volt per metre (V/m).
  3. Dimensions: [L M T-3 A-1]

Question 30.
Establish relation between electric field intensity and electrostatic force.
Answer:
i. Let Q and q be two charges separated by a distance r.
The coulomb force between them is given by \(\vec{F}\) = \(\frac {1}{4πε_0}\) \(\frac {Qq}{r^2}\) \(\hat{r}\)
where, \(\hat{r}\) is the unit vector along the line joining Q to q.

ii. Therefore, electric field due to charge Q is given \(\vec{F}\) = \(\frac{\vec{F}}{\mathrm{q}}=\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{\mathrm{Q}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}} \hat{\mathrm{r}}\)

iii. Electric field at a point is useful to estimate the force experienced by a charge at that point.

Question 31.
State an expression for electric field on the surface of the sphere due to a positive point charge placed at its centre.
Answer:
The magnitude of electric field at a distance r from a point charge Q is same at all points on the surface of a sphere of radius r as shown in figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 12
ii. Magnitude of electric field is given by,
E = \(\frac {1}{4πε_0}\) \(\frac {Q}{r^2}\)
iii. Its direction is along the radius of the sphere, pointing away from its centre if the charge is positive.

Question 32.
Derive expression for electric field intensity due to a point charge in a material medium.
Answer:
i. Consider a point charge q placed at point O in a medium of dielectric constant K as shown in figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 13

ii. Consider the point P in the electric field of point charge at distance r from q. A test charge q0 placed at the point P will experience a force which is given by the Coulomb’s law,
\(\vec{F}\) = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0} \mathrm{~K}} \frac{\mathrm{qq}_{0}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}} \hat{\mathrm{r}}\)
where \(\hat{r}\) is the unit vector in the direction of force i.e., along OP.

iii. By the definition of electric field intensity,
\(\vec{F}\) = \(\frac{\vec{F}}{\mathrm{q}_{0}}=\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0} \mathrm{~K}} \frac{\mathrm{q}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}} \hat{\mathrm{r}}\)
The direction of \(\vec{E}\) will be along OP when q is positive and along PO when q is negative.

iv. The magnitude of electric field intensity in a medium is given by, E = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0} \mathrm{~K}} \frac{\mathrm{q}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)

v. For air or vacuum, K = 1 then
E = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{\mathrm{q}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)

Question 33.
Show graphical representation of variation of coulomb force and electric field due to point charge with distance.
Answer:
Electrostatic force: F = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{\mathrm{q}_{1} \mathrm{q}_{2}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
Electric field: E : \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{\mathrm{q}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
The coulomb force (F) between two charges and electric field (E) due to a charge both follow the inverse square law.
(F ∝ 1/r², E ∝ 1/r²)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 14

Question 34.
What is non-uniform electric field?
Answer:
A field whose magnitude and direction is not the same at all points.
For example, field due to a point charge. In this case, the magnitude of field is same at distance r from the point charge in any direction but the direction of the field is not same.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 15

Question 35.
Derive relation between electric field (E) and electric potential (V).
Answer:
i. A pair of parallel plates is connected as shown in the figure. The electric field between them is uniform
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 16

ii. A potential difference V is applied between two parallel plates separated by a distance ‘d’.

iii. The electric field between them is directed from plate A to plate B.

iv. A charge +q placed between the plates experiences a force F due to the electric field.

v. If the charge is moved against the direction of field, i.e., towards the positive plate, some amount of work is done on it.

vi. If the charge is moved +q from the negative plate B to the positive plate A, then the work done against the field is W = Fd; where ‘d’ is the separation between the plates.

vii. The potential difference V between the two plates is given by W = Vq,
but W = Fd
∴ Vq = Fd
∴ \(\frac {F}{q}\) = \(\frac {V}{d}\) = E
∴ Electric field can be defined as E = V/d.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics

Question 36.
What are electric lines of force?
Answer:
i. An electric line of force is an imaginary curve drawn in such a way that the tangent at any given point on this curve gives the direction of the electric field at that point.

ii. If a test charge is placed in an electric field it would be acted upon by a force at every point in the field and will move along a path.

iii. The path along which the unit positive charge moves is called a line of force.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 17

iv. A line of force is defined as a curve such that the tangent at any point to this curve gives the direction of the electric field at that point.

v. The density of field lines indicates the strength of electric fields at the given point in space.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 18

Question 37.
State the characteristics of electric lines of force.
Answer:

  1. The lines of force originate from a positively charged object and end on a negatively charged object.
  2. The lines of force neither intersect nor meet each other, as it will mean that electric field has two directions at a single point.
  3. The lines of force leave or terminate on a conductor normally.
  4. The lines of force do not pass through conductor i.e., electric field inside a conductor is always zero, but they pass through insulators.
  5. Magnitude of the electric field intensity is proportional to the number of lines of force per unit area of the surface held perpendicular to the field.
  6. Electric lines of force are crowded in a region where electric intensity is large.
  7. Electric lines of force are widely separated from each other in a region where electric intensity is small
  8. The lines of force of an uniform electric field are parallel to each other and are equally spaced.

Question 38.
Find the distance from a charge of 4 µC placed in air which produces electric field of intensity 9 × 10³ N/C.
Answer:
Given: K = 1, E = 9 × 10³ N/C
q = 4 µC = 4 × 10-6
To Find: Distance (r)
Formula: E = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0} K} \frac{q}{r^{2}}\)
Calculation from formula
9 × 10³ = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{4 \times 10^{-6}}{r^{2}}\)
∴ 9 × 10³ = 9 × 109 \(\frac{4 \times 10^{-6}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
∴ r² = 4
∴ r = 2 m

Question 39.
What is the magnitude of a point charge chosen so that the electric field 50 cm away has magnitude 2.0 N/C?
Answer:
Given: r = 50 cm – 0.5 m, E = 2 N/C,
To find: Magnitude of charge (q)
Formula: E = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{q}{r^{2}}\)
Calculation from formula
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 19

Question 40.
Three point charges are placed at the vertices of a right angled isosceles triangle as shown in the given figure. What is the magnitude and direction of the resultant electric field at point P which is the mid point of its hypotenuse?
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 20
Answer:
Electric field at P due to the charges at A, B and C are shown in the figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 21
Let \(\vec{E}\)A be the field at P due to charge at A and \(\vec{E}\)c be the field at P due to charge at C.
Since P is the midpoint of AC and the fields at A and C are equal in magnitudes and are opposite in direction, EA = – EC .
i.e., \(\vec{E}\)A + \(\vec{E}\)C = 0.
Thus, the field at P is only to the charge at B and is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 22

Question 41.
A simplified model of hydrogen atom consists of an electron revolving about a proton at a distance of 5.3 × 10-11 m. The charge on a proton is +1.6 × 10-19 C. Calculate the intensity of the electric field due to proton at this distance. Also find the force between electron and proton.
Answer:
Given: r = 5.3 × 10-11 m
q = 1.6 × 10-19 C
To Find: i. Intensity of electric field (E)
ii. Force (F)
Formula: i. E = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \times \frac{\mathrm{q}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
ii. E = \(\frac {F}{q}\)
Calculation from formula (i)
E = 9 × 109 × \(\frac{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}{\left(5.3 \times 10^{-11}\right)^{2}}\)
= 5.126 × 1011 N/C
Force between electron and proton,
Force between electron and proton,
F = E × qe ….[From formula (ii)]
= 5.126 × 10-11 × -1.6 × 10-19
= -8.201 × 108 N

Question 42.
The force exerted by an electric field on a charge of +10 µC at a point is 16 × 10-4 N. What is the intensity of the electric field at the point?
Answer:
Given: q = 10 µC= 10 × 10-6 C, F = 16 × 10-4 N
To find: Electric field intensity (E)
Formula: E = \(\frac {F}{q}\)
Calculation: From formula,
E = \(\frac {16×10^{-4}}{10×10^{-6}}\) = 160 N/C

Question 43.
What is the force experienced by a test charge of 0.20 µC placed in an electric field of 3.2 × 106 N/C?
Answer:
Given: q0 = 0.20 µC = 0.2 × 106 C,
E = 3.2 × 106 N/C
To find: Force (F)
Formula: E = \(\frac {F}{q_0}\)
Calculation: From formula,
F = Eq0
∴ F = 3.2 × 106 × 0.2 × 10-6 = 0.64 N

Question 44.
Gap between two electrodes of the spark-plug used in an automobile engine is 1.25 mm. If the potential of 20 V is applied across the gap, what will be the magnitude of electric field between the electrodes?
Answer:
Given: V = 20 V
d = 1.25 mm = 1.25 × 10-3 m
To Find: Magnitude of electric field (E)
Formula: E = \(\frac {V}{d}\)
Calculation: From formula,
E = \(\frac {20}{1.25×10^{-3}}\)
= 1.6 × 104 V/m

Question 45.
If 100 joules of work must be done to move electric charge equal to 4 C from a place, where potential is -10 volt to another place where potential is V volt, find the value of V.
Answer:
Given: q0 = 4 C,
VA = -10 volt,
VB = V volt,
WAB = 100 J
To Find: Potential (V)
Formula: VB – VA = \(\frac {W_{AB}}{q_0}\)
Calculation: From formula,
V – (-10) = \(\frac {100}{4}\) = 25
∴ V + 10 = 25
∴ V = 15 volt

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics

Question 46.
Find the work done when a point charge of 2.0 pC is moved from a point at a potential of -10 V to a point at which the potential is zero.
Answer:
VA = -10V,
VB = 0,
q = 2 × 10-6 C
To Find: Work done (W)
Formula: VBA = \(\frac {W}{q}\)
Calculation: From formula,
W = VBA × q
= (VB – VA) × q
= (0 + 10) × 2 × 10-6
= 20 × 10-6 J
∴ W = 2 × 10-5 J

Question 47.
Explain the term: Electric flux
Answer:
i. The number of lines of force per unit area is the intensity of the electric field \(\vec{E}\).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 23

ii. When the area is inclined at an angle θ with the direction of electric field, the electric flux can be calculated as follows.
Let the angle between electric field \(\vec{E}\), and area vector \(\vec{dS}\) be θ, then the electric flux passing through are dS is given by
dø = (component of dS along \(\vec{E}\)) × (area of \(\vec{dS}\))
dø = EdS cos θ
dø = \(\vec{E}\) .\(\vec{dS}\)
Total flux through the entire surface .
ø = ∫dø = \( \int_{S} \vec{E} \cdot d \vec{S}=\vec{E} \cdot \vec{S}\)

iii. The SI unit of electric flux can be calculated using,
ø = \(\vec{E}\). \(\vec{S}\) = (V/m) m² = V m
[Note: Area vector is a vector whose magnitude is equal to area and is directed normal to its surface]

Question 48.
The electric flux through a plane surface of area 200 cm² in a region of uniform electric field 20 N/C is 0.2 N m²/C. Find the angle between electric field and normal to the surface.
Answer:
Given: ds = 200 cm² = 2 × 10-2 m², E = 20 N/C,
ø = 0.2 N m²/C
To find: Angle between electric field and normal (θ)
Formula: ø = Eds cos θ
Calculation:
From formula,
cos θ = \(\frac {ø}{Eds}\) = \(\frac {0.2}{20×2×10^{-2}}\) = \(\frac {1}{2}\)
∴ θ = cos-1 (\(\frac {1}{2}\))
∴ θ = 60°

Question 49.
A charge of 5.0 C is kept at the centre of a sphere of radius 1 m. What is the flux passing through the sphere? How will this value change if the radius of the sphere is doubled?
Answer:
Given: q = 5C, r = 1 m
To find: Flux (ø)
Formulae: i. E = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \times \frac{\mathrm{q}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
ii. ø = E × A = E (4πr²)
Calculation: From formula (i),
E = 9 × 109 × \(\frac {5}{1^2}\)
= 4.5 × 1010 N/C
From formula (ii),
ø = E × 4 π r²
= 4.5 × 1010 × 4 × 3.14 × 1²
ø = 5.65 × 1011 Vm
This value of flux will not change if radius of sphere is doubled. Though radius of sphere will increase, increased distance will reduce the electric field intensity. As E ∝ \(\frac {1}{r^2}\) and A × r² net variation in total flux will not be observed.

Question 50.
State and prove Gauss’ law of electrostatics.
Answer:
Statement:
The flux of the net electric field through a closed surface equals the net charge enclosed by the surface divided by Eo.
\(\int \vec{E} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{dS}}=\frac{\mathrm{Q}}{\varepsilon_{0}}\)
where Q is the total charge within the surface.

Proof:
i. Consider a closed surface of any shape which encloses number of positive electric charges.

ii. Imagine a small charge +q present at a point O inside closed surface. Imagine an infinitesimal area dS of the given irregular closed surface.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 24

iii. The magnitude of electric field intensity at point P on dS due to charge +q at point O is, E = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}}\left(\frac{\mathrm{q}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\right)\) ………… (1)

iv. The direction of E is away from point O. Let θ be the angle subtended by normal drawn to area dS and the direction of E

v. Electric flux passing through area (dø)
= Ecosθ dS
= \(\frac{\mathrm{q}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0} \mathrm{r}^{2}}\) cosθ dS ………….. (from 1)
= \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{q}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}}\right)\left(\frac{\mathrm{d} \mathrm{S} \cos \theta}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\right)\)
But, dω = \(\frac {dS cos θ}{r^2}\)
where, dco is the solid angle subtended by area dS at a point O.
∴ dø = \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{q}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}}\right)\) dω …………. (2)

vi. Total electric flux crossing the given closed surface can be obtained by integrating equation (2) over the total area.
\(\phi_{\mathrm{E}}=\int_{\mathrm{s}} \mathrm{d} \phi=\int_{\mathrm{s}} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{E}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{dS}}=\int \frac{\mathrm{q}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \mathrm{~d} \omega=\frac{\mathrm{q}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \int \mathrm{d} \omega\)

vii. But ∫dω = 4π = solid angle subtended by entire closed surface at point O.
Total Flux = \(\frac {q}{4πε_0}\) (4π)
∴ øE = \(\int_{\mathrm{s}} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{E}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{dS}}=\frac{+\mathrm{q}}{\varepsilon_{0}}\)

viii. This is true for every electric charge enclosed by a given closed surface.
Total flux due to charge q1, over the given closed surface = + \(\frac {q_1}{ε_0}\)
Total flux due to charge q2, over the given closed surface = + \(\frac {q_2}{ε_0}\)
Total flux due to charge qn, over the given closed surface = +\(\frac {q_n}{ε_0}\)

ix. According to the superposition principle, the total flux c|> due to all charges enclosed within the given closed surface is
\(\phi_{\mathrm{E}}=\frac{\mathrm{q}_{1}}{\varepsilon_{0}}+\frac{\mathrm{q}_{2}}{\varepsilon_{0}}+\frac{\mathrm{q}_{3}}{\varepsilon_{0}}+\ldots+\frac{\mathrm{q}_{\mathrm{n}}}{\varepsilon_{0}}=\sum_{\mathrm{i}=1}^{\mathrm{i}=\mathrm{n}} \frac{\mathrm{q}_{\mathrm{i}}}{\varepsilon_{0}}=\frac{\mathrm{Q}}{\varepsilon_{0}}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics

Question 51.
With a help of diagram, state the direction of flux due to positive charge, negative charge and charge outside a closed surface.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 25
Positive sign indicates that the flux is directed outwards, away from the charge.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 26
If the charge is negative, the flux will be is directed inwards.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 27
If a charge is outside the closed surface, the net flux through it will be zero.

Question 52.
Explain: Electric flux is independent of shape and size of closed surface.
Answer:
i. The net flux crossing an enclosed surface is equal to \(\frac {q}{ε_0}\) where q is the net charge inside the closed surface.

ii. Consider a charge +q at the centre of concentric circles as shown in figure below.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 28
As the charge inside the sphere is unchanged, the flux passing through a sphere of any radius is the same.

iii. Thus, if the radius of the sphere is increased by a factor of 2, the flux passing through is surface remains unchanged.

iv. As shown in figure same number of lines of force cross both the surfaces.
Hence, total flux is independent of shape of the closed surface radius of the sphere and size of closed surface.

Question 53.
Define the following terms with the help of a diagram.
i. Electric dipole
ii. Dipole axis
iii. Axial line
iv. Equatorial line
Answer:
i. Electric dipole: A pair of equal and opposite charges separated by a finite distance is called an electric dipole.

ii. Dipole axis: Line joining the two charges is called the dipole axis.

iii. Axial line: A line passing through the dipole axis is called axial line.

iv. Equatorial line: A line passing through the centre of the dipole and perpendicular to the axial line is called the equatorial line.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 29
AB : Electric dipole Line joining
AB: Dipole axis
X-Y : Axial line
P-Q : Equatorial line

Question 54.
What are polar molecules? Explain with examples.
Answer:

  1. Polar molecules are the molecules in which the centre of positive charge and the negative charge is naturally separated.
  2. Molecules of water, ammonia, sulphur dioxide, sodium chloride etc. have an inherent separation of centres of positive and negative charges. Such molecules are called polar molecules.

Question 55.
What are non-polar molecules? Explain with examples.
Answer:
i. Non-polar molecules are the molecules in which the centre of positive charge and the negative charge is one and the same. They do not have a permanent electric dipole. When an external electric field is applied to such molecules, the centre of positive and negative charge are displaced and a dipole is induced.

ii. Molecules such as H2, CI2, CO2, CH4, etc., have their positive and negative charges effectively centred at the same point and are called non-polar molecules.

Question 56.
Derive expression for couple acting on an electric dipole in a uniform electric field.
Answer:
i. Consider an electric dipole placed in a uniform electric field E. The axis of electric dipole makes an angle θ with the direction of electric field.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 30

ii. The force acting on charge – q at A is \(\vec{F}\)A = -q\(\vec{E}\) in the direction of\(\vec{E}\) and the force acting on charge +q at B is \(\vec{F}\)B = + q \(\vec{E}\) in the direction opposite to \(\vec{E}\).

iii. Since \(\vec{F}\)A = –\(\vec{F}\)B, the two equal and opposite forces separated by a distance form a couple.

iv. Moment of the couple is called torque and is defined by \(\vec{τ}\) = \(\vec{d}\) × \(\vec{F}\) where, d is the perpendicular distance between the two equal and opposite forces.

v. Magnitude of Torque = Magnitude of force × Perpendicular distance
∴ Torque on the dipole (\(\vec{τ}\)) = \(\vec{BA}\) × q\(\vec{E}\)
= 2lqE sin θ
but p = q2l
∴ τ = pEsin θ
∴ In vector form \(\vec{τ}\) = \(\vec{d}\) × \(\vec{E}\)

vi. If θ = 90° sin θ = 1, then τ = pE
When the axis of electric dipole is perpendicular to uniform electric field, torque of the couple acting on the electric dipole is maximum, i.e., τ = pE.

vii. If θ = 0 then τ = 0, this is the minimum torque on the dipole. Torque tends to align its axis along the direction of electric field.

Question 57.
Derive expression for electric intensity at a point on the axis of an electric dipole.
Answer:
i. Consider an electric dipole consisting of two charges -q and +q separated by a distance 2l.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 31

ii. Let P be a point at a distance r from the centre C of the dipole.

iii. The electric intensity \(\vec{E}\)a at P due to the dipole is the vector sum of the field due to the charge -q at A and +q at B.

iv. Electric field intensity at P due to the charge -q at A = \(\vec{E}\)A = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{(-q)}{(r+l)^{2}} \hat{\mathrm{u}}_{\mathrm{pD}}\),
where, \(\hat{u}\)PD is unit vector directed along \(\vec{PD}\)

v. Electric intensity at P due to charge +q at B
\(\vec{E}\)B = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{\mathrm{q}}{(\mathrm{r}-l)^{2}} \hat{\mathrm{u}}_{\mathrm{PQ}}\)
where, \(\hat{u}\)PQ is a unit vector directed along \(\vec{PQ}\)
The magnitude of \(\vec{E}\)B is greater than that of \(\vec{E}\)A since BP < AP

vi. Resultant field \(\vec{E}\)a at P on the axis, due to the dipole is
\(\vec{E}\)a = \(\vec{E}\)B + E\(\vec{E}\)A

vii. The magnitude of \(\vec{E}\)a is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 32

ix. |\(\vec{E}\)a| is directed along PQ, which is the direction of the dipole moment \(\vec{p}\) i.e., from the negative to the positive charge, parallel to the axis.

x. If r >> l, l² can be neglected compared to r²,
|\(\vec{E}\)a| = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{2 p}{r^{3}}\)

The field will be along the direction of the dipole moment \(\vec{p}\).

Question 58.
Drive expression for electric intensity at a point on the equator of an electric dipole.
Answer:
i. Electric field at point P due to charge -q at A is \(\vec{E}\)A = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{(-\mathrm{q})}{(\mathrm{AP})^{2}} \hat{\mathrm{u}}_{\mathrm{PA}}\)
where, \(\hat{u}\)PA is a unit vector directed along \(\vec{PA}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 33

ii. Similarly, electric field at P due to charge +q at B is
\(\vec{E}\)A = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{\mathrm{q}}{(\mathrm{BP})^{2}} \hat{\mathrm{u}}_{\mathrm{BP}}\)
where \(\hat{u}\)BP is a unit vector directed along \(\vec{BP}\)

iii. Electric field at P is the sum of EA and EB
∴ \(\vec{E}\)eq = \(\vec{E}\)A + \(\vec{E}\)B

iv. Consider ∆ACP
(AP)² = (PC)² + (AC)² = r² + l² = (BP)²
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 34

v. The resultant of fields \(\vec{E}\)A and \(\vec{E}\)B acting at point P can be calculated by resolving these vectors E\(\vec{E}\)A and E\(\vec{E}\)B along the equatorial line and along a direction perpendicular to it.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 35

vi. Let the Y-axis coincide with the equator of the dipole X-axis will be parallel to dipole axis and the origin is at point P as shown.

vii. The Y-components of EA and EB are EAsin θ and EB sin θ respectively. They are equal in magnitude but opposite in direction and cancel each other. There is no contribution from them towards the resultant.

viii. The X-components of EA and EB are EAcos θ and EBcos θ respectively. They are of equal magnitude and are in the same direction.
∴ |\(\vec{E}\)eq| = EA cos θ + EB cos θ From equation (3),
|\(\vec{E}\)eq| = 2EA cos θ
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 36

x. The direction of this field is along –\(\vec{P}\) (anti-parallel to \(\vec{P}\)).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 37

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics

Question 59.
An electric dipole of length 2.0 cm is placed with its axis making an angle of 30° with a uniform electric field of 105 N/C as shown in figure. If it experiences a torque of 10√3 N m, calculate the magnitude of charge on dipole.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 38
Answer:
Given: 2l = 2 cm = 2 × 102 m
E = 105 N/C, τ = 10√3 Nm, θ = 30°
To find: Charge (q)
Formula: τ = q E 2 l sin θ
Calculation: From Formula.
q = \(\frac{τ}{\mathrm{E} \times 2 l \times \sin \theta}\)
= \(\frac{10 \sqrt{3}}{10^{5} \times 2 \times 10^{-2} \times \sin 30^{\circ}}\)
= 1.732 × 10-2 C

Question 60.
Explain the concept of continuous charge distribution.
Answer:
i. A system of charges can be considered as a continuous charge distribution, if the charges are located very close together, compared to their distances from the point where the intensity of electric field is to be found out.

ii. Thus, the charge distribution is said to be continuous for a system of closely spaced charges. It is treated equivalent to a total charge which is continuously distributed along a line or a surface or a volume.

Question 61.
Explain linear charge density.
Answer:
Consider charge q uniformly distributed along a linear conductor of length l, then the linear charge density (λ) is given as,
λ = \(\frac {q}{l}\)
For example, charge distributed uniformly on a straight thin rod or a thin nylon thread. If the charge is not distributed uniformly over the length of thin conductor then charge dq on small element of length dl can be written as dq = λ dl.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 39

Question 62.
Explain surface charge density.
Answer:
i. Consider a charge q uniformly distributed over a surface of area A then the surface charge density c is given as
σ = \(\frac {q}{A}\)
For example, charge distributed uniformly on a thin disc or a synthetic cloth. If the charge is not distributed uniformly over the surface of a conductor, then charge dq on small area element dA can be written as dq = σ dA.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 40

ii. SI unit of σ is (C / m²)

Question 63.
Explain volume charge density.
Answer:
i. Consider a charge q uniformly distributed throughout a volume V, then the volume charge density ρ is given as
ρ = \(\frac {q}{V}\)
For example, charge on a plastic sphere or a plastic cube. If the charge is not distributed uniformly over the volume of a material, then charge dq over small volume element dV can be written as dq = ρ dV.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 41

ii. S.I. unit of p is (C/m³)
[Note: Electric field due to a continuous charge distribution can be calculated by adding electric fields due to all these small charges.]

Question 64.
Explain the concept of static charge.
Answer:

  1. Static charges can be created whenever there is a friction between an insulator and other object.
  2. For example, when an insulator like rubber or ebonite is rubbed against a cloth, the friction between them causes electrons to be transferred from one to the other.
  3. This property of insulators is used in many applications such as photocopier, inkjet printer, painting metal panels, electrostatic precipitation/separators etc.

Question 65.
Explain the disadvantage of static charge.
Answer:

  1. When charge transferred from one body to other is very large, sparking can take place. For example, lightning in sky.
  2. Sparking can be dangerous while refuelling your vehicle.
  3. One can get static shock, if charge transferred is large.
  4. Dust or dirt particles gathered on computer or TV screens can catch static charges and can be troublesome.

Question 66.
State the precautions against static charge.
Answer:

  1. Home appliances should be grounded.
  2. Avoid using rubber soled footwear.
  3. Keep your surroundings humid (dry air can retain static charges).

Question 67.
Two charged particles having charge 3 × 10-8 C each are joined by an insulating string of length 2 m. Find the tension in the string when the system is kept on a smooth horizontal table.
Answer:
Tension (T) in the string is the force of repulsion (F) between the two charges.
According to Coulomb’s law,
F = \(\frac{\mathrm{q}_{1} \mathrm{q}_{2}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0} \mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
= \(\frac{9 \times 10^{9} \times 3 \times 10^{-8} \times 3 \times 10^{-8}}{2^{2}}\)
F = 2.025 × 10-6 N
Hence, tension in the string is 2.025 × 10-6 N.

Question 68.
A free pith ball of mass 5 gram carries a positive charge of 0.6 × 10-7 C. What is the nature and magnitude of charge that should be given to second ball fixed 6 cm vertically below the former pith ball so that the upper pith bath is stationary?
Answer:
Let +q2 be the charge on lower pith ball.
Now, the upper pith ball become stationary only when its weight acting downward is balanced by the upward force of repulsion between two pith balls,
i.e., FE = mg
∴ \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{\mathrm{q}_{1} \mathrm{q}_{2}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\) = mg
∴ \(\frac{9 \times 10^{9} \times 0.6 \times 10^{-7} \times \mathrm{q}_{2}}{\left(6 \times 10^{-2}\right)^{2}}\) = 5 × 10-3 × 9.8
∴ q2 = 3.27 × 10-7C
Hence, the second pith ball carries a positive charge of 3.27 × 10-7C.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics

Question 69.
A water drop of mass 11.0 mg and having a charge of 1.6 × 10-6 C stays suspended in a room. What will be the magnitude and direction of electric Held in the room?
Answer:
As the drop is suspended,
Force (F) due to electric field balances the weight of the drop.
∴ F = mg ………….. (1)
Here, m = 11.0 mg
= 11 × 10-6 kg,
q = 1.6 × 10-6 C
Electric field is given by,
E = \(\frac {F}{q}\)
= \(\frac {mg}{q}\)
= \(\frac {11×10^{-6}×9.8}{1.6×10^{-6}}\)
E = 67.4 N/C
As upward force balances the weight, hence direction of electric field must be vertically upwards.

Question 70.
A charged metallic sphere A is suspended by a nylon thread. Another charged metallic sphere B held by an insulating handle is brought close to A such that the distance between their centres is 10 cm, as shown in figure (a). The resulting repulsion of A is noted (for example, by shining a beam of light and measuring the deflection of its shadow on a screen.) Spheres A and B are touched by uncharged spheres C and D respectively, as shown in figure (b). C and D are then removed and B is brought closer to A to a distance of 5.0 cm between their centres, as shown in figure (c). What is the expected repulsion of A on the basis of Coulomb’s law? Spheres A and C and spheres B and D have identical sizes. Ignore the sizes of A and B comparison to the separation between their centres.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 42
Answer:
Let the original charge on sphere A be q and that on B be q’. At a distance r between their centres, the magnitude of the electrostatic force on each is given by
F = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{\mathrm{qq}^{\prime}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)

Neglecting the sizes of spheres, A and B in comparison to r. When an identical but uncharged sphere C touches A, the charges redistribute on A and C and, by symmetry, each sphere carries a charge q/2. Similarly, after D touches B, the redistributed charge on each is q’/2. Now, if the separation between A and B is halved, the magnitude of the electrostatic force on each is
F’ = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{(\mathrm{q} / 2)\left(\mathrm{q}^{\prime} / 2\right)}{(\mathrm{r} / 2)^{2}}=\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{\left(\mathrm{qq}^{\prime}\right)}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\) = F

Thus, the electrostatic force on A, due to B, remains unaltered.

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
Force between two charges separated by a certain distance in air is F. If each charge is doubled and the distance between them is also doubled, force would be
(A) F
(B) 2 F
(O’ 4 F
(D) F/4
Answer:
(A) F

Question 2.
For what order of distance is Coulomb7 s law true?
(A) For all distances.
(B) Distances greater than 10-13 m.
(C) Distances less than 10-13 m.
(D) Distance equal to 10-13 m.
Answer:
(B) Distances greater than 10-13 m.

Question 3.
The permittivity of medium is 26.55 × 10-12 C²/Nm². The dielectric constant of the medium will be
(A) 2
(B) 3
(C) 4
(D) 5
Answer:
(B) 3

Question 4.
A glass rod when rubbed with a piece of fur acquires a charge of magnitude 3.2 µC. The number of electrons transferred is
(A) 2 × 10-13 from fur to glass
(B) 5 × 1012 from glass to fur
(C) 2 × 1013 from glass to fur
(D) 5 × 1012 from fur to glass
Answer:
(A) 2 × 10-13 from fur to glass

Question 5.
Choose the correct answer.
(A) Total charge present in the universe is constant.
(B) Total positive charge present in the universe is constant.
(C) Total negative charge present in the universe is constant.
(D) Total number of charged particles present in the universe is constant.
Answer:
(A) Total charge present in the universe is constant.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics

Question 6.
If a charge is moved against the Coulomb force of an electric field,
(A) work is done by the electric field
(B) energy is used from some outside source
(C) the strength of the field is decreased
(D) the energy of the system is decreased
Answer:
(B) energy is used from some outside source

Question 7.
Two point charges +4 µC and +2 µC repel each other with a force of 8 N. If a charge of -4 µC is added to each of these charges, the force would be
(A) zero
(B) 8 N
(C) 4 N
(D) 12 N
Answer:
(A) zero

Question 8.
The electric field intensity at a point 2 m from an isolated point charge is 500 N/C. The electric potential at the point is
(A) 0 V
(B) 2.5 V
(C) 250 V
(D) 1000 V
Answer:
(D) 1000 V

Question 9.
The dimensional formula of electric field intensity is
(A) [M1E1T-2A-1]
(B) [M1L1T-3A-1]
(C) [M-1L2T-3A-1]
(D) [M1L2T-3A-2]
Answer:
(B) [M1L1T-3A-1]

Question 10.
A force of 2.25 N acts on a charge of 15 × 10-4C. Calculate the intensity of electric field at that point.
(A) 1500 NC-1
(B) 150 NC-1
(C) 15000NC-1
(D) 2500 NC-1
Answer:
(A) 1500 NC-1

Question 11.
A point charge q produces an electric field of magnitude 2 N C-1 at a point distant 0.25 m from it. What is the value of charge?
(A) 1.39 × 10-11 C
(B) 1.39 × 1011 C
(C) 13.9 × 10-11 C
(D) 13.9 × 1011 C
Answer:
(A) 1.39 × 10-11 C

Question 12.
The electric intensity in air at a point 20 cm from a point charge Q coulombs is 4.5 × 105 N/ C. The magnitude of Q is
(A) 20 µC
(B) 200 µC
(C) 10 µC
(D) 2 µC
Answer:
(D) 2 µC

Question 13.
The charge on the electron is 1.6 × 10-19 C. The number of electrons need to be removed from a metal sphere of 0.05 m radius so as to acquire a charge of 4 × 10-15 C is
(A) 1.25 × 104
(B) 1.25 × 10³
(C) 2.5 × 10³
(D) 2.5 × 104
Answer:
(D) 2.5 × 104

Question 14.
Electric lines of force about a positive point charge and negative point charge are respectively .
(A) circular, clockwise
(B) radially outward, radially inward
(C) radially inward, radially outward
(D) circular, anticlockwise
Answer:
(B) radially outward, radially inward

Question 15.
Which of the following is NOT the property of equipotential surfaces?
(A) They do not intersect each other.
(B) They are concentric spheres for uniform electric field.
(C) Potential at all points on the surface has constant value.
(D) Separation of equipotential surfaces increases with decrease in electric field.
Answer:
(B) They are concentric spheres for uniform electric field.

Question 16.
In a uniform electric field, a charge of 3 C experiences a force of 3000 N. The potential difference between two points 1 cm apart along the electric lines of force will be
(A) 10 V
(B) 3 V
(C) 0.1 V
(D) 20 V
Answer:
(A) 10 V

Question 17.
Gauss’ law helps in
(A) determination of electric field due to symmetric charge distribution.
(B) determination of electric potential due to symmetric charge distribution.
(C) determination of electric flux.
(D) situations where Coulomb’s law fails.
Answer:
(A) determination of electric field due to symmetric charge distribution.

Question 18.
The electric flux over a sphere of radius 1.0 m is ø. If the radius of the sphere is doubled without changing the charge, the flux will be
(A) 4ø
(B) 2ø
(C) ø
(D) 8ø
Answer:
(C) ø

Question 19.
Gauss’ theorem states that total normal electric induction over a closed surface in an electric field is equal to
(A) \( \frac{1}{\varepsilon} \sum \mathrm{q}_{\mathrm{n}}\)
(B) εΣ qn
(C) Σ qn
(D) q1 × q2 × q3 × ……… qn
Answer:
(C) Σ qn

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Electrostatics

Question 20.
Number of lines of induction starting from a conductor holding + q charge surrounded by a medium of permittivity ε is
(A) q and they leave the surface in normal direction.
(B) q and they leave the surface in any direction.
(C) q/ε and they leave the surface normally at every point.
(D) q/ε and they leave the surface in any direction.
Answer:
(C) q/ε and they leave the surface normally at every point.

Question 21.
An electric dipole of moment p is placed in the position of stable equilibrium in a uniform electric field of intensity E. The torque required to rotate, when the dipole makes an angle 0 with the initial position is
(A) pE cosθ
(B) pE sinθ
(C) pE tanθ
(D) pE cotθ
Answer:
(B) pE sinθ

Question 22.
Four coulomb charge is uniformly distributed on 2 km long wire. Its linear charge density is
(A) 2 C/m
(B) 4 C/m
(C) 4 × 10³ C/m
(D) 2 × 10-3 C/m
Answer:
(D) 2 × 10-3 C/m